TOSHIBA e-STUDIO 350, 352, 450, 452 Multifunctional Digital Systems Service Handbook

SERVICE HANDBOOK
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452
File No. SHE030005J0
R03092141301-TTEC
Ver10_2006-06
Trademarks
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.
The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.
The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System.
The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
© 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO350/352/450/452
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1) Transportation / Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to use the positions
as indicated below.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 83kg (182.98 lb.): e-STUDIO350/450 /
86kg (189.59 lb.): e-STUDIO352/452 therefore pay fullattention when handling it.
-
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment.
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/13.2A, 115V or 127V / 12A, 220-240V or 240V /
8A for its power source.
The equipment must be grounded for safety.
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.
Select a suitable place for installation.
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.
Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear.
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
05/11
2) Service of Machines
- Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the
damp heater and their periphery.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, developer, IH control circuit,
high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and
power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the
electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the machines with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.
- Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.
- Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.
Avoid direct exposure to the beam.Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path
of the laser beam.Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more.
A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
3) Main Service Parts for Safety
- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important
for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made
their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not
allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4) Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment.
5) Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and RAM-ICs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing
materials, used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6) When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless
otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble
small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
7) Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
8) Precautions Against Static Electricity
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and
make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et RAM-ICs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und RAM-ICs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
05/11
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452
1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES .................................. 1-1
1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 e-STUDIO352/452.................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 System List .......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.2 e-STUDIO352/452.................................................................................................... 1-9
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1
2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-13
2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-22
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-25
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)................................................... 2-27
2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/452)................................................... 2-34
2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-42
2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-45
2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450) ........................................................... 2-46
2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/452) ........................................................... 2-64
2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450).................................................................. 2-82
2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/452)................................................................ 2-144
2.2.9 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-223
2.2.10 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) /
Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)................................................................ 2-231
2.2.11 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) /
Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/452)................................................................ 2-238
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-5
3.2.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-7
3.2.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-12
3.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-21
3.3.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-21
3.3.2 Gamma slope adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-22
3.3.4 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-23
3.3.5 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-23
3.3.6 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-24
3.3.7 Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/452 > ............................................ 3-24
3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-25
3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-25
3.4.2 Adjustment of image density .................................................................................. 3-25
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-26
3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-26
3.5.2 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-27
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 CONTENTS
1
05/12
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-28
3.5.4 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-28
Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer .......................................................................... 3-29
3.6.1 Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-29
3.6.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................ 3-38
Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-40
3.7.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-45
Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-48
3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-48
Adjustment of Developer Unit ............................................................................................ 3-49
3.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap .............................................................................................. 3-49
Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015).................................................................................. 3-52
3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position ................................................................................. 3-52
3.10.2 Adjustment of RADF height .................................................................................... 3-57
3.10.3 Adjustment of skew ................................................................................................ 3-59
3.10.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ............................ 3-60
3.10.5 Adjustment of aligning ............................................................................................ 3-61
3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing ........................................................................ 3-62
3.10.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .............................................................................. 3-63
3.10.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch.......................................................... 3-65
3.10.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor ......................................................... 3-66
3.10.10Adjustment of tray volume ..................................................................................... 3-67
Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018).................................................................................. 3-68
3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-68
3.11.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-73
3.11.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-75
3.11.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-78
3.11.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-79
3.11.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-81
3.11.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-82
Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................ 3-83
3.12.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ............................................................................ 3-83
3.12.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................. 3-85
3.12.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................. 3-86
3.12.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ....................................... 3-87
3.12.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate .................................................... 3-89
3.12.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................ 3-90
3.12.7 DIP switch functions ............................................................................................... 3-92
Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)....................................................................... 3-93
3.13.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)...................................................... 3-93
3.13.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)............................................................ 3-94
3.13.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)................................................ 3-96
3.13.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) .......................... 3-98
3.13.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............................................................... 3-99
3.13.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-100
Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101).............................................................................. 3-101
3.14.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position .......................................................................... 3-101
3.14.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position ............................................................................. 3-103
3.14.3 Stopping Position Adjustment (Puncher unit) ....................................................... 3-105
Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) .................................................................................. 3-107
Adjustment of Dogleg ...................................................................................................... 3-109
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1
4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 CONTENTS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2
06/01
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-6
General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance Performed Every 120,000
Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352) and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452)) ....... 4-7
Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-8
Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352) and
75,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452).......................................................................... 4-9
Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-10
PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-29
Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-30
Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-31
Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-32
4.9.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-32
4.9.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-33
4.9.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade...................................................... 4-34
4.9.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ...................................... 4-34
4.9.5 Checking and replacing the cleaning roller ............................................................ 4-35
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 5-14
5.1.3 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-21
5.1.4 Transport jam (RADF) ............................................................................................ 5-26
5.1.5 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-32
5.1.6 Drive system related service call ............................................................................ 5-56
5.1.7 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-57
5.1.8 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-63
5.1.9 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-65
5.1.10 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-69
5.1.11 RADF related service call (MR-3015)..................................................................... 5-70
5.1.12 RADF related service call (MR-3018)..................................................................... 5-71
5.1.13 Laser optical unit related service call (MR-3018) ................................................... 5-71
5.1.14 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-72
5.1.15 Service call for others ............................................................................................. 5-90
5.1.16 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 5-93
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-108
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-130
5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-130
5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-132
5.3.3 Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed ............................. 5-134
5.3.4 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-134
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................... 6-2
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-4
6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) .......................................................................... 6-10
6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) .............................. 6-19
6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/452) ............................................. 6-33
6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ........................................................................... 6-35
6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-44
6.2.3 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-46
6.3 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO350/450) ................ 6-60
6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450).................................. 6-73
6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/452).................................. 6-85
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 CONTENTS
3
05/11
6.6 Appendix.......................................................................................................................... 6-101
6.6.1 e-STUDIO350/450................................................................................................ 6-101
6.6.2 e-STUDIO352/452................................................................................................ 6-102
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4
8.
REMOTE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-11
8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-13
8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.2 Setting .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.3 Items to be notified ................................................................................................. 8-18
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452) ........................ 9-1
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1
DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)...................................................................... Appendix
Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450) ....................................................................... Appendix
DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO352/452)...................................................................... Appendix
Connector Table (e-STUDIO352/452) ....................................................................... Appendix
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 CONTENTS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4
05/11
1.
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1.1
1
Specifications
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO450/452 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO350/352
and e-STUDIO450/452.
•
•
Copy process
Type
•
•
Original table
Accepted originals
•
Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)
Desktop type (console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) and large
capacity feeder (LCF) are installed)
Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled.
Carbon paper are not acceptable either.
Maximum size: A3/LD
Single - sided originals
Double - sided originals
MR-3015
50 to 127 g/m2
(13 lb. Bond to 34 lb. Bond)
50 to 105 g/m2
(13 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
MR-3018
35 to 157 g/m2
50 to 157 g/m2
(9.3 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover) (13 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover)
Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO350/352
Paper size
A4, LT, B5
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
LT-R, ST-R
B4, LG
A3, LD
Drawer
35
25
21
18
Paper supply
Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
35
18
25
18
21
18
18
18
PFP
LCF
35
25
35
-
21
18
-
PFP
LCF
45
28
45
-
24
21
-
e-STUDIO450/452
Paper size
A4, LT, B5
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
LT-R, ST-R
B4, LG
A3, LD
*
*
*
Drawer
45
28
24
21
Paper supply
Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
40
21
28
21
24
21
21
21
“–” means “Not acceptable”.
The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side,
multiple copying.
When the RADF is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions:
• Original/Mode:
Single side original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected.
• Number of sheets:
35[45] or more.
• Paper feeding:
LCF
• Reproduction ratio: 100%
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-1
05/11
*
System copy speed
Sec.
Copy mode
Single-sided originals
Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
Single-sided copies
*
1 set
e-STUDIO350/352
20.85
e-STUDIO450/452
17.49
3 sets
57.95
46.68
5 sets
1 set
91.20
27.42
73.50
25.71
3 sets
62.18
57.41
5 sets
1 set
97.55
55.47
89.03
54.68
3 sets
126.21
118.07
5 sets
1 set
196.93
48.22
181.36
48.20
3 sets
117.44
102.18
5 sets
184.96
155.06
*
*
*
The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original
are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the left table is selected. The period of time from
pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured
value.
Upper drawer is selected and copying is at the non-sort mode.
Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off.
Finisher is not installed.
•
Copy paper
Drawer
Size
Weight
Special
paper
ADU
PFP
A3 to A5-R
LD to ST-R
g/m2
64 to 105
17 to 28 lb.
-
LCF
Bypass copy
A4, LT
A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R
(Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.)
64 to 209 g/m2, 17 to 55
lb.(Continuous feeding)
50 to 209 g/m2, 13 to 55 lb.
(Single paper feeding)
Tracing paper, labels,
OHP film (thickness: 80µm
or thicker)
Remarks
These special paper
recommended
by Toshiba Tec
First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO350/352: Approx. 3.9sec. or less
e-STUDIO450/452: Approx. 3.9sec. or less
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
Warming-up time .................. Approx. 20 seconds (temperature: 20°C)
Multiple copying.................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
Reproduction ratio ................ Actual ratio: 100±0.5%
Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
(25 to 200% when using RADF)
Resolution/Gradation............ Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi
Gradation: 256 steps
Eliminated portion................. Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (print)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-2
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Paper feeding ....................... Automatic feeding:
Standard drawers–2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550
sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.))
PFP–Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to
550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.))
LCF–Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64
to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.))
Bypass feeding:
(Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22
lb.))
Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option)
.................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:
100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less)
Automatic duplexing unit ...... Stackless, Switchback type
Toner supply ......................... Automatic toner density detection/supply
Toner cartridge replacing method
Density control...................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
Weight .................................. 83 kg, 183 lb. (e-STUDIO350/450)
86 kg, 189.59 lb. (e-STUDIO352/452)
Power requirements ............. AC 110 V (±10%) / 13.2 A, 115 V (±10%) or 127 V (±10%) / 12 A
220-240 V (±10%) or 240 V (±10%) / 8 A
*
Power consumption.............. 1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series)
The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment.
Total counter......................... Electronical counter
Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below
W660 x D718 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO350/450)
W660 x D758 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO352/452)
When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
D
45˚
H
W
Fig. 1-1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-3
05/11
1
1.2
*
Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction
Operator’s manual
Operator's manual pocket
Power cable
1 set
4 pcs. (except for MJD)
1 pc.
1 pc.
Warranty sheet
1 pc. (for NAD)
Setup report
1 set (for NAD and MJD)
PM sticker
1 pc. (for MJD)
Drum (installed inside of the equipment)
1 pc. (for MJD)
Toner bag
1 pc.
Toner cartridge
1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD)
Developer material
Operation panel stopper
Blind seal
1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD)
1 pc.
1 pcs
Rubber plug
4 pcs.
CD-ROM
4 pcs.
Platen cover
1 pc. (for CND)
Machine version
NAD:
North America
MJD:
Europe
AUD:
Australia
ASD:
Central and South America / Hong Kong / Asia
TWD:
Taiwan
SAD
Saudi Arabia
JPD:
Japan
CND:
China
ASU:
Asia
KRD:
Korea
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-4
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.3
1.3.1
Options
1
e-STUDIO350/450
Platen cover
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Drawer module
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
Finisher (Hanging type)
Finisher (Console type)
Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type)
Hole punch unit
Staple cartridge
Bridge kit
Job Separator
Offset Tray
Key Copy Counter
Work Tray
Damp Heater
Fax Board
2nd Line for Fax Board
Wireless LAN Adapter
PCI slot
Scrambler board
Printer Kit
Printer/Scanner Kit
Scanner upgrade Kit
Desk
Data overwrite kit
*
1) N: North America
E: Europe
KA-3511PC/PC-C
MR-3015
MY-1021/-C
KD-1011/-C
KD-1012 A4/LT/A4-C
MJ-1022/-C
MJ-1023/-C
MJ-1024/-C
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S *1
STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)
STAPLE-600 (for MJ-1024)
KN-3520/-C
MJ-5004/-C
MJ-5005/-C
MU-8, MU-10
KK-3511
MF-3520 U/E
GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/TW/C/AS
GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C
GN-1010
GO-1030
GP-1030
GM-1010
GM-2010
GM-3010
MH-1700
GP-1050
F: France
S: Sweden
Notes:
1. The bridge unit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or
MJ-1024).
2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit
(MJ-6004N/E/F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-5
05/11
1.3.2
e-STUDIO352/452
Platen cover
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Drawer module
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
Finisher (Hanging type) : e-STUDIO352 only
Finisher (Console type)
Finisher (Console type)
Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type)
Hole punch unit (for MJ-1101)
Hole punch unit (for MJ-1023/1024)
Staple cartridge
Bridge kit
Job Separator
Offset Tray
Work Tray
Damp Heater
Fax Board
2nd Line for Fax Board
Printer Kit
Printer/Scanner Kit
Scanner Kit
Scrambler board
Wireless LAN module
Bluetooth module
Antenna
Data overwrite kit
PCI slot
Desk
Harness kit for coin controller
KA-3511PC
MR-3018
MY-1021/-C
KD-1011/-C
KD-1012 LT/A4/A4-C
MJ-1022/-C
MJ-1101
MJ-1023/-C
MJ-1024/-C
MJ-6101 N/E/F/S
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)
STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101)
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)
STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024)
KN-3520/-C
MJ-5004/-C
MJ-5005/-C
KK-3511
MF-3520 U/E
GD-1200 NA/EU/AU/AS/C/TW/KR
GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW
GM-1060
GM-2060
GM-4060
GP-1040
GN-1041
GN-2010
GN-3010
GP-1060
GO-1060
MH-1700
GQ-1020
Notes:
1. The bridge kit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023/1024
or MJ-1101).
2. The finisher (MJ-1023/1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/
F/S). The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/
F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040).
4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and
Bluetooth module (GN-2010).
5. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and the Bluetooth module (GN-2010) are
installed, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-6
06/06
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1.4
Supplies
Drum
Toner bag
Toner cartridge
Developer
*
*
2) N: Asia
3) T: Taiwan
1
OD-3500
PS-TB3520 /E/N *2
PS-ZT3520 /T/D/C/E *3
D-3500
E: Europe
D: Asia
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
NONE: North America
C: China
E: Europe
NONE: North America
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-7
05/05
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-8
05/11
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-600
Finisher
(Console saddle
stitcher type)
MJ-1024
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1023
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000
2nd Line for
FAX Board
GD-1160
NA/EU/TW/C
FAX Board
GD-1150
NA/AU/EU/
TW/C/AS
Drawer Module
MY-1021
PCI Slot
GO-1030
Offset Tray
MJ-5005
Job Separator
MJ-5004
Scrambler
Board
GP-1030
Hole Punch Unit
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Bridge Kit
KN-3520
Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1011
Wireless LAN
Adapter
GN-1010
Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1012 A4/LT
Platen Cover
KA-3511
Desk
MH-1700
Scanner
Upgrade Kit
GM-3010
Printer/
Scanner Kit
GM-2010
Printer Kit
GM-1010
Data overwrite kit
GP-1050
Damp Heater
MF-3520 U/E
Key Copy Counter
MU-8, MU-10
Work Tray
KK-3511
1.5.1
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-1600
Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(RADF)
MR-3015
1.5
System List
e-STUDIO350/450
Fig. 1-2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1-9
05/11
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1101
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2400
Finisher
(Console saddle
stitcher type)
MJ-1024
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1023
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000
Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-1600
Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022
Hole Punch Unit
MJ-6101 N/E/F/S
2nd Line for
FAX Board
GD-1160
NA/EU-N/TW/C
FAX Board
GD-1200
NA/EU/AU/AS/
C/TW/KR
Drawer Module
MY-1021
Scrambler
Board
GP-1040
Offset Tray
MJ-5005
Job Separator
MJ-5004
Bridge Kit
KN-3520
Damp Heater
MF-3520 U/E
Hole Punch Unit
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1011
PCI Slot
GO-1060
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(RADF)
MR-3018
Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1012 A4/LT
Platen Cover
KA-3511
Desk
MH-1700
Data
Overwrite Kit
GP-1060
Scanner Kit
GM-4060
Printer/
Scanner Kit
GM-2060
Printer Kit
GM-1060
Antenna
GN-3010
Bluetooth
Module
GN-2010
Wireless LAN
Module
GN-1041
Work Tray
KK-3511
1.5.2
e-STUDIO352/452
1
Fig. 1-3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1 - 10
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1
Error Code List
One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button
and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALLSERVICE” symbol is blinking.
2.1.1
Jam
Error code
E010
Classification
Paper exit jam
Contents
Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach
the exit sensor.
Troubleshooting
P. 5-1
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
P. 5-1
Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the
paper transport path when power is turned ON.
Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The
size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
P. 5-2
E062
Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
P. 5-2
E063
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer:
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
P. 5-2
E064
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer:
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size
setting of the equipment.
P. 5-2
HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be
printed cannot be prepared.
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through
ADU does not reach the registration sensor during
duplex printing.
P. 5-3
E020
E030
Other paper jam
E061
E065
E090
E110
Paper misfeeding
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-14
E120
Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray
does not reach the registration sensor.
P. 5-15
E130
Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed
sensor.
P. 5-16
E140
Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed
sensor.
P. 5-17
E150
PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP
upper drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-18
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-1
06/06
2
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not
reach the LCF feed sensor.
P. 5-19
Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-3
E220
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not
reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-4
E300
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-3
E160
Classification
Paper misfeeding
E190
E200
E210
E310
Paper transport jam
P. 5-20
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
E320
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-5
E330
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-3
E350
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-5
E360
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-6
E3C0
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer
feed sensor.
P. 5-3
E3D0
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper
drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the
upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the
lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-4
E340
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-2
P. 5-4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error code
Classification
E3E0
Paper transport jam
E400
Cover open jam
E410
E420
E430
E440
E450
E480
E490
E491
E510
Paper transport jam
(ADU section)
E520
E550
Other paper jam
E711
RADF jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower
drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the
lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the
LCF feed sensor.
Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover
has opened during printing.
Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened
during printing.
P. 5-5
P. 5-21
P. 5-21
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has
opened during printing.
The ADU has opened during printing.
P. 5-22
Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened
during printing.
LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has
opened during printing.
Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened
during printing.
P. 5-23
P. 5-22
P. 5-23
P. 5-24
Job separator cover open jam: The job separator
cover has opened during printing.
Offset tray cover open jam: The offset tray cover
has opened during printing.
P. 5-24
Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU
entrance sensor.
P. 5-7
Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The
paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.
Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The
paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).
P. 5-8
P. 5-25
P. 5-9
Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The
original fed from the original feeding tray does not
reach the original length sensor.
P. 5-26
E712
Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach
the registration sensor.
P. 5-26
E713
Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing
edge of the original does not pass the original
length sensor after its leading edge has reached
this sensor.
P. 5-26
E714
Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
P. 5-26
E721
Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse
side).
P. 5-27
E722
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning):
The original which passed the read sensor does not
reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the
scanning section to exit section.
P. 5-27
E723
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor
does not reach the reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section.
P. 5-27
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-3
2
Error code
E724
Classification
RADF jam
E725
E726
Contents
Troubleshooting
Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing
edge of the original does not pass the registration
sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
P. 5-28
P. 5-28
Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives
the transport/exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the exposure waiting
position.
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
P. 5-28
E741
Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of
the original does not pass the reversal sensor after
its leading edge has reached this sensor.
P. 5-29
E742
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during
reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original
does not reach the reverse sensor when original is
fed from the reverse section.
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse
feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reverse sensor when the
original is exited from the reverse section.
P. 5-30
E860
Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has
opened during RADF operation.
P. 5-30
E870
RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF
operation.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The
paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
P. 5-31
E731
E743
E910
Finisher jam (Bridge
unit)
P. 5-29
P. 5-30
P. 5-32
E920
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor-1 after its leading edge has
reached the sensor.
P. 5-32
E930
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit
transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor-1.
P. 5-32
E940
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The
trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge
unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor-2.
P. 5-32
Jam not reaching the job separator transport
switch: The paper has passed through the exit sensor does not reach the job separator transport
switch.
P. 5-10
Stop jam at the job separator transport switch: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the job separator transport switch.
P. 5-10
Jam not reaching the offset tray transport switch:
The paper has passed through the exit sensor does
not reach the offset tray transport switch.
P. 5-10
Stop jam at the offset tray transport switch: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the offset
tray transport switch.
P. 5-10
E950
Job separator jam
E951
E960
E961
Offset tray jam
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-4
06/01
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
E9F0
Finisher jam (Puncher
unit)
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.
[MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
P. 5-50
EA10
Finisher jam (Finisher
unit)
Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has
passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101]
P. 5-33
EA20
Paper transport stop jam:
(1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor
but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or
processing tray sensor. [MJ-1023/1024]
(3) The paper which has passed through the inlet
sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ1101]
P. 5-35
EA21
Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the sensor because the paper is shorter than spec. [MJ1101]
P. 5-36
EA30
Power-ON jam:
(1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON.
[MJ-1023/1024]
P. 5-37
EA31
Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper
which has passed through the inlet sensor does not
reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101]
Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining
on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON.
[MJ-1101]
P. 5-38
Door open jam:
(1) The finisher has been released from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022]
(2) The upper/front cover of the finisher unit or the
upper/front door of the puncher unit has opened
during printing. [MJ-1023/1024]
(3) The front cover or stationary tray cover is
opened during paper transport. [MJ-1101]
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.[MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101]
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper
earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/
1024/1101]
P. 5-39
EA32
EA40
EA50
EA60
EA70
EA80
Finisher jam (Saddle
stitcher unit)
EA90
EAA0
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
P. 5-38
P. 5-42
P. 5-44
Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of
paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack
tray. [MJ-1022]
Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit
belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-45
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
[MJ-1024]
P. 5-47
Door open jam: The delivery cover or the inlet cover
has opened during printing [MJ-1024].
Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor,
No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical
path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-47
P. 5-48
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-5
06/01
2
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
Transport stop jam: The paper which passed
through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass
No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024]
Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached
the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-48
Print end command time-out jam: The printing has
not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board
at the end of printing.
Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been
interrupted because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher when the
paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher.
P. 5-51
Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which
passed through the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022]
Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled
because of the communication error between the
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper.
P. 5-46
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is
detected at [EB50]).
P. 5-13
Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position
detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101
is installed)]
P. 5-52
Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor is not
at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
P. 5-52
Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at
the home position. [MJ-1101]
Front alignment plate home position error: The front
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
P. 5-53
ED14
Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
P. 5-54
ED15
Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the
home position. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-54
ED16
Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-55
EAB0
Classification
Finisher jam (Saddle
stitcher unit)
EAC0
EAD0
Other paper jam
EAE0
Finisher jam
EAF0
Finisher jam (Finisher
unit)
EB30
Finisher jam
EB50
Paper transport jam
EB60
ED10
Finisher
(Puncher unit)
ED11
ED12
ED13
Finisher
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-6
06/01
P. 5-49
P. 5-51
P. 5-51
P. 5-11
P. 5-53
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.1.2
Service call
Error code
C010
Contents
Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not
rotating normally.
PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from
any drawer except the PFP)
Troubleshooting
P. 5-56
C130
Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer
tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the upper drawer)
P. 5-58
C140
Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer
tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the lower drawer)
P. 5-58
C150
PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper
drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper
drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP
upper drawer)
PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower
drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower
drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP
lower drawer)
P. 5-59
C040
Classification
Drive system related
service call
Paper feeding system
related service call
C160
P. 5-57
2
P. 5-59
C180
LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is
not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally.
(the case that paper can be fed from any drawer
except the LCF)
P. 5-60
C1A0
LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end
fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the LCF)
P. 5-61
C1B0
LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF)
P. 5-62
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp
(white reference) is not detected when power is
turned ON.
P. 5-63
C270
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not shift from its home position in a specified period
of time.
P. 5-64
C280
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not reach to its home position in a specified period
of time.
P. 5-64
Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON:
Abnormality of service call the thermistor is
detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified
period of time after power is turned ON.
P. 5-65
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The
temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the
range of control (in this case, the main switch turns
OFF automatically) or does not even reach the
range.
P. 5-66
C260
C410
Scanning system
related service call
Fuser unit related service call
C440
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-7
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
C450
Fuser unit related service call
Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality
of the thermistor is detected during printing.
IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality:
The AC input is not applied to the IH control circuit
normally, or the input voltage is too high/low.
P. 5-66
C470
C480
Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT
rises abnormally.
IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality
is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/
shorted.
C490
C550
(C780)
C570
P. 5-67
P. 5-68
P. 5-68
Optional communicaRADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred
tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner.
Communication error between Engine-CPU and
IPC board
Communication error between IPC board and finisher
P. 5-69
RADF related
service call
EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialized normally when performing the code 05-356.
Reverse sensor adjustment error
P. 5-70
C810
Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally.
P. 5-70
C820
Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor
cannot be adjusted normally when performing the
code 05-356.
P. 5-70
C830
Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length sensor cannot be adjusted normally
when performing the code 05-356.
P. 5-70
Engine-CPU abnormality
P. 5-90
High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of
the main charger is detected.
P. 5-90
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor
is not rotating normally.
P. 5-71
H-Sync detection error: H-Sync detection PC board
cannot detect laser beams.
Finisher not connected: The finisher is not connected.
P. 5-71
CB01
Finisher communication error: Communication error
has occurred between the equipment and finisher.
-
CB10
Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray
guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-72
C580
C730
C740
C940
C970
CA10
Circuit related service
call
Process related service call
Laser optical unit
related service call
CA20
CB00
CB11
CB12
Finisher related
service call
Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer
roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-8
06/06
P. 5-69
P. 5-69
P. 5-70
-
P. 5-72
P. 5-72
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error code
CB20
Classification
Finisher related
service call
CB30
Contents
Troubleshooting
Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022]
Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2
shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
P. 5-72
P. 5-73
Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable
tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
2
CB31
Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection sensor
does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-74
CB40
Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
P. 5-74
Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is not rotating or the front alignment
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
CB50
Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/
1023/1024]
P. 5-75
Stapler home position error: The stapler home position sensor does not work. [MJ-1101]
Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not
at the home position. [MJ-1101]
Stapler unit shift motor abnormality: The stapler unit
shift motor is not rotating or the stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024/1101]
Backup RAM data abnormality:
(1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller board is detected when the power is turned
on. [MJ-1023/1024]
(2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch driver
board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
RAM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value
on finisher controller PC board is detected when the
power is turned on. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-75
CB81
Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum
value on finisher controller PC board is detected
when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-77
CB90
Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper
pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-77
CBA0
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
P. 5-77
CBB0
Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is
not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
P. 5-77
CB51
CB60
CB80
CBC0
CBD0
CBE0
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding
motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally.
[MJ-1024]
P. 5-76
P. 5-76
P. 5-77
P. 5-78
P. 5-78
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-9
06/01
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper
positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-78
CC00
Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide
home position sensor, paper pushing plate home
position sensor or paper pushing plate top position
sensor is disconnected. [MJ- 1024]
P. 5-79
CC10
Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed,
inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover
switch is open. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-79
CC20
Communication error between finisher and saddle
stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller board and saddle stitcher controller board
[MJ-1023/1024]
Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery
belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
P. 5-79
CBF0
CC30
Classification
Finisher related
service call
P. 5-80
Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport belt
is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
CC31
Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is
not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-81
CC40
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/
1024]
P. 5-81
CC41
Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The
paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
P. 5-82
CC50
Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is
not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ6004 is installed)]
P. 5-82
CC51
Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality:
Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or
puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when
MJ-6101 is installed)
P. 5-82
CC52
Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew
adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not
shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/
1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
P. 5-83
CC60
CC61
CC71
CC72
Punch motor (M3) home position detection error:
Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is
detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is
detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 10
06/01
P. 5-83
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error code
CC80
Classification
Finisher related
service call
Contents
Troubleshooting
Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment
motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
P. 5-85
Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear alignment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
CC90
Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
P. 5-86
CCA0
Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
P. 5-87
CCB0
Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging
motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
P. 5-87
CCD0
Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection
motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper
trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper
trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ1023/1024]
Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing
motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
P. 5-88
Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not
rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ1101]
P. 5-89
CCE0
CCF0
CDE0
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
CDF0
Offset tray related service call
Initialization error of the offset tray: The home position of the separator cannot be detected when the
power is turned ON.
P. 5-90
CE00
Finisher related service call
Communication error between finisher unit and
puncher unit: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC
board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
P. 5-89
F070
Communication
related service call
Other service call
Communication error between System-CPU and
Engine-CPU
P. 5-69
F090
SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
P. 5-90
F091
NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
P. 5-91
F092
SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
P. 5-91
HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally.
HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be
detected.
HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state.
P. 5-91
F100
Other service call
F101
F102
P. 5-91
P. 5-91
F103
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be
performed in the specified period of time.
P. 5-91
F104
P. 5-91
F105
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data
of HDD.
HDD other error
F106
Point and Print partition damage
P. 5-92
F107
/SHR partition damage
P. 5-92
/SHA partition damage
P. 5-92
Communication error between System-CPU and
Scanner-CPU
P. 5-69
F108
F110
Communication
related service call
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
P. 5-91
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 11
06/01
2
Error code
F111
F120
Classification
Other service call
Contents
Scanner response abnormality
Troubleshooting
P. 5-69
F130
Database abnormality: Database is not operating
normally.
Invalid MAC address
P. 5-92
F200
Data overwrite Kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off
P. 5-92
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 12
05/11
P. 5-92
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.1.3
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
Error code
Classification
Troubleshooting
1C10
System access abnormality
1C11
Insufficient memory
P. 5-93
P. 5-93
1C12
Message reception error
P. 5-93
1C13
Message transmission error
P. 5-93
1C14
Invalid parameter
P. 5-93
1C15
Exceeding file capacity
P. 5-93
1C20
System management module access abnormality
P. 5-93
1C21
Job control module access abnormality
P. 5-93
1C22
Job control module access abnormality
P. 5-93
1C30
Directory creation failure
P. 5-94
1C31
File creation failure
P. 5-94
1C32
File deletion failure
P. 5-93
1C33
File access failure
P. 5-94
1C40
Image conversion abnormality
P. 5-94
1C60
HDD full failure during processing
P. 5-94
1C61
Address Book reading failure
P. 5-94
1C62
Memory acquiring failure
P. 5-94
1C63
Terminal IP address unset
P. 5-94
1C64
Terminal mail address unset
P. 5-94
1C65
SMTP address unset
P. 5-94
1C66
Server time time-out error
P. 5-94
1C67
NIC time time-out error
P. 5-94
1C68
NIC access error
P. 5-94
1C69
SMTP server connection error
P. 5-95
1C6A
HOST NAME error
P. 5-95
1C6B
Terminal mail address error
P. 5-95
1C6C
Destination mail address error
P. 5-95
1C6D
System error
P. 5-94
1C70
SMTP client OFF
P. 5-95
1C71
SMTP authentication error
P. 5-95
1C72
POP before SMTP error
P. 5-95
1C80
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
P. 5-95
1C81
Onramp Gateway transmission failure
P. 5-95
1C82
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
P. 5-95
1CC0
Job canceling
-
1CC1
Power failure
P. 5-95
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 13
05/11
2
2) RFC related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
Error code
2500
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Syntax error, command unrecognized
2501
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
2503
Bad sequence of commands
2504
2550
Command parameter not implemented
Mailbox unavailable
2551
User not local
2552
Insufficient system storage
2553
Mailbox name not allowed
Contents
Troubleshooting
P. 5-96
HOST NAME error (RFC: 500)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 500)
HOST NAME error (RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 503)
HOST NAME error
(RFC: 504)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 550)
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
P. 5-96
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 551)
Terminal/Destination mail address
error
(RFC: 552)
P. 5-96
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 553)
P. 5-96
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 14
05/11
P. 5-96
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3) Electronic Filing related error
Error code
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
2B10
There was no applicable job.
Contents
Troubleshooting
P. 5-97
2B11
Job status failed.
No applicable job error in job control
module
JOB status abnormality
2B20
Failed to access file.
File library function error
P. 5-97
2B30
Insufficient disk space.
Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition
P. 5-97
2B31
Failed to access Electronic Filing.
Status of specified Electronic Filing
or folder is undefined or being created/deleted
P. 5-97
2B32
Failed to print Electronic Filing document.
Electronic Filing printing failure:
Specified document can not be
printed because of client’s access
(being edited, etc.).
P. 5-97
2B50
Failed to process image.
Image library error
P. 5-97
2B51
Failed to process print image.
List library error
P. 5-97
2B71
Document(s) expire(s) in a few days
Documents expiring in a few days
exist
-
2B80
Hard disk space in /SHR partition is
nearly full (90%).
Insufficient memory capacity
-
2B90
Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing
nearly full.
Insufficient Memory.
P. 5-97
2BA0
Invalid Box password specified.
Invalid Box password
P. 5-98
P. 5-97
2BB0
Job canceled
Job canceling
-
2BB1
Power failure occurred
Power failure
P. 5-98
2BC0
System fatal error.
Fatal failure occurred
P. 5-97
2BC1
Failed to acquire resource.
System management module
resource acquiring failure
P. 5-97
2BD0
Power failure occurred during e-Filing restoring.
Failed to get machine parameter.
Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing
Machine parameter reading failure
P. 5-98
Maximum number of page range is
reached.
Maximum number of document
range is reached.
Exceeding maximum number of
pages
Exceeding maximum number of documents
P. 5-98
Maximum number of folder range is
reached.
Exceeding maximum number of folders
P. 5-98
2BE0
2BF0
2BF1
2BF2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
P. 5-98
P. 5-98
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 15
04/05
2
4) E-mail related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
2C10
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
System access abnormality
P. 5-99
2C11
Not enough memory
Insufficient memory
P. 5-99
2C12
Illegal Job status
Message reception error
P. 5-99
2C13
Illegal Job status
Message transmission error
P. 5-99
2C14
Invalid parameter specified
Invalid parameter
P. 5-99
2C15
Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity
imum size
Illegal Job status
System management module access
abnormality
P. 5-99
2C21
Illegal Job status
P. 5-99
2C22
Illegal Job status
2C30
Failed to create directory
Job control module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
2C31
Failed to create file
File creation failure
P. 5-99
2C32
Failed to delete file
File deletion failure
P. 5-99
2C33
Failed to create file
File access failure
P. 5-99
2C40
Failed to convert image file format
Image conversion abnormality
P. 5-99
2C60
HDD full failure during processing
P. 5-99
2C61
Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space.
Failed to read AddressBook
Address Book reading failure
P. 5-100
2C62
Not enough memory
Memory acquiring failure
P. 5-99
Error code
2C20
Contents
Troubleshooting
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
P. 5-99
2C63
Invalid Domain Address
Terminal IP address unset
P. 5-100
2C64
Invalid Domain Address
Terminal mail address unset
P. 5-100
2C65
Failed to connect to SMTP server
SMTP address unset
P. 5-100
2C66
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Server time time-out error
P. 5-100
2C67
Failed to send E-Mail message
NIC time time-out error
P. 5-100
2C68
Failed to send E-Mail message
NIC access error
P. 5-100
2C69
Failed to connect to SMTP server
SMTP server connection error
P. 5-100
2C6A
Failed to send E-Mail message
HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
P. 5-100
2C6B
Invalid address specified in From:
field
Terminal mail address error
P. 5-100
2C6C
Invalid address specified in To: field
Destination mail address error (No
RFC error)
P. 5-100
2C6D
NIC system error
System error
P. 5-100
2C70
SMTP service is not available
SMTP client OFF
P. 5-101
2C71
Failed SMTP Authentication
SMTP authentication error
P. 5-101
2C72
POP Before SMTP Authentication
Failed
POP before SMTP error
P. 5-101
2C80
2C81
Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Failed to process received Fax job
Process failure of FAX job received
2CC0
Job canceled
Job canceling
-
2CC1
Power failure occurred
Power failure
P. 5-101
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 16
05/11
P. 5-101
P. 5-101
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5) File sharing related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
Error code
2D10
2D11
2D12
2D13
2D14
2D15
2D20
2D21
2D22
2D30
2D31
2D32
2D33
2D40
2D60
2D61
2D62
2D63
2D64
2D65
2D66
2D67
2D68
2DA0
2DA1
2DA2
2DA3
2DA4
2DA5
2DA6
2DA7
2DC0
2DC1
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
There are too many documents in the
folder. Failed in creating new document.
Illegal Job status
Contents
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Exceeding document number
System management module access
abnormality
Illegal Job status
Job control module access abnormality
Illegal Job status
Job control module access abnormality
Failed to create directory
Directory creation failure
Failed to create file
File creation failure
Failed to delete file
File deletion failure
Failed to create file
File access failure
Failed to convert image file format
Image conversion abnormality
Failed to copy file
File library access abnormality
Invalid parameter specified
Invalid parameter
Failed to connect to network destina- File server connection error
tion. Check destination path
Specified network path is invalid.
Invalid network path
Check destination path
Logon to file server failed. Check
Login failure
username and password
There are too many documents in the Exceeding documents in folder:
Creating new document is failed.
folder. Failed in creating new document.
Failed to process your Job. InsuffiHDD full failure during processing
cient disk space.
FTP service is not available
FTP service not available
File Sharing service is not available
File sharing service not available
Expired scan documents deleted
Periodical deletion of scanned docufrom share folder.
ments completed properly.
Expired Sent Fax documents deleted Periodical deletion of transmitted
from shared folder.
FAX documents completed properly.
Expired Received Fax documents
Periodical deletion of received FAX
deleted from shared folder.
documents completed properly.
Scanned documents in shared folder Manual deletion of scanned docudeleted upon user’s request.
ments completed properly.
Sent Fax Documents in shared folder Manual deletion of transmitted FAX
deleted upon user’s request.
documents completed properly.
Received Fax Documents in shared
Manual deletion of received FAX
folder deleted upon user’s request.
documents completed properly.
Failed to delete file.
File deletion failure
Failed to acquire resource.
Resource acquiring failure
Job canceled
Job canceling
Power failure occurred
Power failure
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Troubleshooting
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-103
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-103
P. 5-102
P. 5-102
P. 5-103
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 17
05/11
2
6) E-mail reception related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
Error code
3A10
3A11
3A12
3A20
3A21
3A22
3A30
3A40
3A50
3A51
3A52
3A60
3A61
3A62
3A70
3A80
3A81
3A82
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail.
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Whole partial mails were not reached
by time-out.
Partial Mail Error has been detected
in the received mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
Receiving partial mail was aborted
since the partial mail setting has
been changed to Disable.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Contents
Troubleshooting
E-mail MIME error
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
E-mail analysis error
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
Partial mail time-out error
P. 5-104
Partial mail related error
P. 5-104
Insufficient HDD capacity error
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
Warning of partial mail interruption
P. 5-104
Partial mail reception setting OFF
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 18
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error code
3B10
3B11
3B12
3B20
3B21
3B22
3B30
3B31
3B32
3B40
3B41
3B42
3C10
3C11
3C12
3C13
3C20
3C21
3C22
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail has
been transferred to the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail could
not be transferred to the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
E-mail format error
Troubleshooting
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
2
Content-Type error
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
Charset error
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
E-mail decode error
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
P. 5-104
TIFF analysis error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
TIFF compression error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 19
Error code
3C30
3C31
3C32
3C40
3C41
3C42
3C50
3C51
3C52
3C60
3C61
3C62
3C70
3D10
3D20
3D30
3E10
3E20
3E30
3E40
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Power Failure has been occurred in
E-mail receiving.
SMTP Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail was deleted.
Offramp Destination limitation Error
has been detected in the received
mail.
Fax Board Error has been occurred
in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Timeout Error has
been occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Login Error has been occurred
in the received mail.
POP3 Login Error occurred in
received mail.
Contents
Troubleshooting
TIFF resolution error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
TIFF paper size error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Offramp destination error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Offramp security error
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Power failure error
P. 5-105
Destination address error
P. 5-105
Offramp destination limitation error
P. 5-105
FAX board error
P. 5-105
POP3 server connection error
P. 5-106
POP3 server connection time-out
error
POP3 login error
P. 5-106
POP3 login method error
P. 5-106
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 20
05/11
P. 5-106
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error code
3F00
3F10
3F20
3F30
3F40
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
File I/O Error has been occurred in
this mail. The mail could not be
received until File I/O is recovered.
Contents
File I/O error
Troubleshooting
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 21
2.1.4
Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
4030
No printer kit / Invalid: When the printer kit or printer/scanner kit is not
installed, network print is performed after the trial period.
P. 5-106
4031
HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid
network print are saved in HDD.
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed.
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
P. 5-106
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.
P. 5-106
4036
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not
registered as a user.
P. 5-106
A221
Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from
the print job screen.
Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during
print job (copy, list print, network print).
P. 5-107
4032
4033
4034
4035
A222
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-107
A290
Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time.
P. 5-107
A291
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code.
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
P. 5-107
A292
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 22
05/11
P. 5-107
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<<Error history: e-STUDIO350/450>>
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10
03 07 26 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
Error code
YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
MMM
NNN
O
Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Unused 5: PFP lower drawer6: Unused
7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP
B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused
M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Mode
2: Black
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 23
06/06
2
<<Error history: e-STUDIO352/452>>
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10
99999999
03 07 26 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
Error code
Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits
8 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
MMM
NNN
O
Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP
B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused
M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Mode
2: Black
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 24
06/06
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.2
Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode
Control panel
check mode
For start
[0]+[1]+
[POWER]
Contents
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all
the LCD pixels blink.
For exit
[POWER]
OFF/ON
Display
-
Test mode
[0]+[3]+
[POWER]
Checks the status of input/output signals.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% C A4
TEST MODE
Test print mode
[0]+[4]+
[POWER]
Outputs the test patterns.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% P A4
TEST PRINT
Adjustment
mode
[0]+[5]+
[POWER]
Adjusts various items.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% A A4
TEST MODE
Setting mode
[0]+[8]+
[POWER]
Sets various items.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% D
TEST MODE
List print mode
[9]+[START]+
[POWER]
Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and
08, PM support mode and pixel counter.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% UA A4
LIST PRINT
PM support
mode
[6]+[START]+
[POWER]
Clears each counter.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% K
TEST MODE
Firmware
update mode
[8]+[9]+
[POWER]
Performs updating of the system firmware.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
-
Note:
To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
<Operation procedure>
• Control panel check mode (01):
[0][1]
[POWER]
LED lit/
LCD blinking
[START]
(Button check)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[START]
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel
(Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
•
Test mode (03): Refer to
! P. 2-27 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/
! P. 2-34 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/452)" and
! P. 2-42 "2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03)".
•
Test print mode (04): Refer to ! P. 2-45 "2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04)"
•
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to
! P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/
! P. 2-64 "2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/452)"
•
Setting mode (08): Refer to
! P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)"
! P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/452)"
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 25
05/12
2
•
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER]
[START]
(Code)
[Digital keys]
101: Adjustment mode (05)
Key in the first
102: Setting mode (08)
code to be printed
[START]
[Digital keys]
Key in the last
code to be printed
[START]
List starts to
be printed
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history
•
PM support mode (6S):
[6][START]
[POWER]
•
[START]
(Operation started)
(Code)
1: Auto-toner adjustment
2: PM Support Screen
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6.FIRMWARE UPDATING“
[POWER]
ON
Normal
[0][1]
Warming up
Control panel
check mode
[0][3]
Test mode
[0][4]
Test print
mode
[0][5]
Adjustment
mode
[0][8]
Setting
mode
[9][START]
List print
mode
[6][START]
PM support
mode
[8][9]
Firmware
update mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 26
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.2.1
Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
2
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 27
05/12
[FAX] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
LCF connection
Bypass unit connection
Bypass paper sensor
ADU connection
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
PFP upper drawer detection switch
B
C
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
F
G
H
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP connection
PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom
position
B
LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor
Correct stacking
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
C
D
E
LCF drawer detection switch
F
G
H
LCF feed side paper stock sensor
A
PFP lower drawer detection sensor
B
C
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F
G
H
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 28
05/12
Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Not connected
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
Connected
Connected
Paper present
Connected
ADU closed
No paper
No paper
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
Other than
bottom position
Incorrect
stacking
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[5]
A
LCF end fence home position sensor
B
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C
D
E
LCF standby side empty sensor
LCF side cover opening/closing switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
LCF tray-up sensor
F
[6]
[7]
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF feed sensor
LCF feed side empty sensor
G
H
Upper drawer empty sensor
Upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
[8]
G
H
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Toner bag full
Upper drawer feed sensor
Toner bag full detection sensor-1
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
-
Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
Lower drawer feed sensor
Lower drawer empty sensor
Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Bypass feed paper width sensor-3
Bypass feed paper width sensor-2
Bypass feed paper width sensor-1
Bypass feed paper width sensor-0
Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is
installed)
Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When
bridge unit is installed)
Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Fence home
position
Fence stop
position
No paper
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
Tray at upper
limit position
e.g.
Other than
home position
Other than
stop position
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Other than
upper limit
position
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Toner bag not
full
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
-
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Paper full
Paper not full
Separetor at
home position
Cover opened
Other than
home position
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 29
05/11
2
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[9]
[0]
A
B
C
D
Upper drawer detection switch
E
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Lower drawer detection switch
E
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
e.g.
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
-
-
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
-
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3
Bypass paper width sensor
2
1
Paper-width size
0
0
1
1
1
A3/LD
1
0
1
1
A4-R/LT-R
1
1
0
1
A5-R/ST-R
1
1
1
0
Card size
0
0
1
1
B4-R/LG
1
0
0
1
B5-R
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 30
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[FAX] button: ON ([FAX] LED: ON)
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[1]
[2]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
[3]
24 V power supply
IPC board connection
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Toner cartridge switch
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Auto-toner sensor connection
Front cover opening/closing switch
Destination detection
A
B
C
Side cover opening/closing switch
Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Key copy counter connection
Toner bag full detection sensor-2
D
Fuser unit connection
E
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is
installed)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bypass feed sensor
High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection
F
G
H
[4]
-
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Power ON
Not connected
Abnormal rotation
OFF
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
Other than
SAD
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation
Not connected
Toner bag full
e.g.
Power OFF
Connected
Normal rotation
ON
No paper
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
SAD
Fuser unit
installed
No paper
Cover closed
Normal rotation
Connected
Toner bag not
full
Fuser unit not
installed
Paper present
Paper not full
Paper full
Paper full
Paper not full
Paper full
No paper
Paper not full
Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Paper present
No paper
Normal
No paper
Paper present
Abnormal
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 31
05/11
2
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
A
B
C
D
E
F
RADF connection
G
Platen sensor
H
Carriage home position sensor
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[5]
e.g.
A
B
C
D
APS sensor (APS-R)
RADF connected
Platen cove
opened
Carriage at
home position
No original
E
APS sensor (APS-C)
No original
F
APS sensor (APS-3)
No original
G
APS sensor (APS-2)
No original
H
APS sensor (APS-1)
No original
A
RADF tray sensor
B
RADF empty sensor
C
D
E
RADF jam access cover switch
RADF opening/closing sensor
RADF exit sensor
F
RADF reverse sensor
G
RADF read sensor
H
RADF registration sensor
Original
present
Original
present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
-
[6]
[7]
[8]
A
B
C
D
E
RADF original length sensor
F
RADF original width sensor-1
G
RADF original width sensor-2
H
RADF original width sensor-3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 32
05/11
Not connected
Platen cove
closed
Other than
home position
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Digital
key
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Button
Items to check
A
D
E
F
G
H
A
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection1
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection2
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection3
Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2010))
Connectable
B
Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1010))
Connectable
C
Dongle (for Scanner upgrade kit (GM-3010))
Connectable
D
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices
Connectable
e.g.
B
C
[9]
[0]
E
F
G
H
e.g.
Refer to table 2
Refer to table 2
2
Refer to table 2
-
-
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
-
Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment
Bridge unit
Job Separator
Offset Tray
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1
Normal display
Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-2
Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Normal display
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-3
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 33
05/11
2.2.2
Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/452)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Fig. 2-3 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 34
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
LCF connection
Bypass unit connection
Bypass paper sensor
ADU connection
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
PFP upper drawer detection switch
B
C
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
F
G
H
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP connection
PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom
position
B
LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor
Correct stacking
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
C
D
E
LCF drawer detection switch
F
G
H
LCF feed side paper stock sensor
A
PFP lower drawer detection sensor
B
C
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
D
E
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F
G
H
-
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Not connected
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
e.g.
Connected
Connected
Paper present
Connected
ADU closed
No paper
No paper
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
Other than
bottom position
Incorrect
stacking
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 35
05/11
2
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[5]
A
LCF end fence home position sensor
B
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C
D
E
LCF standby side empty sensor
LCF side cover opening/closing switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode
(03))
LCF tray-up sensor
F
[6]
[7]
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF feed sensor
LCF feed side empty sensor
G
H
Upper drawer empty sensor
Upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
[8]
G
H
e.g.
Fence home
position
Fence stop
position
No paper
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
Tray at upper
limit position
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Toner bag full
Upper drawer feed sensor
Toner bag full detection sensor-1
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
-
Paper present
No paper
Tray at upper
limit position
Lower drawer feed sensor
Lower drawer empty sensor
Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Bypass feed paper width sensor-3
Bypass feed paper width sensor-2
Bypass feed paper width sensor-1
Bypass feed paper width sensor-0
Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is
installed)
Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When
bridge unit is installed)
Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is
installed)
Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 36
05/11
Other than
home position
Other than
stop position
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Other than
upper limit
position
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Toner bag not
full
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
No paper
Paper present
Other than
upper limit
position
-
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Refer to table 1
Paper full
Paper not full
Separetor at
home position
Cover opened
Other than
home position
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
[9]
[0]
A
B
C
D
Upper drawer detection switch
E
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Lower drawer detection switch
E
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
F
G
H
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
Drawer not
installed
Paper almost
empty
-
-
e.g.
Drawer
present
Paper present
Drawer
present
Paper present
-
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3
Bypass paper width sensor
2
1
Paper-width size
0
0
1
1
1
A3/LD
1
0
1
1
A4-R/LT-R
1
1
0
1
A5-R/ST-R
1
1
1
0
Card size
0
0
1
1
B4-R/LG
1
0
0
1
B5-R
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 37
05/11
2
[FAX] button: ON/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/ [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[1]
[2]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
[3]
24 V power supply
IPC board connection
Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Toner cartridge switch
Registration sensor
Exit sensor
Auto-toner sensor connection
Front cover opening/closing switch
Destination detection
A
B
C
Side cover opening/closing switch
Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output
Mode (03))
Key copy counter connection
Toner bag full detection sensor-2
D
Fuser unit connection
E
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is
installed)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is
installed)
Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is
installed)
Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed)
Bypass feed sensor
High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection
F
G
H
[4]
-
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 38
05/11
e.g.
Power ON
Not connected
Abnormal rotation
OFF
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
Other than
SAD
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation
Not connected
Toner bag full
Power OFF
Connected
Normal rotation
ON
No paper
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
SAD
Fuser unit
installed
No paper
Cover closed
Normal rotation
Connected
Toner bag not
full
Fuser unit not
installed
Paper present
Paper not full
Paper full
Paper full
Paper not full
Paper full
No paper
Paper not full
Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Paper present
No paper
Normal
No paper
Paper present
Abnormal
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
A
B
C
D
E
F
RADF connection
G
Platen sensor
H
Carriage home position sensor
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[5]
A
B
C
D
APS sensor (APS-R)
RADF connected
Platen cove
opened
Carriage at
home position
No original
E
APS sensor (APS-C)
No original
F
APS sensor (APS-3)
No original
G
APS sensor (APS-2)
No original
H
APS sensor (APS-1)
No original
A
RADF tray sensor
B
RADF empty sensor
C
D
E
RADF jam access cover switch
RADF opening/closing sensor
RADF exit sensor
F
RADF reverse sensor
G
RADF read sensor
H
RADF registration sensor
Original
present
Original
present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
-
-
[6]
[7]
A
B
C
D
E
RADF original length sensor
F
RADF original width sensor-1
G
RADF original width sensor-2
H
-
[8]
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e.g.
Not connected
Platen cove
closed
Other than
home position
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
Original
present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 39
05/11
2
Digital
key
Button
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
[9]
[0]
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e.g.
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2
1
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2
2
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2
3
-
-
Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment
Bridge unit
Normal display
Job Separator
Highlighting display
Offset Tray
Highlighting display
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-2
Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Normal display
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-3
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 40
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: ON)
Digital
key
Button
Items to check
Contents
Highlighted
Normal disdisplay
play
e.g.
[0]
A
Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060)) Connected
Connectable
B
Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1060)) Connected
Connectable
C
Dongle (for Scanner kit (GM-4060)) Connected
Connectable
D
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices Connected
Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1)
-
Connectable
E
F
G
H
Acceptable
-
e.g.
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not acceptable
-
*1
•
•
•
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used
with this code.
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise
this code cannot be used.
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB
storage device.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 41
05/11
2
2.2.3
Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
Operation
ON
[START]
Stop
code
[START]
Operation
OFF
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 2
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
(Code)
Operation
One direction
[CLEAR]
Test mode
standby
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
ON
[START]
Operation
OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode
standby
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
Code
101
[START]
Function
[POWER] OFF
Code
Function
Procedure
Main motor ON (operational without
developer unit)
151
Code No.101 function OFF
1
102
Toner motor ON (normal rotation)
152
Code No.102 function OFF
1
103
Polygonal motor ON (600 dpi)
153
Code No.103 function OFF
1
108
Registration clutch ON
158
Code No.108 function OFF
1
109
PFP motor ON
159
Code No.109 function OFF
1
110
ADU motor ON
160
Code No.110 function OFF
1
118
Laser ON
168
Code No.118 function OFF
1
120
Exit motor ON (normal rotation)
170
Code No.120 function OFF
1
121
Exit motor ON (reverse rotation)
171
Code No.121 function OFF
1
122
LCF motor ON
172
Code No.122 function OFF
1
177
Offset Tray motor ON (reciprocating movement)
2
201
Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
202
Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
203
Transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF
3
204
Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF
3
205
Transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF
3
206
LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF
3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 42
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Function
Procedure
207
LCF end fence reciprocating movement
2
208
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF
3
209
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
3
210
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF
3
217
Sub-separation fan ON/OFF
3
218
Key copy counter count up
2
222
ADU clutch ON/OFF
3
225
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF
3
226
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
228
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
232
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
3
234
Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF
3
235
Discharge LED ON/OFF
3
236
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
237
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
238
IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
241
IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
242
Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
243
Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
248
Developer bias [+DC] ON/OFF
3
249
Developer bias [-DC] ON/OFF
3
252
Main charger ON/OFF
3
253
Separation bias ON/OFF
3
255
Transfer guide bias ON/OFF
3
256
Transfer transformer ON/OFF
3
261
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the
[ZOOM] button
2
264
SLG board cooling fan 1 ON/OFF
3
265
SLG board cooling fan 2 ON/OFF
3
267
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF
3
268
Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
269
Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
271
LCF tray-up motor (up/down)
2
278
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
280
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
281
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
282
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
3
283
RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
284
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
285
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
3
289
Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (high speed)
3
290
Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (low speed)
3
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 43
05/11
2
Code
Function
Procedure
294
RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF
3
295
Power OFF mode (for 200 V series)
4
297
RADF fan motor ON/OFF
3
410
Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
411
Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
412
Middle fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
413
Middle fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
432
Developer drive clutch ON/OFF
3
461
Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
462
Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
463
Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (low speed)
3
464
Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (high speed)
3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 44
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.2.4
Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
<Operation procedure>
[0][4]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
Continuous
Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
111
Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Error diffusion
113
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Error diffusion
142
Grid pattern
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 45
05/12
2
2.2.5
Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[START]
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test
copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code)
(
[START]
Value
displayed
)
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[CANCEL]
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
([FAX] )
[INTERRUPT] (Test copy)
value
(Stores
in RAM )
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 46
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
(
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
)
(
[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM
)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
(
Value
displayed
)
[START]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
Manual
adjustment
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
[ENTER]
[UP]
or
or
[DOWN]
[INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value) Stores value
in RAM
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores value
in RAM
When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button
at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes
after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)
Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
1
Grid pattern
Refer to ! P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
3
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)
Refer to ! P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 47
04/05
2
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
Developer
201
Developer
205
210
Developer
Charger
221
Transfer
231
Separation
286
Laser
305
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
ProFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
Automatic adjustment of
17
ALL
As the value increases,
the sensor output
auto-toner sensor (Fuserincreases correspondheater ON)
ingly.
The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes
after this adjustment
was started and is
automatically set in the
range of 2.35 to 2.45V.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit is
not installed. (P. 3-1)
3
Correction of auto-toner
ALL
128
M
Corrects the control
sensor (Fuser heater ON)
<0-255>
value of the auto-toner
sensor setup in 05-200.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit is
not installed.
3
Developer bias DC outputALL
189
M
As the value increases,
adjustment
<0-255>
the transformer output
increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL
154
M
3
ingly. Remove the
put adjustment
<0-255>
developer unit and
ALL
115
M
3
Transfer transformer DC
install the adjustment
<0-255>
output adjustment/Center
jig to make adjustvalue
ment. However, the
Separation transformer AC
ALL
166
M
3
adjustment jig is not
output adjustment/Center
<0-255>
necessary to adjust the
value
developer bias DC.(P.
Laser power adjustment
ALL
121
<0-255>
M
Scanner
Image location adjustment
of secondary scanning
direction (scanner section)
ALL
128
<92-164>
SYS
306
Scanner
Image location adjustment
of primary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
145
<0-255>
SYS
308
Scanner
Distortion mode
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 48
05/12
3-29)
When the value
increases, the laser
output increases correspondingly.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.137mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.0846mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Moves carriages to the
adjusting position. (P.
3-12)
3
1
1
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
340
Scanner
354
RADF
355
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Reproduction ratio adjustALL
128
SYS
ment of secondary scan<0-255>
ning direction
(scanner section)
Adjustment of
RADF paper
alignment
for singlesidedoriginal
for doublesidedoriginal
Automatic adjustment of
RADF sensor and
EEPROM initialization
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
356
RADF
357
RADF
Fine adjustment of RADF
transport speed
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation
adjustment
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
359
Scanner
Carriage position adjustment during scanning from
RADF
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
365
RADF
RADF leading edge position
adjustment
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
366
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
for single
sided original
for double
sided original
Contents
Procedur
e
When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio in
the secondary scanning direction (vertical
to paper feeding direction) increases by
approx. 0.223%.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.5mm.
1
Performs the adjustment and initialization
when the RADF board
or RADF sensor is
replaced.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of
the secondary scanning direction when
using the RADF
increases by approx.
0.1%.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0846mm.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
carriage position when
using the RADF shifts
by approx. 0.1 mm
toward the original
feeding side.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
copied image of original fed from the RADF
shifts toward the trailing
edge of paper by
approx. 0.1mm.
6
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 49
05/10
Code
Classification
367
RADF
368
Laser
401
Laser
405
410
Laser
411
421
Drive
422
424
Drive
425
430
Image
431
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
ProFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cedur
able
tion
e
value>
6
RADF original guide width
ALL
Stores the current
adjustment (Minimum)
width of RADF original
guide by keying in this
code with the guide set
at the minimum width.
Perform this adjustment when the RADF
board or volume is
replaced, or when the
code (05-356) is performed.
6
RADF original guide width
ALL
Stores the current
adjustment (Maximum)
width of RADF original
guide by keying in this
code with the guide set
at the maximum width.
Perform this adjustment when the RADF
board or volume is
replaced, or when the
code (05-356) is performed.
PRT
133
M
When the value
Fine adjustment of polygo1
<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
nal motor rotation speed
reproduction ratio of
(adjustment of primary
PPC
129
M
primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255>
tion increases by
duction ratio)
approx. 0.07%.
(approx. 0.1mm/step)
1
PPC
128
M
When the value
Adjustment of primary
<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
scanning laser writing start
writing start position
position.
PRT
128
M
shifts to the front side
<0-255>
by approx. 0.0423mm.
1
Adjustment of secondary
PPC/
138
M
When the value
scanning direction reproPRT
<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of
FAX
139
M
ment of main motor speed)
secondary scanning
<0-255>
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
1
Fine adjustment of exit
PPC/
107
M
When the value
motor speed
PRT
<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
rotation becomes faster
FAX
121
M
by approx. 0.05%.
<0-255>
1
Top margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
When the value
(blank area at the leading
<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
edge of the paper)
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
Left margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
1
0.0423mm.
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 50
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
440
Laser
441
442
443
444
445
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Right margin adjustment
PPC
0
M
(blank area at the right of
<0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PPC
0
M
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
M
Bottom margin adjustment
PPC/
EUR: 48
PRT
UC:24
(blank area at the trailing
JPN: 24
edge of the paper)/
Others:
Reverse side at duplexing
48
<0-255>
PPC/
12
M
Right margin adjustment
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)/Reverse
side at duplexing
PRT
24
M
Top margin adjustment
<0-255>
(blank area at the leading
edge of the paper)
Left margin adjustment
PRT
0
M
(blank area at the left of the
<0-255>
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PRT
0
M
Right margin adjustment
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PRT
0
M
Bottom margin adjustment
<0-255>
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
ALL
7
M
Adjustment of Upper
secondary
drawer
<0-15>
scanning
Lower
ALL
24
M
laser writing
drawer
<0-40>
start position
Bypass
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>
LCF
ALL
8
M
<0-15>
PFP
ALL
8
M
<0-15>
Duplex
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases by “1”, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.
Procedur
e
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
leading edge of the
paper by approx.
0.2mm.
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 51
2
Code
448-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
448-1
448-2
449-0
Paper
feeding
449-1
449-2
450-0
Paper
feeding
450-1
450-2
452-0
Paper
feeding
452-1
452-2
455-0
Paper
feeding
455-1
455-2
457
Paper
feeding
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
10
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
8
M
(PFP upper
size 1
<0-63>
drawer / Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
10
M
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
8
M
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
drawer / Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
17
M
amount
size
<0-63>
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Upper drawer size
<0-63>
/ Plain paper)
ALL
12
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
10
M
(Lower drawer size
<0-63>
/ Plain paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
20
M
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
20
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
30
M
(Duplex feed- size
<0-63>
ing / Plain
paper)
ALL
8
M
Paper aligning amount
<0-63>
adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Plain
paper)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 52
Contents
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
458-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
458-1
458-2
460-0
Paper
feeding
460-1
460-2
461-0
Paper
feeding
461-1
461-2
462-0
Paper
feeding
462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0
Paper
feeding
463-1
463-2
466-0
466-1
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
Paper
feeding
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
25
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
26
M
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 1)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
17
M
amount
size
<0-63>
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
Post
ALL
14
M
paper 3)
card
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/OHP film)
ALL
143
M
Adjustment of Plain
paper
<0-255>
paper pushing amount /
Post card
ALL
173
M
Bypass feed<0-255>
ing
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 1
<0-255>
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 2
<0-255>
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 3
<0-255>
OHP film
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
* Postcard is supported only for JPN
model.
Procedur
e
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value
increases by “1”, the
driving speed of bypass
feed roller increases by
approx. 0.2 ms when
the paper transport is
started from the registration section.
* Post card is supported only for JPN
model.
4
4
4
4
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 53
Code
Classification
467
Paper
feeding
468-0
Finisher
468-1
468-2
469-0
Paper
feeding
469-1
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
128
M
When the value
Adjustment of paper push<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
ing amount/Duplex feeddriving speed of ADU
ing (short size)
transport roller
increases by approx.
0.2 ms when the paper
transport is started
from the registration
section.
A4-R/LT-R
ALL
0
M
When the value
Fine adjust<-14-14>
increases by “1”, the
ment of bindbinding/folding position
ing position/
B4
ALL
0
M
shifts toward the right
folding posi<-14-14>
page by 0.25 mm.
tion
A3/LD
ALL
0
M
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Upper
drawer)
469-2
469-3
469-4
469-5
470-0
Paper
feeding
470-1
470-2
471-0
471-1
471-2
Paper
feeding
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Lower drawer
/ Thick paper
1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(PFP upper
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
Thick
Paper 1
Long
size
Thick
Paper 1
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 1
Short
size
Thick
Paper 2
Long
size
Thick
Paper 2
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 2
Short
size
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
<-14-14>
20
<0-63>
M
When the value
increases by "1", the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
1
4
4
4
4
ALL
20
<0-63>
M
ALL
20
<0-63>
M
ALL
20
<0-63>
M
4
ALL
22
<0-63>
M
4
ALL
19
<0-63>
M
4
ALL
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 54
4
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
472-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
472-1
472-2
473
Paper
feeding
474-0
Paper
feeding
474-1
474-2
497-0
Laser
497-1
497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0
Laser
498-1
501
Image
503
504
505
506
507
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
20
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
19
M
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
ALL
8
M
Paper aligning amount
<0-63>
adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Thick
paper 1)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
24
M
amount
size
<0-63>
adjustment at Middle
ALL
24
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
33
M
(Duplex feed- size
<0-63>
ing / Thick
paper 1)
ALL
128
M
Adjustment of Upper
drawer
<0-255>
drawer sideways deviaLower
ALL
128
M
tion
drawer
<0-255>
PFP upper
ALL
128
M
drawer
<0-255>
PFP lower
ALL
128
M
drawer
<0-255>
LCF
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
Bypass
ALL
128
M
feeding
<0-255>
ALL
148
M
Adjustment of Long size
<0-255>
primary scanning laser
ALL
148
M
Short
writing start
<0-255>
size(A4/LT
position at
or smaller)
duplex feeding
Photo
PPC
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”
Text
PPC
128
SYS
/Center value
<0-255>
Text/Photo PPC
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustPhoto
PPC
20
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”
Text
PPC
20
SYS
/Light step
<0-255>
value
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases by "1", the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
4
4
2
4
1
4
4
4
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
4
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
1
4
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 55
05/11
Code
Classification
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514
515
532
Image
533
534
570
571
572
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
Density
UC: 20
adjustment
JPN : 30
Fine adjust<0-255>
ment of “manual density”
Photo
PPC
EUR: 24 SYS
/Dark step
UC: 24
value
JPN: 24
<0-255>
Text
PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
UC: 20
JPN: 27
<0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS
ment of “auto<0-255>
matic density” Text
PPC
128
SYS
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
40
SYS
tion / Back<0-255>
ground peak
Photo
PPC
16
SYS
adjustment
<0-255>
Text
PPC
64
SYS
<0-255>
EUR: 12 SYS
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Photo
PPC
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 56
04/10
Contents
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
1
1
1
Sets whether the values of the background
peak and text peak are
fixed or not. One’s
place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”.Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values. The values of
the background peak
and text peak affect the
reproduction of the
background density
and text density
respectively.
Background peak Text
peak
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
620
Image
621
622
653
Image
654
Image
655
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
ProFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
1
Text/Photo PPC
0
SYS One’s place:
Gamma data
<0-99>
0:Equivalent to the set
slope adjustvalue 5
ment
Photo
PPC
0
SYS
1
1 to 9: Select the slope
<0-99>
of Gamma curve
Text
PPC
0
SYS
1
(The larger the
<0-99>
value is, the larger
the slope
becomes.)
Ten’s place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope
of low density (The
smaller the value is,
the darker the background becomes.)
00: Use default value
1
Sharpness
Text/Photo PPC
1
SYS When the value
adjustment
<0-99>
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
Photo
PPC
2
SYS decreases, the image
1
becomes softer. The
<0-99>
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
1
Text
PPC
EUR: 45 SYS becomes.One’s place:
Fixed value (05-620 is
UC: 45
“1”, 05-621 is “2”, 05JPN: 45
622 is “5”) Ten’s place:
<0-99>
Sharpness intensity (0:
Use default value, 1-9:
Filter intensity)
1
208
SYS Adjusts the level of the
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC
<0-255>
smudged/faint
smudged/faint
text.With increasing the
text
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
Adjustment of
1
PS
PRT
5
SYS Adjustment of the
smudged/faint
<0-9>
smudged/faint
text
PCL
PRT
5
SYS text.With decreasing
1
the value, the faint text
<0-9>
is suppressed, and with
increasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 57
2
Code
Classification
672-0
Image
672-1
672-2
672-3
672-4
676-0
Image
676-1
676-2
676-3
676-4
693
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
PRT
0
M
Adjustment of Normal
<0-10>
printer image
density
PRT
4
M
<0-10>
PRT
5
M
<0-10>
PRT
6
M
<0-10>
PRT
10
M
<0-10>
Toner
PRT
0
M
saving
<0-10>
PRT
4
M
<0-10>
PRT
5
M
<0-10>
PRT
6
M
<0-10>
PRT
10
M
<0-10>
EUR: 12 SYS
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal set on the
<11-14,
RADF
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
694
Photo
PPC
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
695
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Center
value
FAX
120
<0-255>
SYS
701
Light step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
702
Dark step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
700
Image
Adjustment of
binarized
threshold
(Text)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 58
Contents
Adjustment of the
image density.With
decreasing the value,
the text becomes
lighter.
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Sets whether the values of the background
peak and text peak are
fixed or not. One’s
place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”. Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes lighter.
When the value
increases, the image of
“light” side becomes
lighter.
When the value
increases, the image of
“dark” side becomes
darker.
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
710
Image
714
715
Image
719
720
Image
724
725
Image
729
825
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Photo
FAX
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
ual density”/
<0-255>
Center value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo
FAX
20
SYS
ual density”/
<0-255>
Light step
value
Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo
FAX
20
SYS
ual density”/
<0-255>
Dark step
value
Photo
FAX
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “auto- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
matic density
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo
tion on original manually
set on the
original glass
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
826
Text
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
827
Photo
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
1
1
Sets whether the values of the background
peak and text peak are
fixed or not. One’s
place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”. Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 59
2
Code
Classification
830
Image
831
832
835
Image
836
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
12
tion on origi<11-14,
nal set on the
21-24,
RADF
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Text
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Photo
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Range correc- Text/Photo
tion / Background peak
Text
adjustment
837
845
Image
846
847
850
Image
851
852
855
Image
856
857
860
861
862
Image
SCN
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “manual density”/
Center value
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “manual density”/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “manual density”/
adjustment/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “automatic density”
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 60
48
<0-255>
48
<0-255>
40
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets whether the value
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One’s place is
an adjustment for
“automatic density” and
ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
SYS
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
1
1
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
913
Image
914
Image
915
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
1
SYS
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
tion ratio
<0-99>
justment(Text/
40% or
Photo)
smaller
1
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
2
SYS
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
justment(Text) tion ratio
40% or
smaller
2
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
2
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
5
SYS
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
just40% or
ment(Photo)
smaller
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
Custom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
Range correcMode 1
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
12
Mode 3
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.
One’s place: Fixed
value (05-865 is “1”,
05-866 is “2”, 05-867 is
“5”) Ten’s place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use
default value, 1-9: Filter
intensity)
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Set whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One's place is
an adjustment for
“automatic density” and
ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 61
2
Code
Classification
916
Image
917
Image
918
Image
919
Image
920
Image
921
Image
922
Image
923
Image
924
Image
928
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Range correcCustom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
tion on origiMode 1
UC: 12
nal set on the
JPN: 22
RADF
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
12
Mode 3
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Range correction Background peak
adjustment
Sharpness
adjustment
Adjustment of
smudged/faint
text
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
Custom
Mode 1
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 62
40
<0-255>
64
<0-255>
16
<0-255>
1
<0-99>
EUR: 45
UC: 45
JPN: 45
<0-99>
2
<0-99>
208
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
Contents
Set whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One's place is
an adjustment for
“automatic density” and
ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.
One's place: Fixed
value (05-922 is "1",
05-923 is "5", 05-924 is
"2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use
default value, 1-9: Filter
intensity)
Adjustment of the
smudged/faint text.
With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
931
Image
932
Image
933
Image
934
Image
935
936
937
Image
938
939
940
Image
941
942
943
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Center value
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Light step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Dark step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Density
adjustment
Mode 1
<0-255>
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS
ment of "autoMode 2
<0-255>
matic density"
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
0
SYS
Gamma data
Mode 1
<0-99>
slope adjustment
944
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
945
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
Equipment number (serial
number) entry
ALL
-
SYS
976
Maintenance
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases, the image of
the center step
becomes darker.
Procedur
e
1
1
2
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the "light" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the "Dark" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
One’s place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope
of Gammacurve (The
larger the value is, the
larger the slope
becomes.)
Ten’s place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope
of low density (The
smaller the value is, the
darker the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value
When this adjustment
is performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also performed automatically
(10 digits)
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 63
04/05
2.2.6
Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/452)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[START]
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test
copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code)
(
[START]
Value
displayed
)
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[CANCEL]
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[ENTER]
([FAX])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
([FAX] )
[INTERRUPT] (Test copy)
value
(Stores
in RAM )
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 64
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
(
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
)
(
[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM
)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
(
Value
displayed
)
[START]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
Manual
adjustment
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
[ENTER]
[UP]
or
or
[DOWN]
[INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value) Stores value
in RAM
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores value
in RAM
When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button
at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes
after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)
Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
1
Grid pattern
Refer to ! P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
3
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)
Refer to ! P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 65
05/12
2
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
Developer
201
Developer
205
210
Developer
Charger
221
Transfer
231
Separation
286
Laser
305
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
ProFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cedur
tion
able
e
value>
Automatic adjustment of
17
ALL
As the value increases,
the sensor output
auto-toner sensor (Fuserincreases correspondheater ON)
ingly.
The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes
after this adjustment
was started and is
automatically set in the
range of 2.35 to 2.45V.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit is
not installed. (P. 3-1)
3
Correction of auto-toner
ALL
128
M
Corrects the control
sensor (Fuser heater ON)
<0-255>
value of the auto-toner
sensor setup in 05-200.
* Selection is disable
when developer unit is
not installed.
3
Developer bias DC outputALL
189
M
As the value increases,
adjustment
<0-255>
the transformer output
increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL
154
M
3
ingly. Remove the
put adjustment
<0-255>
developer unit and
ALL
115
M
3
Transfer transformer DC
install the adjustment
<0-255>
output adjustment/Center
jig to make adjustvalue
ment. However, the
Separation transformer AC
ALL
166
M
3
adjustment jig is not
output adjustment/Center
<0-255>
necessary to adjust the
value
developer bias DC.(P.
Laser power adjustment
ALL
121
<0-255>
M
Scanner
Image location adjustment
of secondary scanning
direction (scanner section)
ALL
128
<92-164>
SYS
306
Scanner
Image location adjustment
of primary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
145
<0-255>
SYS
308
Scanner
Distortion mode
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 66
05/12
3-29)
When the value
increases, the laser
output increases correspondingly.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.137mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.0846mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Moves carriages to the
adjusting position. (P.
3-12)
3
1
1
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
340
Scanner
350
Scanner
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Reproduction ratio adjustALL
128
SYS
ment of secondary scan<0-255>
ning direction
(scanner section)
Shading position adjustment
351
354
RADF
355
Original
glass
ALL
128
<118138>
128
<118138>
10
<0-20>
SYS
RADF
ALL
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
ALL
SYS
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
357
RADF
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation
adjustment
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
359
Scanner
Carriage position adjustment during scanning from
RADF
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
365
RADF
RADF leading edge position
adjustment
for single
sided original
for double
sided original
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed
(adjustment of primary
scanning direction reproduction ratio)
PRT
133
<0-255>
129
<0-255>
M
366
401
405
Laser
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PPC
When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio in
the secondary scanning direction (vertical
to paper feeding direction) increases by
approx. 0.223%.
0.1369 mm/step
SYS
for singlesidedoriginal
for doublesidedoriginal
Fine adjustment of RADF
transport speed
Adjustment of
RADF paper
alignment
Contents
M
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.5mm.
1
When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of
the secondary scanning direction when
using the RADF
increases by approx.
0.1%.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0846mm.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
carriage position when
using the RADF shifts
by approx. 0.1 mm
toward the original
feeding side.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
copied image of original fed from the RADF
shifts toward the trailing
edge of paper by
approx. 0.1mm.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of
primary scanning direction increases by
approx. 0.07%.
(approx. 0.1mm/step)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 67
05/11
Code
Classification
410
Laser
411
421
Drive
422
424
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
PPC
128
M
Adjustment of primary
<0-255>
scanning laser writing start
position.
PRT
128
M
<0-255>
Adjustment of secondary
scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of main motor speed)
Fine adjustment of exit
motor speed
425
430
Image
431
Image
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
Top margin adjustment
(blank area at the leading
edge of the paper)
Left margin adjustment
(blank area at the left of the
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)/
Reverse side at duplexing
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)/Reverse
side at duplexing
Top margin adjustment
(blank area at the leading
edge of the paper)
Left margin adjustment
(blank area at the left of the
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
Contents
Procedur
e
When the value
increases by “1”, the
writing start position
shifts to the front side
by approx. 0.0423mm.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of
secondary scanning
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
rotation becomes faster
by approx. 0.05%.
1
When the value
increases by “1”, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423mm.
1
When the value
increases by “1”, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.
1
PPC/
PRT
FAX
138
<0-255>
139
<0-255>
M
PPC/
PRT
FAX
107
<0-255>
121
<0-255>
0
<0-255>
M
PPC
0
<0-255>
M
PPC
0
<0-255>
M
PPC
0
<0-255>
M
PPC/
PRT
EUR: 48
UC:24
JPN: 24
Others:
48
<0-255>
12
<0-255>
M
4
M
4
PRT
24
<0-255>
M
1
PRT
0
<0-255>
M
1
PRT
0
<0-255>
M
1
PRT
0
<0-255>
M
1
PPC
PPC/
PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 68
05/11
M
M
M
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
440
Laser
441
442
443
444
445
448-0
Paper
feeding
448-1
448-2
449-0
Paper
feeding
449-1
449-2
450-0
Paper
feeding
450-1
450-2
452-0
Paper
feeding
452-1
452-2
455-0
Paper
feeding
455-1
455-2
457
Paper
feeding
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
7
M
Adjustment of Upper
drawer
<0-15>
secondary
scanning
Lower
ALL
24
M
laser writing
drawer
<0-40>
start position
Bypass
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>
LCF
ALL
8
M
<0-15>
PFP
ALL
8
M
<0-15>
Duplex
ALL
8
M
feeding
<0-15>
ALL
10
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
8
M
(PFP upper
size 1
<0-63>
drawer / Plain
paper)
ALL
10
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
8
M
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
drawer / Plain
paper)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Upper drawer size
<0-63>
/ Plain paper)
ALL
12
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
10
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
10
M
(Lower drawer size
<0-63>
/ Plain paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
20
M
amount
size
<0-63>
adjustment at Middle
ALL
20
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
30
M
(Duplex feed- size
<0-63>
ing / Plain
paper)
ALL
8
M
Paper aligning amount
<0-63>
adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Plain
paper)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
leading edge of the
paper by approx.
0.2mm.
Procedur
e
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 69
05/11
Code
458-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
458-1
458-2
460-0
Paper
feeding
460-1
460-2
461-0
Paper
feeding
461-1
461-2
462-0
Paper
feeding
462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0
Paper
feeding
463-1
463-2
466-0
466-1
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
Paper
feeding
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
25
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Plain
paper)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
26
M
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 1)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
17
M
amount
size
<0-63>
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
paper 2)
ALL
17
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
17
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
17
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/Thick
Post
ALL
14
M
paper 3)
card
<0-63>
ALL
26
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
26
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
26
M
(Bypass feed- size
<0-63>
ing/OHP film)
ALL
143
M
Adjustment of Plain
paper
<0-255>
paper pushing amount /
Post card
ALL
173
M
Bypass feed<0-255>
ing
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 1
<0-255>
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 2
<0-255>
Thick
ALL
143
M
paper 3
<0-255>
OHP film
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 70
05/11
Contents
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
* Postcard is supported only for JPN
model.
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value
increases by “1”, the
driving speed of bypass
feed roller increases by
approx. 0.2 ms when
the paper transport is
started from the registration section.
* Post card is supported only for JPN
model.
4
4
4
4
4
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
467
468-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
Finisher
468-1
468-2
469-0
Paper
feeding
469-1
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
ALL
128
M
When the value
Adjustment of paper push<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
ing amount/Duplex feeddriving speed of ADU
ing (short size)
transport roller
increases by approx.
0.2 ms when the paper
transport is started
from the registration
section.
A4-R/LT-R
ALL
0
M
When the value
Fine adjust<-14-14>
increases by “1”, the
ment of bindbinding/folding position
ing position/
B4
ALL
0
M
shifts toward the right
folding posi<-14-14>
page by 0.25 mm.
tion
A3/LD
ALL
0
M
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Upper
drawer)
469-2
469-3
469-4
469-5
470-0
Paper
feeding
470-1
470-2
471-0
471-1
471-2
Paper
feeding
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(Lower drawer
/ Thick paper
1)
Paper aligning
amount
adjustment at
the registration section
(PFP upper
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Thick
Paper 1
Long
size
Thick
Paper 1
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 1
Short
size
Thick
Paper 2
Long
size
Thick
Paper 2
Middle
size
Thick
Paper 2
Short
size
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
ALL
<-14-14>
20
<0-63>
M
When the value
increases by "1", the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
1
2
4
4
4
4
ALL
20
<0-63>
M
ALL
20
<0-63>
M
ALL
20
<0-63>
M
4
ALL
22
<0-63>
M
4
ALL
19
<0-63>
M
4
ALL
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
20
<0-63>
22
<0-63>
19
<0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 71
05/11
Code
472-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
472-1
472-2
473
Paper
feeding
474-0
Paper
feeding
474-1
474-2
497-0
Laser
497-1
497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0
Laser
498-1
501
Image
503
504
505
506
507
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
20
M
Paper aligning Long
size
<0-63>
amount
adjustment at Middle
ALL
22
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
19
M
(PFP lower
size
<0-63>
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
ALL
8
M
Paper aligning amount
<0-63>
adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Thick
paper 1)
Paper aligning Long
ALL
24
M
amount
size
<0-63>
adjustment at Middle
ALL
24
M
the registrasize
<0-63>
tion section
Short
ALL
33
M
(Duplex feed- size
<0-63>
ing / Thick
paper 1)
ALL
128
M
Adjustment of Upper
drawer
<0-255>
drawer sideways deviaLower
ALL
128
M
tion
drawer
<0-255>
PFP upper
ALL
128
M
drawer
<0-255>
PFP lower
ALL
128
M
drawer
<0-255>
LCF
ALL
128
M
<0-255>
Bypass
ALL
128
M
feeding
<0-255>
ALL
148
M
Adjustment of Long size
<0-255>
primary scanning laser
ALL
148
M
Short
writing start
<0-255>
size(A4/LT
position at
or smaller)
duplex feeding
Photo
PPC
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”
Text
PPC
128
SYS
/Center value
<0-255>
Text/Photo PPC
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustPhoto
PPC
20
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”
Text
PPC
20
SYS
/Light step
<0-255>
value
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 72
05/11
Contents
When the value
increases by "1", the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Procedur
e
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
4
4
4
4
4
4
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
4
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
1
4
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514
515
532
Image
533
534
570
571
572
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
Density
UC: 20
adjustment
JPN : 30
Fine adjust<0-255>
ment of “manual density”
Photo
PPC
EUR: 24 SYS
/Dark step
UC: 24
value
JPN: 24
<0-255>
Text
PPC
EUR: 20 SYS
UC: 20
JPN: 27
<0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText/Photo PPC
128
SYS
ment of “auto<0-255>
matic density” Text
PPC
128
SYS
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
40
SYS
tion / Back<0-255>
ground peak
Photo
PPC
16
SYS
adjustment
<0-255>
Text
PPC
64
SYS
<0-255>
EUR: 12 SYS
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Photo
PPC
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
1
1
1
Sets whether the values of the background
peak and text peak are
fixed or not. One’s
place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”.Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values. The values of
the background peak
and text peak affect the
reproduction of the
background density
and text density
respectively.
Background peak Text
peak
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 73
05/11
2
Code
Classification
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
596-0
Image
596-1
Image
596-2
Image
597-0
Image
597-1
Image
597-2
Image
598-0
Image
598-1
Image
598-2
Image
599-0
Image
599-1
Image
599-2
Image
620
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
ProFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
cedur
able
tion
e
value>
1
Text/Photo PPC
0
SYS One’s place:
Gamma data
<0-99>
0:Equivalent to the set
slope adjustvalue 5
ment
Photo
PPC
0
SYS
1
1 to 9: Select the slope
<0-99>
of Gamma curve
Text
PPC
0
SYS
1
(The larger the
<0-99>
value is, the larger
the slope
becomes.)
Ten’s place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope
of low density (The
smaller the value is,
the darker the background becomes.)
00: Use default value
4
Low
PRT
128
SYS When the value
Gamma baldensity
<0-255>
increases, the density
ance adjustment
Medium
PRT
128
SYS in the target area
4
becomes higher.
(PS/Photo)
density
<0-255>
High
PRT
128
SYS
4
density
<0-255>
Gamma balLow
PRT
128
SYS When the value
4
ance adjustdensity
<0-255>
increases, the density
ment
Medium
PRT
128
SYS in the target area
4
(PS/Text)
becomes higher.
density
<0-255>
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Text/Photo
PPC
621
Photo
PPC
2
<0-99>
SYS
622
Text
PPC
EUR: 45
UC: 45
JPN: 45
<0-99>
SYS
Gamma balance adjustment
(PCL/Photo)
Adjustment of
gamma balance
(PCL/Detail)
Sharpness
adjustment
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 74
05/11
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
1
<0-99>
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
When the value
increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
4
When the value
increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
SYS
SYS
4
4
4
4
When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.One’s place:
Fixed value (05-620 is
“1”, 05-621 is “2”, 05622 is “5”) Ten’s place:
Sharpness intensity (0:
Use default value, 1-9:
Filter intensity)
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
648
Image
654
Image
655
672-0
Image
672-1
672-2
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
208
SYS Adjusts the level of the
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC
<0-255>
smudged/faint
smudged/faint
text.With increasing the
text
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
Adjustment of
PS
PRT
5
SYS Adjustment of the
smudged/faint
<0-9>
smudged/faint
text
PCL
PRT
5
SYS text.With decreasing
the value, the faint text
<0-9>
is suppressed, and with
increasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
PRT
0
M
Adjustment of the
Adjustment of Normal
printer image
<0-10>
image density.With
decreasing the value,
density
PRT
4
M
the text becomes
<0-10>
lighter.
PRT
5
M
672-3
PRT
672-4
PRT
676-0
Image
Toner
saving
PRT
676-1
PRT
676-2
PRT
676-3
PRT
676-4
PRT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
10
<0-10>
0
<0-10>
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
6
<0-10>
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
4
4
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 75
06/01
Code
Classification
693
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
tion on origiUC: 12
nal set on the
JPN: 22
RADF
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
694
Photo
PPC
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
695
Text
PPC
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Center
value
FAX
120
<0-255>
SYS
701
Light step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
702
Dark step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX
128
<0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
128
<0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
700
710
Image
Image
714
715
Image
719
720
724
Image
Adjustment of
binarized
threshold
(Text)
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “manual density”/
Center value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “manual density”/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of “manual density”/
Dark step
value
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 76
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets whether the values of the background
peak and text peak are
fixed or not. One’s
place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”. Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes lighter.
When the value
increases, the image of
“light” side becomes
lighter.
When the value
increases, the image of
“dark” side becomes
darker.
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
725
Image
729
825
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
Photo
FAX
128
SYS When the value
Density
<0-255>
increases, the image
adjustment
becomes darker.
Fine adjustment of “auto- Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
matic density
<0-255>
Range correc- Text/Photo
tion on original manually
set on the
original glass
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
826
Text
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
827
Photo
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
SCN
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
830
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo
tion on original set on the
RADF
831
Text
SCN
832
Photo
SCN
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
SYS
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background
peak and text peak are
fixed or not. One’s
place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”. Once
they are fixed, the
range correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Sets whether the value
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One’s place is
an adjustment for
“automatic density” and
ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 77
05/11
2
Code
Classification
835
Image
836
837
845
Image
846
847
850
Image
851
852
855
Image
856
857
860
861
862
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
48
SYS
tion / Back<0-255>
ground peak
Text
SCN
48
SYS
adjustment
<0-255>
Photo
SCN
40
SYS
<0-255>
Text/Photo SCN
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
128
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”/
Photo
SCN
128
SYS
Center value
<0-255>
Text/Photo SCN
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
20
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”/
Photo
SCN
20
SYS
Light step
<0-255>
value
Text/Photo SCN
20
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
20
SYS
ment of “man<0-255>
ual density”/
Photo
SCN
20
SYS
adjustment/
<0-255>
Dark step
value
Text/Photo SCN
128
SYS
Density
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustText
SCN
128
SYS
ment of “auto<0-255>
matic density”
Photo
SCN
128
SYS
<0-255>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 78
05/11
Contents
When the value
increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image at
the center step
becomes darker.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
913
Image
914
Image
915
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
1
SYS
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
tion ratio
<0-99>
justment(Text/
40% or
Photo)
smaller
1
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
1
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
2
SYS
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
justment(Text) tion ratio
40% or
smaller
2
SYS
Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
2
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
5
SYS
Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN
<0-99>
tion ratio
just40% or
ment(Photo)
smaller
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
41-80%
Reproduc- SCN
5
SYS
tion ratio
<0-99>
81% or
larger
Custom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
Range correcMode 1
UC: 12
tion on origiJPN: 22
nal manually
<11-14,
set on the
21-24,
original glass
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
12
Mode 3
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.
One’s place: Fixed
value (05-865 is “1”,
05-866 is “2”, 05-867 is
“5”) Ten’s place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use
default value, 1-9: Filter
intensity)
Procedur
e
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Set whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One's place is
an adjustment for
“automatic density” and
ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 79
05/11
2
Code
Classification
916
Image
917
Image
918
Image
919
Image
920
Image
921
Image
922
Image
923
Image
924
Image
928
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Range correcCustom
PPC
EUR: 12 SYS
tion on origiMode 1
UC: 12
nal set on the
JPN: 22
RADF
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
22
Mode 2
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
Custom
PPC
12
Mode 3
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
Range correction Background peak
adjustment
Sharpness
adjustment
Adjustment of
smudged/faint
text
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
Custom
Mode 1
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 80
05/11
40
<0-255>
64
<0-255>
16
<0-255>
1
<0-99>
EUR: 45
UC: 45
JPN: 45
<0-99>
2
<0-99>
2
<0-4>
SYS
SYS
Contents
Set whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One's place is
an adjustment for
“automatic density” and
ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they
are fixed, the range
correction is performed with standard
values.
The values of the background peak and text
peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
When the value
increases, the background becomes more
brightened.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.
One's place: Fixed
value (05-922 is "1",
05-923 is "5", 05-924 is
"2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use
default value, 1-9: Filter
intensity)
Adjustment of the
smudged/faint text.
With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged text is suppressed.
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
931
Image
932
Image
933
Image
934
Image
935
936
937
Image
938
939
940
Image
941
942
943
Image
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Center value
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Light step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Density
Mode 1
<0-255>
adjustment
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
20
SYS
ment of "manMode 2
<0-255>
ual density"/
Custom
PPC
20
SYS
Dark step
Mode 3
<0-255>
value
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Density
adjustment
Mode 1
<0-255>
Fine adjustCustom
PPC
128
SYS
ment of "autoMode 2
<0-255>
matic density"
Custom
PPC
128
SYS
Mode 3
<0-255>
Custom
PPC
0
SYS
Gamma data
Mode 1
<0-99>
slope adjustment
944
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
945
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
0
<0-99>
SYS
Equipment number (serial
number) entry
ALL
-
SYS
976
Maintenance
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
When the value
increases, the image of
the center step
becomes darker.
Procedur
e
1
1
2
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the "light" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image of
the "Dark" step density
becomes lighter.
1
1
1
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.
1
1
1
One’s place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope
of Gammacurve (The
larger the value is, the
larger the slope
becomes.)
Ten’s place:
0: Equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the slope
of low density (The
smaller the value is, the
darker the background
becomes.)
00: Use default value
When this adjustment
is performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also performed automatically
(10 digits)
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 81
05/11
2.2.7
Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 82
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
2
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Setting)
[ENTER]
(HDD formatting)
or
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Digital key]
(2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.
*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 83
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. e-STUDIO350/450:
In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated.
"M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board and "NIC"
stands for the NIC board.
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Date and time setting
ALL
<13 digits>
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User
interface
Counter installed externally
ALL
203
General
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
M
204
User
interface
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
<0-10>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 84
05/12
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 2
<0-2>
0
<0-3>
M
M
Contents
Procedur
e
Year/month/date/day/
hour/minute/second
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from
“1” to “6”.
0: EUR
1: UC
2: JPN
5
0:
1:
2:
3:
0:
1
No external counter
Coin controller
Copy key card
Key copy counter
For factory shipment
1: For line
* Field: “0” must be
selected
Timer to return the
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:
Set number x 15
sec.
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
205
Classification
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
SYS
Auto power save mode
ALL
EUR: 11
timer setting
UC: 11
JPN: 6
Others:11
<0, 6-15>
206
User
interface
Auto Shut Off Mode timer
setting (Auto Shut Off
Mode / Sleep Mode)
ALL
Refer to
content
<0-20>
SYS
207
User
interface
Highlighting display on
LCD
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
209
User
interface
Paper
feeding
Default setting of filing format when E-mailing
Paper size (A6-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
SYS
216
Paper
feeding
Tab paper print Tab width
setting (Bypass feeding)
ALL
217
Paper
feeding
User
interface
Tab paper print Tab width
setting (Bypass feeding)
Default setting of filing format when storing files
ALL
1
<0-1>
148/105
<148432/105297>
130
<100200>
1300
<0-3000>
0
<0-3>
210
219
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PRT
SCN
Contents
Timer to automatically
switch to the Auto
power save mode when
the equipment has not
been used
0: Invalid 6: 3min.
7: 4min. 8: 5min.
9: 7min. 10: 10min.
11: 15min. 12: 20min.
13: 30min. 14: 45min.
15: 60min.
Timer to turn OFF the
power or to enter the
Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been
used
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.11: 80min.
12: 90min. 13: 100min.
14: 110min. 15: 120min.
16: 150min. 17:180min.
18: 210min. 19:240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO350
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 9
Others: 9
e-STUDIO450
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 12
Others: 12
0: Black letter on white
background
1: White letter on black
background
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
M
10
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 85
04/09
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS
power-ON
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
1
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
User
interface
221
User
interface
Language selection in UI
data at Web power ON
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS
224
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
UNDEF
SYS
Paper size for upper
drawer
ALL
M
226
Paper
feeding
Paper size for lower
drawer
ALL
227
Paper
feeding
Paper size for PFP upper
drawer
ALL
228
Paper
feeding
Paper size for PFP lower
drawer
ALL
229
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A3)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
230
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A4-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
231
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A5-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
232
Paper
feeding
Paper size (B4)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
233
Paper
feeding
Paper size (B5-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
234
Paper
feeding
Paper size (LT-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
EUR: A3
UC: LD
JPN: A3
EUR:
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
EUR: A4
UC: LG
JPN: B4
420/297
<182432/140297>
297/210
<182432/140297>
210/148
<182432/140297>
364/257
<182432/140297>
257/182
<182432/140297>
279/216
<182432/140297>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 86
04/09
Procedur
e
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
220
225
Contents
1
9
9
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
235
Paper
feeding
236
Paper
feeding
237
Paper
feeding
238
Paper
feeding
239
Paper
feeding
240
Paper
feeding
241
Paper
feeding
242
Paper
feeding
243
Paper
feeding
244
Paper
feeding
245
Paper
feeding
247
Paper
feeding
248
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
432/279
M
Paper size (LD)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
M
ALL
356/216
Paper size (LG)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
Paper size (ST-R)
ALL
216/140
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
Paper size (COMPUTER)
M
ALL
356/257
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
Paper size (FOLIO)
ALL
330/210
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
ALL
330/216
M
Paper size (13”LG)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
M
ALL
216/216
Paper size (8.5”X8.5”)
feeding/width wise direc<182432/140tion
297>
ALL
432/279
SYS
Paper size (Non-standard)
<148feeding/width wise direc432/105tion
297>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 1
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
feeding/width wise direction
Paper size (8K)
ALL
390/270
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
Paper size (16K-R)
ALL
270/195
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 2
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 3
Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type)
432/100feeding/width wise direc297>
tion
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 1].
10
10
10
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 2].
10
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 3].
10
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 87
04/09
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
SYS
ALL
148/100
Memory 4
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
feeding/width wise direction
Service technician teleALL
0
SYS
phone number
<32 digits>
249
Paper
feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM
counter
ALL
Refer to
content
<8 digits>
M
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM
counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
253
Maintenance
Paper
feeding
Error history display
ALL
-
SYS
LT!A4/LD!A3
PRT
0
<0-1>
SYS
255
Paper
feeding
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
<0-4>
M
256
Paper
feeding
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
M
257
Counter
Counter copy
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
<1-2>
254
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 88
06/01
-
Contents
Procedur
e
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 4].
10
A telephone number
can be entered up to 32
digits.
Use the [MONITOR/
PAUSE] button to enter
a hyphen(-).
<Default>
e-STUDIO350
UC, EUR: 120000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO450
UC, EUR: 150000
JPN: 0
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON.
Displays the latest 20
errors data
Sets whether the data is
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
0: Automatic
1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
Press the icon on the
LCD to select the size.
11
1: Electrical counter ->
Backup counter
2: Backup counter ->
Electrical counter
(P. 2-221)
-
1
1
2
1
1
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
258
Classification
Maintenance
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
FSMS acceptance
ALL
1
SYS
<0-2>
259
Network
260
Network
Storage period at trail and
private
Web data retention period
263
User
interface
Administrator's password
(Maximum 10 digits)
264
Network
265
Network
266
Network
267
Electronic
filing
270
Electronic
filing
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
1
SYS
Sets the file retention
level when editing the
files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained Retains the source file
until CutDoc/SaveDoc
command is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the execution of command
when "1" is set.
Sets the data retention
period when creating a
user box.
0: Not deleted
1 to 999:
Retention period
(Unit: Day)
1
ALL
123456
<10 digits>
-
File retention period
SCN
SYS
Maximum data capacity at
E-mailing
Maximum data capacity at
Internet FAX
Full guarantee of documents in Electronic Filing
when HDD is full
SCN
30
<0-999>
30
<2-30>
30
<2-30>
0
<0-1>
Default setting of user box
retention period
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
<0-999>
1
SYS
SYS
SCN
Procedur
e
Sets whether the FSMS
connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (serial
connection only)
2: Accepted (both
serial and USB connections)
0: No limits
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
When a certain period
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
The password can be
entered in alphabets
and figures (A-Z, a-z
and 0-9) within 10 digits.
0: No limits
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
2 to 30 M bytes
14
<0-30>
10
<3 digits>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PRT
Contents
SYS
SYS
2
1
1
11
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 89
05/11
Code
Classification
271
General
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Warning display of the
ALL
90
SYS
HDD capacity to be filled
<0-100>
272
Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit
ALL
3
<0-99>
SYS
273
Scanning Default setting of partial
size when transmitting Email
ALL
0
<0-6>
SYS
274
FAX
Default setting of page by
page when transmitting
Internet FAX
ALL
0
<0-4>
SYS
276
User
interface
Default setting of density
adjustment
SCN
0
<0-11>
SYS
281
User
interface
Default setting of resolution
SCN
1
<0-4>
SYS
283
User
interface
Default setting of original
mode
SCN
0
<0-2>
SYS
284
User
interface
Default setting of scanning
mode
SCN
0
<0-2>
SYS
285
User
interface
Default setting of rotation
mode
SCN
0
<0-3>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 90
05/11
Contents
Sets the percentage of
the HDD capacity filled
which warning is displayed
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
Sets the days left the
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
Sets the default value
for the partial size of Email to be transmitted
when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 64
2: 128
3: 256
4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
Sets the default value
for the page by page of
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 256
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
0: Automatic density
1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual density)
0: 150 dpi
1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
0: Text
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
0: Single
1: Book
2: Tablet
0: 0 degree
1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
286
Classification
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Default setting of original
SCN
0
SYS
paper size
<0-22>
288
General
Searching interval of deleting expired files
ALL
12
<1-24>
SYS
290
Network
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
SYS
291
Network
Raw printing job
(Paper size)
PRT
1
<0-1>
EUR: 6
UC: 2
JPN: 6
<0 -13>
292
Network
Raw printing job
(Paper type)
PRT
0
<0-4>
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
295
Network
Raw printing job (receiving
tray)
PRT
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-5>
SYS
294
Raw printing job
(Paper direction)
Raw printing job (Staple)
296
Network
Raw printing job
(Number of form lines)
PRT
1200
<50012800>
SYS
297
Network
Raw printing job
(PCL font pitch)
PRT
1000
<449999>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PRT
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
0: Automatic
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
8: LG
9: B4
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
Sets the search interval of expired files.
Deletes if expired file is
found. (Unit: Hour)
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: LD
1: LG
2: LT
3: COMP
4: ST
5: A3
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13 "LG
13: 8.5" x 8.5"
0: Plain paper
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
0: Portrait
1: Landscape
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Inner tray
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Not used
4: Job Separator
upper tray
5: Job Separator lower
tray* The settings 4 and
5 are effective only
when the Job Separator
(MJ-5004) is installed.
Sets the number of
form lines from 5 to
128. (A hundredfold of
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
Sets the font pitch from
0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 91
04/05
Code
Classification
298
Network
299
Network
300
User
interface
User
interface
302
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
SYS
Raw printing job
PRT
1200
(PCL font size)
<40099975>
Raw printing job
(PCL font number)
Maximum number of copy
volume (MAX9)
Original counter display
A3
Number of
output pages A4
in copier func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
output pages A4
in Printer
A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
PRT
PPC
PPC
0
<0-79>
0
<0-2>
EUR: 2
UC: 0
JPN: 0
<0, 2>
SYS
SYS
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 92
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets the font size from
4 to 999.75.
(A hundredfold of the
font size is defined as
the setting value.)
Sets the PCL font number.
0: 999 1: 99 2: 9
1
Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
Counts the output
pages in the copier
function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
1
Counts the output
pages in the printer
function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
1
1
4
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS
output pages A4
<8 digits>
at List Print
A5
Mode
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
output pages A4
<8 digits>
in FAX Func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the output
pages at the List Print
Mode for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 93
Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
A3
PPC
0
SYS
Number of
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Copier FuncA6
tion
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
SCN
0
SYS
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Scanning
A6
Function
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 94
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the scanning
pages in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the scanning
pages in the Scanning
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
scanning
<8 digits>
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
transmitted
<8 digits>
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the scanning
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
Counts the transmitted
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 95
Code
Classification
316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0
Counter
Counter
320-1
Counter
320-2
Counter
321-0
Counter
321-1
Counter
321-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
received
<8 digits>
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Large
PPC
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
output pages Small
PPC
0
SYS
in Copier
<8 digits>
Function
Total
PPC
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
output pages
in Printer
Function
Large
PRT
Small
PRT
Total
PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 96
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the received
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
Counts the number of
output pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
output pages in the
Printer Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
14
14
14
14
14
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
322-2
Counter
323-0
Counter
323-1
Counter
323-2
Counter
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
327-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Large
PRT
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
output pages Small
PRT
0
SYS
at List Print
<8 digits>
Mode
Total
PRT
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
output pages
in FAX Function
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
Copier Function
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
PPC
Small
PPC
Total
PPC
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Counts the number of
output pages at the List
Print Mode Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
output pages in the FAX
Function according to
its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 97
Code
Classification
328-0
Counter
328-1
Counter
328-2
Counter
329-0
Counter
329-1
Counter
329-2
Counter
330-0
Counter
330-1
Counter
330-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Large
FAX
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
scanning
Small
FAX
0
SYS
pages in FAX
<8 digits>
Function
Total
FAX
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
Scanning
Function
Display of
number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
Function
Large
SCN
Small
SCN
Total
SCN
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 98
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
Scanning Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
transmitted pages in the
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
331
Classification
User
interface
332-0
Counter
332-1
Counter
332-2
Counter
335-0
Counter
335-1
Counter
335-2
Counter
344
Counter
346
Counter
347
Counter
348
Counter
349
Counter
352
Counter
353
Counter
356
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS
<0-3>
Display of
number of
received
pages in FAX
Function
Display of
total number
of pages
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
ALL
Small
ALL
Total
ALL
Count setting of tab paper
(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (PM)
Definition setting of largesized paper (PM)
Count setting of thick paper
(PM)
Count setting of OHP film
(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Counter for upper drawer
feeding
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
JPN: 0
OTHER:
1
<0-2>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets the screen to be
displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recovered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
Counts the number of
received pages in the
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Displays the total number of pages in the
Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.
SYS
M
M
M
M
M
M
ALL
0
<0-1>
M
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
Procedur
e
1
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Counted as 1
Counted as 2
Counted as 1
Counted as 2
A3/LD
A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
2: Counted as 1
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP/8k
Counts the number of
sheets fed from upper
drawer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 99
04/10
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Counter for lower drawer
ALL
0
M
feeding
<8 digits>
Code
Classification
357
Counter
358
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
359
Counter
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
M
360
Counter
Counter for PFP upper
drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
370
Counter
Counter for PFP lower
drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
SYS
381
Counter
Setting for counter installed
externally
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1
<0-7>
390
Counter
PPC
Counter
392
Counter
393
Counter
398
Laser
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
391
Number of errors in HDD
(Copier)
Number of errors in HDD
(FAX)
Number of errors in HDD
(Scanning)
Number of errors in HDD
(Printer)
Number of polygonal motor
rotational speed switching
399
Laser
Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation
FAX
SCN
PRT
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 100
04/01
0
<8 digits>
M
M
SYS
Contents
Counts the number of
sheets fed from lower
drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from bypass
feed
Counts the number of
sheets fed from LCF
Counts the number of
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
Counts the number of
output pages of duplex
printing.
Counts the number of
originals fed from RADF
Selects the job to count
up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
The number of error is
reset at HDD formatting.
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
SYS
2
SYS
2
M
M
Counts the number of
time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rotation and standby rotation
Accumulates the time
the polygonal motor has
rotated at normal rotation.
2
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
400
Fuser
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Fuser unit error status
ALL
0
M
counter
<0-19>
409
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature at
a energy saver mode
(Center thermistor)
ALL
0
<0-13>
M
410
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing (Center
thermistor/Plain paper)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
411
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature on
standby (Center thermistor)
ALL
12
<0-12>
M
412
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
paper 3)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
413
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
414
Developer
Toner density correctionsetting
ALL
0
<0-8>
M
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
0: No error
1: C411(Once)
2: C410(consecutively
occurred)
3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450
7: C440 8: C450
9: C440 10: C470
11: C470 12: C480
13: C480 14: C470
15: C480 16: C490
17: C470 18: C480
19: C490
0: OFF 1: 40°C
2: 50°C 3: 60°C
4: 70°C 5: 80°C
6: 90°C 7: 100°C
8: 110°C 9: 120°C
10: 130°C 11: 140°C
12: 150°C 13: 160°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C
1: 140°C 1: 145°C
3: 150°C 4: 155°C
5: 160°C 6: 165°C
7: 170°C 8: 175°C
9: 180°C 10: 185°C
11: 190°C 12: 195°C
13: 200°C 14: 210°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 210°C
0: Invalid
1: +3bit
2: +6bit
3: +9bit
4: +12bit
5: -3bit
6: -6bit
7: -9bit
8: -12bit
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 101
Code
Classification
417
Fuser
419
Image
Processing
420
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
printing (Thick paper 3)
<0-15>
Black band pattern
between sheets of paper
ALL
0
<0-20>
M
Fuser
Pre-running time at
warming-up
ALL
JPN: 3
UC: 4
EUR: 4
<0-10>
M
437
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor /Thick
paper 2)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
438
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/OHP
film)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
439
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0
<0-15>
M
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 102
Contents
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Sets whether or not a
black band pattern is
formed on the drum
between two sheets of
paper being transported.
0: Invalid
1 to 20: Black band
width (Unit: mm)
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
440
Fuser
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
Pre-running time for first
<0-15>
printing
(Plain paper)
441
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing
(Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
<0-15>
M
455
Image
processing
Toner supply amount correction setting
ALL
0
<0-2>
M
462
RADF
Setting for switchback
operation to copy mixedsized original on RADF
ALL
0<0-1>
SYS
463-0
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry
number setting (upper
drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
ALL
M
Feeding retry
number setting (lower
drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
463-1
464-0
464-1
Paper
feeding
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
Contents
Procedur
e
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Corrects the period of
the toner motor rotation
time during toner supply.
0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80%
Sets whether or not
detecting the original
length by transporting
without scanning in
reverse when finding
A4-R/FOLIO paper.
0: Invalid- Judges as
A4-R without trans
porting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Valid- Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO size by
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
* The original is
transported in
reverse with no
scanning when
detecting LT-LG
size-paper in LT,
regardless of this
setting.
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
1
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
4
2
1
1
1
4
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 103
05/05
Code
465-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
465-1
466-0
Paper
feeding
466-1
467-0
Paper
feeding
467-1
468-0
Paper
feeding
468-1
469
Fan
471
Paper
feeding
472
Fan
478
Laser
479
Laser
480
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
5
M
Feeding retry Plain
paper
<0-5>
number setting (PFP
Others
ALL
5
M
upper drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (PFP
Others
ALL
5
M
lower drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
paper
<0-5>
number setting (bypass
Others
ALL
5
M
feed)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (LCF)
Others
ALL
5
M
<0-5>
Speed switching for subALL
0
M
separation fan
<0-1>
ALL
148/100
M
Paper size (Post card)
<148feeding/width wise direc432/100tion
297>
Speed switching for midALL
0
M
dle fan
<0-1>
ALL
0
M
Judged number of polygo<0-1>
nal motor rotation error
(Normal rotation)
Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error
(At acceleration/deceleration)
ALL
0
<0-1>
M
Default setting of paper
source
PPC
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 104
05/05
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
4
0: High speed
1: Low speed
* Post card is supported only for JPN
model.
1
0: High speed
1: Low speed
Displays the error
[CA10] when the set
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times
1: 12 times
0: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 2.2 sec.
0: A4/LT
1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
4
4
4
4
10
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
481
482
Classification
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Automatic change of paper
PPC
1
SYS
source
<0-2>
483
Paper
feeding
Laser
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Pre-running rotation of
polygonal motor
ALL
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational
status switching at the Auto
Clear Mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
485
Laser
Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
0
<0-1>
0
<0-2>
M
SYS
Contents
Sets whether or not
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direction and size: ex. A4
to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. “1” is
applied when the
staple/holepunch is
specified.)
0: ON
1: OFF
Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the original is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the original is set manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using
RADF only)
Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the normal
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at
08-490.)1: Stopped
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 105
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
0
SYS
Timing of auto-clearing of
<0-2>
polygonal motor pre-running rotation
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
Setting of polygonal motor
type
ALL
3
<2-3>
M
489
Laser
Polygonal motor rotation
number on standby
ALL
5
<0-5>
M
490
Laser
ALL
Transfer
0
<0-1>
165
<0-255>
M
491
Polygonal motor rotation in
the energy saving mode
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
492
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H) at duplexing
ALL
106
<0-255>
M
493
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
ALL
128
<0-255>
M
502
Image
Error diffusion and dither
setting at photo mode
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
503
User
interface
Image
Default setting of density
adjustment
Custom Mode setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
SYS
508
ALL
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 106
04/05
M
SYS
Contents
Switches the polygonal
motor to the standby
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the prerunning. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.
1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effective when “0” or “2”
is set at 08-483.
Set the type of polygonal motor.
2: 2 clock type
3: 3 clock type
0: 38090.55rpm
1: 35000rpm
2: 30000rpm
3: 25000rpm
4: 20000rpm
5: 10000rpm
0: Stopped
1: 10000rpm
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the center area
of paper at duplexing.
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the trailing
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Sets the image reproduction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Automatic
1: Manual (Center)
0: Not used
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo
is set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set
as a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
509
Image
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
PPC
1
SYS
Error diffusion and dither
<0-1>
setting at a photo mode
(Custom Mode)
526
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (OHP film)
ALL
6
<0-15>
M
550
Image
Default setting of Original
mode
PPC
0
<0-3>
SYS
601
User
interface
User
interface
Setting for the EnergySaving Mode
Screen setting for Auto
power Save Mode and
Auto Shut OFF Mode
ALL
SYS
603
User
interface
Setting for automatic
duplexing mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
EUR:0
UC:1
JPN:1
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
604
User
interface
Default setting for APS/
AMS
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
605
User
interface
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
607
User
interface
Centering printing of primary/secondary direction
at AMS
Default setting of RADF
mode
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
610
User
interface
User
interface
Key touch sound of control
panel
Book type original priority
ALL
SYS
PPC
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
General
Summer time mode
ALL
602
611
612
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Switches the image
processing method
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Invalid
1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Text/Photo
1: Photo
2: Text
3: Custom Mode
0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1: Sleep Mode
0: OFF
1: ON
1
0: Invalid
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection
0: APS (Automatic
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
0: Continuous feeding
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Not summer time
1: Summer time
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 107
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Paper size selection for
PPC EUR:
[OTHER] button
FOLIO
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
6
SYS
<1-50>
613
User
interface
614
Network
615
General
Size information of main
memory and page memory
ALL
-
SYS
617
User
interface
Print setting without
department code
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
618
User
interface
Default setting when mixed
size originals are set on
RADF
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
619
Paper
feeding
Time lag before Auto Job
Start of bypass feeding
ALL
4
<0-10>
SYS
620
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Department management
setting (Copier)
Department management
setting (FAX)
Department management
setting (Printer)
Department management
setting (Scanner)
Department management
setting (List print)
Blank copying prevention
mode during RADF jamming
PPC
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
User
interface
Rotation printing at the
nonsorting
621
622
623
624
625
627
FAX
PRT
SCN
PRT
PPC
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 108
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Press the icon on the
LCD to select the size.
9
Sets the period of time
when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or parallel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
-50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)
Displays the sizes of
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each memory is properly recognized.
0: Printed forcibly
1: Not printed
2: Deleted forcibly
0: Scanned as all in
same size
1: Scanned as each
original size
Sets the time taken to
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5sec.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: OFF
1: ON (Start printing
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
0: Not rotating
1: Rotating
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
628
629
633
634
636
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
cation
able
tion
value>
User
Direction priority of original
PPC
0
SYS
interface image
<0-1>
User
Department management
ALL
0
SYS
interface setting
<0-1>
Releasing F200 service
ALL
0
SYS
Data
<0-2>
overwrite call
kit
User
interface
User
interface
Inner receiving tray priority
at Non-sort Mode
Width setting for image
shift copying (linkage of
front side and back side)
Time differences
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
EUR: 24
UC: 40
JPN: 6
<0-47>
SYS
EUR:1
UC:2
JPN:0
<0-2>
2
<0-4>
SYS
PPC
638
General
640
User
interface
Date display format
ALL
641
User
interface
Automatic Sorting Mode
setting (RADF)
PPC
642
User
interface
Default setting of Sorter
Mode
PPC
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
0
<0-4>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
2:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Automatic
Portrait
Invalid
Valid
Not used
Board installed
(GP-1050)
Service call
Normal
Inner receiving tray
ON
OFF
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
0: YYYY.MM.DD.
1: DD.MM.YYYY
2: MM.DD.YYYY
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Invalid
STAPLE
SORT
GROUP
ROTATE SORT
NON-SORT
STAPLE
SORT
GROUP
ROTATE SORT
Procedur
e
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 109
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
SYS
ratio in editing copy
<0-10>
645
User
interface
646
User
interface
Image position in editing
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
647
User
interface
User
interface
Direction priority for date
and time stamp printing
Returning finisher tray
when printing is finished
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
649
User
interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
650
User
interface
User
interface
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating
order setting
Printing format setting for
Time Stamp and Page
Number
PPC
SYS
PPC
0
<0-1>
2
<0-3>
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Cascade operation setting
PPC
Cascade operation setting
PRT
Direction priority for date
and time stamp printing
PPC
648
651
652
653
657
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 110
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets the reproduction
ratio for the “X in 1”
printing (including magazine sort) to the
“Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio”.
0: 90% 1: 91%
2: 92% 3: 93%
4: 94% 5: 95%
6: 96% 7: 97%
8: 98% 9: 99%
10: 100%
Sets the page pasted
position for “X in 1” to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: Cornering
1: Centering
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
Sets whether or not
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
Hyphen
(with page number)
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
658
Classification
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Auto Job Start setting for
PRT
0
SYS
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
Contents
Procedur
e
1
659
User
interface
Auto Job start setting for
bypass feed printing
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
ALL
SYS
0: Invalid1: Valid
1
662
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
-
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of
received FAX
Auto-forwarding setting of
received E-mail
Clearing of SMS partition
Sets whether or not
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Sets whether or not
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
0: Invalid1:Valid
SYS
3
665
General
M/SYS all clearing
ALL
-
M/
SYS
666
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
667
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
669
General
System all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
670
General
ALL
-
SYS
671
User
interface
HDD diagnostic menu display
Size indicator
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Clears SMS partition.
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
Initializes all the adjustment modesand the
setting modes.
Initializes the Electronic Filing.
Initializes the shared
folder.
Initializes system
NVRAM area.
Display the HDD information
0: Invalid 1: Valid
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 111
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Initialization of department
SYS
management information
Code
Classification
672
General
673
General
Trial period setting
ALL
254
<1-60>
SYS
678
General
Setting of banner advertising display
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
679
General
ALL
-
SYS
680
General
ALL
-
SYS
681
General
Banner advertising display
1
Banner advertising display
2
Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
682
Use
interface
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 112
Contents
Initializing of the department management
information
* Key in the code and
press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the
initialization.
If the area storing
the department
management information is destroyed
for some reason,
“Enter Department
Code” is displayed
on the control panel
even if the department management
function is not set
on. In this case, initialize the area with
this code. This area
is normally initialized at the factory.
Sets the trial period
from 1 to 60 days. This
setting is effective only
when the default value
is "254". Once the
default value is set, this
value is only used for a
reference.
Sets whether or not displaying the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is displayed alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of “Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on
the control panel.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Procedur
e
3
1
1
11
11
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
683
General
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
1
SYS
Duplex printing setting
<0-1>
when coin controller is
used
684
685
General
General
Rebuilding all databases
Rebuilding all databases
related to Address Book
ALL
ALL
-
SYS
SYS
686
General
ALL
-
SYS
689
FAX
Rebuilding all databases
related to log
Adaptation of paper source
priority selection
FAX
0
<0-1>
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
HDD type display
ALL
<2>
<0-2>
692
Maintenance
Performing panel calibration
ALL
-
SYS
693
General
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
-
SYS
694
695
General
General
Performing HDD testing
Sets when the end of trial
period is notified.
ALL
PRT/
SCN
3
<0-59>
SYS
SYS
696
Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding
Installation of scrambler
board (Option)
ALL
0
<0-1>
-
Paper type priority
PPC
1
<1-2>
SYS
697
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
SYS
Contents
When the duplex printing is short paid with a
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is considered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this setting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
Rebuilds all databases.
Rebuilds all databases
related to the Address
Book.
Rebuilds all databases
related to the logs.
0: Not subjected for
APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
2: Normal formatting
0: Not formatted
1: Not used
2: Normal format
Performs the calibration
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Returns the value to the
factory shipping default
value.
Checks the bad sector.
Sets when the end of
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Sets the paper type priority during copying.
1: Plain paper
2: Thick paper 1
Procedur
e
1
2
3
3
3
1
7
7
1
3
3
1
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 113
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Entering the key code for
ALL
scrambler board
11
SYS
Maximum 256 Bytes
11
SYS
Sets the time interval to
recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
Unit: Minute
1
699
Scrambler
board
FAX
Erasing all data in HDD
ALL
-
-
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
function
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
703
Maintenance
ALL
-
707
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
HTTP server
URL setting
Remote-controlled service
HTTP initially-registered
server
URL setting
ALL
710
Maintenance
Short time interval setting
of recovery from Emergency Mode
ALL
https://
device.mf
p-support.com:
443/
device/firstregist.ashx
24
<1-48>
711
Maintenance
Short time interval setting
of Emergency Mode
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 114
5
SYS
Scrambler
board
60
<30-360>
Procedur
e
Start up this code and
have the user enter the
key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code cannot be set again on
security grounds.
This setting is effective
only when the scrambler board is installed.
0: Japan
1: Asia
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
0: Valid (Remote-controlled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
Maximum 256 Bytes
698
701
Contents
SYS
3
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
715
Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance
Maintenance
720
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
1230
SYS
Remote-controlled service
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
ALL
0
SYS
Remote-controlled service
<0-1>
Writing data of self-diagnostic code
Remote-controlled service
ALL
3
SYS
response waiting time
<1-30>
(Timeout)
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS
initial registration
<0-2>
Remote-controlled service
tentative password
Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only)
Service center call function
2
<0-2>
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1
<0-1>
-
SYS
HTTP proxy port number
setting
ALL
729
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)
HTTP proxy ID setting
HTTP proxy password setting
HTTP proxy panel display
739
1
ALL
Maintenance
738
0: OFF
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
Maximum 10 letters
2
728
734
1
0: Not registered
1: Registered
ALL
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Unit: Minute
SYS
HTTP proxy IP address
setting
733
1
0
<0-1>
Service center call HTTP
server URL setting
HTTP proxy setting
732
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted
ALL
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
731
1
SYS
723
730
0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
-
Maintenance
727
Procedur
e
ALL
721
726
Contents
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
000.000.000.000 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
SYS
11
11
1
11
1
ALL
0
<065535>
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
1
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
1
ALL
Automatic ordering function of supplies
FAX number
Automatic ordering function of supplies
E-mail address
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's name
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's telephone number
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
SYS
1
Automatic ordering function of supplies
11
11
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 115
2
Code
740
741
742
743
744
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
745
Maintenance
(Remote)
746
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
747
748
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's E-mail address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service number
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service technician's name
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS
tion of supplies
Service technician's telephone number
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service technician's E-mail
address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Supplier's name
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS
tion of supplies
Supplier's address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Notes
Information about supplies
ALL
SYS
Part number of toner cartridge K
ALL
1
SYS
Information about supplies
<1-99>
Order quantity of toner cartridge K
ALL
1
SYS
Information about supplies
<1-99>
Condition number of toner
cartridge K
Information about supplies
ALL
SYS
Part number of toner bag
Contents
Procedur
e
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 5 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
11
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 128 letters
11
Maximum 20 digits
11
1
1
Maximum 20 digits
11
Information about supplies
Order quantity of toner bag
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS
1
Information about supplies
Condition number of toner
bag
Automatic ordering supplies
Result table printout
Automatic ordering supplies
Display
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS
1
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 116
0:
1:
2:
0:
OFF
Always
ON Error
Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX/
HTTP)
2: Invalid
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
767
768
769
770
771
772
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
773
Maintenance
774
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
775
776
777
778
779
780
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Service Notification setting
ALL
0
SYS
<0-2>
Contents
Enables to set up to 3
E-mail
addresses to be sent.
(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
Maximum 192 letters
Procedur
e
1
2
Destination E-mail address
ALL
-
SYS
Total counter information
transmission setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Total counter transmission
date setting
ALL
1
<1-31>
SYS
1 to 31
1
PM counter notification setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Dealer's name
ALL
-
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
-
SYS
Display setting of [Service
Notification] button
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Maximum 100 letters
Needed at initial registration
Maximum 20 letters
Needed at initial registration
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Sending error contents of
equipment
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Setting total counter transmission interval
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Destination E-mail address
2
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Destination E-mail address
3
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Notification format selection
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Text
1: Text + XML data
1
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Day-1
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
1
781
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Day-2
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
782
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Day-3
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
11
11
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 117
Code
Classification
783
Maintenance
784
Maintenance
785
Maintenance
786
Maintenance
787
Maintenance
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance
Maintenance
790
794
795
796
797
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS
polling day selection Day-4
<0-31>
Contents
Procedur
e
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
0:
1:
0:
1:
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
1
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Sunday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Monday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Tuesday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
Wednesday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
Thursday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Friday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Saturday
Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge K
Information of supplies setting of toner bag
Remote-controlled service
lengthened interval polling
(End of month)
Firmware download
ALL
Notifying address of trialperiod end
PRT/
SCN
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
798
Maintenance
General
799
General
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/
SCN
-
SYS
826
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Toner saving mode)
PRT
128<0255>
M
840
Image
control
Setting of toner density
temperature control
ALL
0
<0-1>
M
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 118
0
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
SYS
SYS
0: Accepted
1: Prohibited
Sets where the end of
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF
1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center
[CANCEL]: Cancel
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the “Forcible end
of trial period” is performed, “0” is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
0: Controlled
1: Not controlled
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
841
Transfer
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Transfer timing correction
ALL
0
M
<0-7>
855
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing (Center
thermistor / Tab paper)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
856
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (Tab paper)
ALL
10
<0-15>
M
859
Developer
Developer bias DC correction(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
860
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
861
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
862
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
863
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
864
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
865
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
866
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
867
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
868
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H)
ALL
128
<0-255>
M
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
0: Standard
1: Timing 1
2: Timing 2
3: Timing 3
4: Timing 4
5: Timing 5
6: Timing 6
7: Timing 7
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper.
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 119
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Transfer charger bias corALL
84
M
rection (L)
<0-255>
Code
Classification
869
Transfer
872
Laser
Laser power correction
(Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
873
Laser
Laser power correction
(Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
875
Laser
Laser power correction
(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
876
Laser
Laser power correction
(Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
877
Laser
Laser power correction
(Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
900
Version
System firmware ROM version
ALL
-
-
903
905
907
908
915
916
920
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
FAX
ALL
ALL
-
921
922
Version
Version
ALL
ALL
923
Version
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version
931
Version
933
Version
Engine ROM version
Scanner ROM version
RADF ROM version
Finisher ROM version
FAX board ROM version
NIC board ROM version
FROM basic section software version
FROM internal program
UI data fixed section version
UI data common section
version
Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at powerON
Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
Web data whole version
Contents
Procedur
e
-
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the trailing
edge area of paper.
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
JPN: T360SY0JXXX
UC: T360SY0UXXX
EUR: T360SY0EXXX
Others: T360SY0XXXX
360M-XXX
360S-XXX
DF-XXXX
SDL-XX FIN-XX
F562-XXX
X.XXX
VX.XX/X.XX
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 120
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
934
Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
Version
945
Network
947
General
948
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 1
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 2
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 3
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 4
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 5
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 6
HD version
ALL
-
Two-way setting of RawPort 9100
Initialization after software
version upgrade
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
UTY
General
Mode setting by pressing
[Energy Saver] button for a
while
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
949
General
Automatic interruption
page setting during black
printing
ALL
0
<0-100>
SYS
950
Electronic
filing
Start-up method of Electronic Filing
ALL
0
<0-3>
SYS
953
User
interface
Access code entry for
Electronic Filing printing
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
954
User
interface
Clearing timing for files and
Electronic Filing Agent
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
969
User
interface
User
interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
Sound setting when
switching to Energy Saving
Mode
ALL
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
970
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
-
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
JPN: T360HD0JXXX
UC: T360HD0UXXX
EUR: T360HD0EXXX
Others: T360HD0XXXX
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Perform this code when
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
Sets the mode to enter
when the [Energy
Saver] button is
pressed for a while.0:
Sleep Mode1: Auto
Shut Off Mode
Sets the number of
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
Sets the start-up
method of the Electronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up
(Not recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
3: Data update
0: Renewed automatically
1: Enter every time
0: Immediately after
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
2
2
12
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 121
Code
Classification
973
Network
975
General
976
Electronic
Filing
977
Network
978
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS
<0-3>
Job handling when printing is short paid with coin
controller
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
Equipment name setting to
a folder when saving files
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Switching of extended
ASCII code in catFs filesystem
Raw printing job
(Paper feeding drawer)
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
PRT
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 122
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets the PCL line feed
code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
Sets whether pause or
stop the printing job
when it is short paid
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
Sets whether or not
adding the equipment
name to the folder
when saving files.
0: Not add
1: Add
0: ISO8859-1
1: ISO8859-2
1
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
1
AUTO
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
PFP upper drawer
PFP lower drawer
LCF
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
979
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS
(PCL symbol set)
<0-39>
985
ElecPrint mode setting of mixed
tronic Fil- input source of Electronic
ing
Filing
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
986
General
Copy function setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
988
Paper
feeding
Setting of paper size
switching to 13" LG
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
989
Scrambler
board
Scrambler board initial setting
ALL
-
-
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Roman-8
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
PC-8,Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850,Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura International
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
23: ISO 6:ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
29: ISO 69: French
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
0: Image quality priority
mode
1: Function priority
mode
Sets the copy function
to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Not switched
1: LG"13"LG
2: FOLIO"13"LG
Performs the initial setting of the scrambler
board.
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 123
04/10
Code
Classification
995
Version
999
1002
Maintenance
Maintenance
Network
1003
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
SYS
Equipment number
ALL
0
(serial number) display
<10 digits>
FSMS total counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
3
<1-3>
1
<1-2>
SYS
Reset of NIC board
ALL
Selection of NIC board status information
ALL
Network
Speed setting of Ethernet
ALL
3
<1-3>
NIC
1004
Network
NIC Web password
ALL
-
NIC
1005
Network
Availability of IP
ALL
NIC
1006
Network
Address Mode
ALL
1
<1-2>
2
<1-5>
1007
1008
Network
Network
Domain name
IP address
ALL
ALL
-
NIC
NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
-
NIC
1010
Network
Gateway
ALL
-
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
NIC
1012
Network
Network frame type
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-5>
1013
Network
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
NIC
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1001
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 124
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Contents
This code can be also
keyed in from the
adjustment mode (05976).
10 digits
Refer to values of total
counter.
1: Cold
2: Warm
3: Not reset
1: Not printed out
when the equipment
is restarted
2: Printed out when
the equipment is
restarted
1: 10 MBPS
2: 100 MBPS
3: Automatic
Writing only (Current
setting is not displayed.)
Maximum 31 letters
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Fixed IP address
2: Dynamic IP address
3: Dynamic IP address
without AutoIP
4: Dynamic IP address
without BOOTP
5: Dynamic IP address
without DHCP
Maximum 96 letters
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Automatic
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Procedur
e
11
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1015
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
*
NIC
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1017
Network
Availability of DNS
ALL
1018
Network
IP address to DNS server
(Primary)
1019
Network
1020
Contents
Procedur
e
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
IP address to DNS server
(Secondary)
ALL
-
NIC
Network
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
<1-5>
NIC
1021
Network
Availability of SLP
ALL
NIC
1023
1024
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
UTY
UTY
1025
Network
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
1026
Network
NetBios name
Name of WINS server or IP
address (Primary)
Name of WINS server or IP
address (Secondary)
Availability of Bindery
1
<1-2>
-
Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 15 letters
Maximum 128 letters
ALL
NIC
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028
1029
1030
Network
Network
Network
Directory service context
Directory service tree
Availability of HTTP server
ALL
ALL
ALL
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 47 letters
1: Available
2: Not available
12
1027
1031
Network
Port number to NIC HTTP
server
ALL
1032
Network
Port number to system
HTTP server
ALL
1033
Network
ALL
1034
Network
Availability of NIC HTTP
client
TCP port number to Controller HTTP client
1035
Network
IP address to HTTP server
(Primary)
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
80
<165535>
8080
<165535>
2
<1-2>
80
<165535>
-
1037
Network
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1038
Network
ALL
1039
Network
FQDN or IP address to
SMTP server
TCP port number of SMTP
client
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
12
SYS
1
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
UTY
NIC
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
25
<165535>
NIC
NIC
12
12
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 125
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Availability of SMTP server
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
UTY
TCP port number of SMTP
ALL
25
server
<165535>
E-mail box name to SMTP
ALL
UTY
server
Availability of Offramp
ALL
2
UTY
<1-2>
Offramp security
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC
POP3 server
Types of POP3 server
ALL
1
NIC
<1-3>
Code
Classification
1040
Network
1041
Network
1042
Network
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050
1051
Network
Network
1052
Network
1053
Network
Availability of FTP client
ALL
1054
Network
ALL
1055
Network
FQDN or IP address to
FTP server
TCP port number of FTP
client
1056
Network
Data port number of FTP
client
ALL
1057
1058
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1059
Network
Login name to FTP server
Login password to FTP
server
Availability of FTP server
1060
Network
TCP port number of FTP
server
ALL
1061
1062
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1063
Network
Login name to FTP client
Login password to FTP client
MIB function
1065
1066
Network
Network
Login name to POP3
server
Login password to POP3
E-mail reception interval
(Unit: Minute)
TCP port number of POP3
client
Setting of read Community
Setting of read/Write Community
ALL
-
NIC
ALL
ALL
5
<0-4096>
110
<165535>
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
NIC
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 126
05/05
21
<165535>
0
<065535>
1
<1-2>
21
<165535>
1
<1-2>
public
private
Contents
1: Available
2: Not available
NIC
12
12
Maximum 192 letters
12
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
12
1: Automatic
2: POP3
3: APOP
Maximum 96 letters
Maximum 96 letters
NIC
NIC
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 letters
12
12
UTY
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
NIC
NIC
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1067
Network
1068
Network
1069
Network
1070
Network
1073
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Authentication TRAP funcALL
1
NIC
tion
<1-2>
ALERTS TRAP function
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
TRAP destination IP
ALL
UTY
address
Contents
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Maximum 31 letters
Procedur
e
12
12
2
12
ALL
public
NIC
Network
Community setting of
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
NIC
1074
Network
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
1075
Network
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1076
Network
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
1077
1078
Network
Network
LPD queue name
Availability of IPP
ALL
ALL
1079
Network
ALL
1080
Network
Availability of IPP port
number “80”
TCP port number of IPP
1081
1082
1083
1084
Network
Network
Network
Network
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
12
12
12
12
1085
Network
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
1090
1091
Network
Network
1092
Network
1093
Network
1094
Network
IPP printer name
IPP printer location
IPP printer information
IPP printer information
(more)
Installer of IPP printer
driver
IPP printer “Make and
Model”
IPP printer information
(more)
MFGR
IPP message from operator
Availability of FTP print
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
<1-2>
9100
<165535>
1
<1-2>
515
<165535>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
631
<165535>
-
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
NIC
ALL
ALL
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
Printer user name of FTP
Printer user password of
FTP
TCP port number to FTP
print server
1
<1-2>
print
-
Login name to Novell print
server
Login password to Novell
print server
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
NIC
NIC
12
1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
Maximum 31 letters
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
ALL
21
<165535>
-
NIC
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 127
05/05
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Name of SearchRoot
ALL
NIC
server
Scan rate setting of print
ALL
5
NIC
queue
<1-255>
ALL
5
UTY
Page number limitation for
<1-99>
printing text of received
Email
MDN return mail setting
ALL
2
UTY
when receiving E-mail
<1-2>
Trap destination of IPX
ALL
UTY
Code
Classification
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
1099
Network
1100
Network
Method of SMTP server
authentication
ALL
5
<1-5>
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
-
1102
Network
ALL
1103
Network
Login name for SMTP
server authentication
Login password for SMTP
server authentication
Rendezvous setting
ALL
1104
Network
Link local host name
ALL
1105
Network
Service name setting
ALL
1107
1108
Network
Network
1109
1110
Network
Network
1111
Network
FTP server login name 1
FTP server login password
1
FTP server login name 2
FTP server login password
2
POP Before SMTP setting
1112
Network
Host name
ALL
1114
Network
ALL
1117
Network
Sending mail text of InternetFAX
SMB time-out period
Contents
Procedur
e
Maximum 31 letters
12
Unit: Second
12
12
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
1: Plain
2: Login
3: Cram-MD5
4: Digest MD5
5: Disable
Maximum 64 letters
12
-
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
Refer to
contents
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
ALL
Tiger
Woods
ALL
ALL
Shigeki
Maruyam
a
2
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
1
<0-1>
300
<1-9999>
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 128
05/05
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
12
UTY
UTY
Maximum 63 letters
<Default value>
e-STUDIO350:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO350
e-STUDIO450:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO450
Maximum 64 letters
Maximum 32 letters
12
12
UTY
UTY
Maximum 64 letters
Maximum 32 letters
12
12
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 63 letters
12
NIC
SYS
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Unit: Second
12
12
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1120
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Backup/Restore of NIC
ALL
0
SYS
setting information
<0-1>
1124
Network
Workgroup name
ALL
1130
User
interface
Job Build Function
ALL
1131
User
interface
Maximum number of time
job build performed
1132
General
1135
Contents
Procedur
e
0: Read (Reads all of
the setting information in NIC and create a file NAM1B
(no extension) in
USB)
1: Write (Writes all of
the setting information read from a file
NAM1B (no extension) in USB)
Maximum 15 letters
12
Sets the Job Build
Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Sets the maximum
number of time a job
build has been performed.
5-1000: 5 to 1000 times
Selects the default
screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER
1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
1
2
workgroup
1
<0-1>
UTY
ALL
1000
<5-1000>
SYS
Default screen selection of
the User Function menu
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
Paper
feeding
Default setting of drawers
(Printer/BOX)
PRT
1
<1-5>
SYS
1136
Network
ALL
13
<0-16>
SYS
1137
Network
ALL
8-20 M bytes
1
Network
12
<8-20>
0
<0-3>
SYS
1138
Number of lines simultaneously connectable when
using SMB
Memory partition size
when using Samba
LDAP search method setting
SYS
1
1139
Network
1140
User
interface
Sets the search method
when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
0: Not authenticated
1: Authenticated
Selects the restriction of
the template function
usage setting.
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
LDAP authentication setting
Restriction of the template
function with the administrator privilege
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 129
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Counter notification
ALL
SYS
Remote FAX setting
1145
Maintenance
(Remote)
1372
Image
processing
Heater and energizing time
accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1376
Image
processing
Image
processing
Toner cartridge drive
counter Number of output
pages
Number of output pages
(Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1386
Image
processing
Number of output pages
(Thick paper 2)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1387
Image
processing
Number of output pages
(Thick paper 3)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1388
Image
processing
Number of output pages
(OHP film)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1390
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(upper drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1391
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(lower drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1385
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 130
05/05
Contents
Maximum 32 digits
Enter a hyphen with the
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
Counts up the heater
control time accumulated (when power of
the equipment is ON)
but does not count at
the Sleep Mode. When
the counter value of the
fuser roller is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
the PM support mode.
Counts the rotation
number of the toner
cartridge.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at the PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
Procedur
e
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1392
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
(PFP upper drawer)
<8 digits>
1393
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1394
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(bypass feed)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1395
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(LCF)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1396
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1397
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1398
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1399
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1400
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1
1401
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
M
1
1410
Paper
feeding
Counter
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(upper drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(lower drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(PFP upper drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(PFP lower drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(bypass feed)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value (LCF)
Counter for period of toner
cartridge rotation time
1412
Counter
Code
Classification
Counter for tab paper
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
M
Contents
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
When the number of
feeding retry (08-1390
to 08-1395) exceeds
the setting value, the
feeding retry will not be
performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value,
however, the feeding
retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.
Counts up the period of
rotation time of the
toner cartridge.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 131
05/05
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
HDD data overwriting type
ALL
3
SYS
setting
<0-4>
1422
Data
overwrite kit
1424
Data
overwrite kit
HDD data clearing type
setting (forcible clearing)
ALL
3
<0-4>
SYS
1426
Data
overwrite kit
Forcible HDD data clearing
ALL
-
-
1427
Data
overwrite kit
Forcible NVRAM data all
clearing
ALL
-
-
1428
Data
overwrite kit
Forcible SRAM backup
data all clearing
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 132
05/05
Contents
HDD data is cleared by
overwriting the type of
value set in this code.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1050
is installed.)
0: "00" overwriting only
1: "FF" overwriting
only
2: Random number
overwriting only
3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
ON)
4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
OFF)
HDD data is cleared by
overwriting the type of
value set in this code.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1050
is installed.)
0: "00" overwriting only
1: "FF" overwriting
only
2: Random number
overwriting only
3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
ON)
4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation
OFF)
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
When this code is performed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
When this code is performed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1050 is
installed.
Procedur
e
1
1
3
3
3
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
SYS
<0-1>
Code
Classification
1432
Network
1433
Network
"Disable e-Filing" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1434
Network
"Disabling local file save"
function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1484
Network
Authentication method of
"Scan to Email"
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1485
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1486
Network
Setting whether use of
Internet FAX is permitted
or not when it is given an
authenticationn
Server setting for LDAP
user authentication
ALL
SYS
1487
Network
"From" address assignment method when it is
given an authentication
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
0
<0-2>
1488
Network
ID setting of LDAP server
for "From" address assignment
ALL
1489
Network
ALL
1491
Network
Setting for "From" address
edit at "Scan to Email"
E-mail domain name
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
0
<0-1>
-
SYS
Contents
0: Normal mode
1: Mode for Private
Print
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Disabled
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
2
0: "User name" + @ +
"Domain name"
1: LDAP searching
2: Use the address
registered at "From"
field of E-mail setting
SYS
SYS
Procedur
e
1
2
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
96 + 2 (delimiter) character
ASCll sequence only
1
11
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 133
05/05
2
<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.9)
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Standard paper size setting
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS
UC: 1
JPN: 0
<0-1>
1500
Pixel
counter
1501
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1502
Pixel
counter
Service technician reference counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1503
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference
counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1504
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter display setting
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1505
Pixel
counter
Displayed reference setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1506
Pixel
counter
Toner empty determination
counter setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1507
Pixel
counter
Threshold setting for toner
empty determination (Output pages)
ALL
400
<0-999>
SYS
1508
Pixel
counter
Threshold setting for toner
empty determination (Pixel
counter)
ALL
17550
<060000>
SYS
1509
Pixel
counter
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1510
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter clear flag/
Service technician reference
Service technician reference cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1514
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference
cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1518
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference
count started date
ALL
-
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 134
05/12
Contents
Procedur
e
Selects the standard
paper size to convert it
into the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1: LT
Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
Clears all information
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
Clears all information
related to the toner cartridge reference pixel
counter.
Selects whether or not
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Selects the reference
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference1: Toner
cartridge reference
Selects the counter to
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
Sets the number of output pages to determine
toner empty. This setting is valid when “0” is
set at 08-1506.
Sets the number of output pages to determine
toner empty. This setting is valid when “1” is
set at 08-1506.
Becomes “1” when 081502 is performed.
1
Displays the date on
which 08-1502 was performed.
Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was performed.
Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was performed.
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
1548
Classification
Pixel
counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
PPC <8 digits> SYS
Number of output pages
(Service technician reference)
1550
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Service technician reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1551
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Service technician reference)
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1553
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
<8 digits>
SYS
1555
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages/
black (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1556
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1566
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge replacement counter
ALL
<3 digits>
SYS
1592
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1593
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
time of the toner cartridge replacement.
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 135
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
FAX
0
Average pixel count
<0(Service technician refer10000>
ence)
1594
Pixel
counter
1595
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1606
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1607
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1608
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Service technician reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1613
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1619
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1624
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1625
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count (Toner
cartridge reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1634
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1639
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 136
Contents
Displays the average
pixel count in the FAX
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function
and service technician
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy function, black mode and
service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the FAX function and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function
and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the FAX
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the FAX function and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy function and toner cartridge
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
1640
Classification
Pixel
counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
(Toner cartridge reference)
<010000>
1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
Contents
Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the copy function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
Procedur
e
2
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 137
05/11
<<PM support mode related code>>
• The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
• Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
• When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
• When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
<e-STUDIO350/450>
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
1150-0 to 8
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
<Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Drum separation finger
1172-0 to 8
1173
<Default values of code 1172
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
<Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Items
Photoconductive drum
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 138
05/12
Remarks
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
<Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
<Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
<Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Transfer charger wire
1214-0 to 8
1215
<Default values of code 1214
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Separation charger wire
1224-0 to 8
1225
<Default values of code 1224
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
<Default values of code 1246
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
<Default values of code 1250
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Cleaning roller
1266-0 to 8
1267
Fuser roller separation finger
1268-0 to 8
1269
<Default values of code 1266
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
<Default values of code 1268
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
<Default values of code 1282
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
<Default values of code 1284
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1287
<Default values of code 1286
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
Items
Pickup roller
(RADF)
Feed roller
(RADF)
Separation roller
(RADF)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Remarks
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 139
05/12
2
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1291
<Default values of code 1290
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
<Default values of code 1292
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
<Default values of code 1294
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
Feed roller
(Upper drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
<Default values of code 1298
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Feed roller
(Lower drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
<Default values of code 1300
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1303
<Default values of code 1302
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
Separation roller
(Upper drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
<Default values of code 1306
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(Lower drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
<Default values of code 1308
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
<Default values of code 1310
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
<Default values of code 1312
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
<Default values of code 1314
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(Bypass unit)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
<Default values of code 1316
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
<Default values of code 1320
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
<Default values of code 1322
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Items
Feed roller
(LCF)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 140
05/12
Remarks
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Feed roller
(Bypass unit)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
<Default values of code 1324
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
<Default values of code 1328
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
<Default values of code 1330
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1333
<Default values of code 1332
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Items
Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Remarks
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 141
05/12
2
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
(3)
Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)
•
Key in “1” to copy the value of the total
counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 142
05/12
(B)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
•
Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup
counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(B)
2
(4)
Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 143
05/12
2.2.8
Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/452)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 144
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
2
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Setting)
[ENTER]
(HDD formatting)
or
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Digital key]
(2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.
*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 145
05/12
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. e-STUDIO352/452:
In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated.
"M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS", "NIC" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board.
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Date and time setting
ALL
<13 digits>
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User
interface
Counter installed externally
ALL
203
General
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
M
204
User
interface
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
<0-10>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 146
05/12
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 2
<0-2>
0
<0-3>
M
M
Contents
Procedur
e
Year/month/date/day/
hour/minute/second
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from
“1” to “6”.
0: EUR
1: UC
2: JPN
5
0:
1:
2:
3:
0:
1
No external counter
Coin controller
Copy key card
Key copy counter
For factory shipment
1: For line
* Field: “0” must be
selected
Timer to return the
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:
Set number x 15
sec.
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
205
Classification
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Auto power save mode
ALL
11
SYS
timer setting
<0, 6-15>
206
User
interface
Auto Shut Off Mode timer
setting (Auto Shut Off
Mode / Sleep Mode)
ALL
Refer to
content
<0-20>
SYS
207
User
interface
Highlighting display on
LCD
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
209
User
interface
Default setting of filing format when E-mailing
ALL
1
<0-4>
SYS
210
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A6-R)
feeding/width wise direction
PRT
M
213
User
interface
User
interface
Display of [REVERSE
ORDER] button
Default setting of filing format when storing files
ALL
148/105
<148432/105297>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-4>
219
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
SCN
SYS
SYS
Contents
Timer to automatically
switch to the Auto
power save mode when
the equipment has not
been used
0: Invalid 6: 3min.
7: 4min. 8: 5min.
9: 7min. 10: 10min.
11: 15min. 12: 20min.
13: 30min. 14: 45min.
15: 60min.
Timer to turn OFF the
power or to enter the
Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been
used
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.11: 80min.
12: 90min. 13: 100min.
14: 110min. 15: 120min.
16: 150min. 17:180min.
18: 210min. 19:240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO352
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 9
Others: 9
e-STUDIO452
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 12
Others: 12
0: Black letter on white
background
1: White letter on black
background
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
10
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 147
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS
power-ON
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
1
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
User
interface
221
User
interface
Language selection in UI
data at Web power ON
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS
224
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
UNDEF
SYS
Paper size for upper
drawer
ALL
M
226
Paper
feeding
Paper size for lower
drawer
ALL
227
Paper
feeding
Paper size for PFP upper
drawer
ALL
228
Paper
feeding
Paper size for PFP lower
drawer
ALL
229
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A3)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
230
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A4-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
231
Paper
feeding
Paper size (A5-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
232
Paper
feeding
Paper size (B4)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
233
Paper
feeding
Paper size (B5-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
234
Paper
feeding
Paper size (LT-R)
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
EUR: A3
UC: LD
JPN: A3
EUR:
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
EUR: A4
UC: LG
JPN: B4
420/297
<182432/140297>
297/210
<182432/140297>
210/148
<182432/140297>
364/257
<182432/140297>
257/182
<182432/140297>
279/216
<182432/140297>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 148
05/11
Procedur
e
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
220
225
Contents
1
9
9
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
235
Paper
feeding
236
Paper
feeding
237
Paper
feeding
238
Paper
feeding
239
Paper
feeding
240
Paper
feeding
241
Paper
feeding
242
Paper
feeding
243
Paper
feeding
244
Paper
feeding
245
Paper
feeding
247
Paper
feeding
248
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
432/279
M
Paper size (LD)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
M
ALL
356/216
Paper size (LG)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
Paper size (ST-R)
ALL
216/140
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
Paper size (COMPUTER)
M
ALL
356/257
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
Paper size (FOLIO)
ALL
330/210
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
ALL
330/216
M
Paper size (13”LG)
<182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion
297>
M
ALL
216/216
Paper size (8.5”X8.5”)
feeding/width wise direc<182432/140tion
297>
ALL
432/279
SYS
Paper size (Non-standard)
<148feeding/width wise direc432/105tion
297>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 1
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
feeding/width wise direction
Paper size (8K)
ALL
390/270
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
Paper size (16K-R)
ALL
270/195
M
feeding/width wise direc<182tion
432/140297>
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 2
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
feeding/width wise direction
ALL
148/100
SYS
Memory 3
Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type)
432/100feeding/width wise direc297>
tion
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 1].
10
10
10
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 2].
10
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 3].
10
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 149
05/11
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
SYS
ALL
148/100
Memory 4
<148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type)
297>
feeding/width wise direction
Service technician teleALL
0
SYS
phone number
<32 digits>
249
Paper
feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM
counter
ALL
Refer to
content
<8 digits>
M
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM
counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
253
Maintenance
Paper
feeding
Error history display
ALL
-
SYS
LT!A4/LD!A3
PRT
0
<0-1>
SYS
255
Paper
feeding
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
<0-4>
M
256
Paper
feeding
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
M
257
Counter
Counter copy
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
<1-2>
254
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 150
05/11
-
Contents
Procedur
e
Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 4].
10
A telephone number
can be entered up to 32
digits.
Use the [MONITOR/
PAUSE] button to enter
a hyphen(-).
<Default>
e-STUDIO352
UC, EUR: 120000
JPN: 0
e-STUDIO452
UC, EUR: 150000
JPN: 0
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON.
Displays the latest 20
errors data
Sets whether the data is
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
0: Automatic
1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
Press the icon on the
LCD to select the size.
11
1: Electrical counter ->
Backup counter
2: Backup counter ->
Electrical counter
(P. 2-142)
-
1
1
2
1
1
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
258
Classification
Maintenance
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
FSMS acceptance
ALL
1
SYS
<0-2>
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
1
SYS
Sets the file retention
level when editing the
files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution).
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained Retains the source file
until CutDoc/SaveDoc
command is completed.
* The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the execution of command
when "1" is set.
1
Storage period at trail and
private
PRT
14
<0-30>
SYS
260
Network
Web data retention period
SCN
10
<3 digits>
SYS
263
User
interface
Administrator's password
(Maximum 10 digits)
ALL
123456
<10 digits>
-
264
Network
File retention period
SCN
SYS
265
Network
SCN
266
Network
267
Electronic
filing
Maximum data capacity at
E-mailing
Maximum data capacity at
Internet FAX
Full guarantee of documents in Electronic Filing
when HDD is full
30
<0-999>
30
<2-30>
30
<2-30>
0
<0-1>
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1
SYS
Network
ALL
Procedur
e
Sets whether the FSMS
connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (serial
connection only)
2: Accepted (both
serial and USB connections)
0: No limits
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
31: 1hour
32: 2hours
33: 4hours
34: 8hours
35: 12hours
When a certain period
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
The password can be
entered in alphabets
and figures (A-Z, a-z
and 0-9) within 10 digits.
0: No limits
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
2 to 30 M bytes
259
ALL
Contents
2
1
1
11
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 151
05/11
Code
Classification
270
Electronic
filing
271
General
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Default setting of user box
ALL
0
SYS
retention period
<0-999>
Warning notification of the
File Share and e-Filling
partitions are filled
ALL
90
<0-100>
SYS
272
Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit
ALL
3
<0-99>
SYS
273
Scanning Default setting of partial
size when transmitting Email
ALL
0
<0-6>
SYS
274
FAX
Default setting of page by
page when transmitting
Internet FAX
ALL
0
<0-4>
SYS
276
User
interface
Default setting of density
adjustment
SCN
0
<0-11>
SYS
281
User
interface
Default setting of resolution
SCN
1
<0-4>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 152
05/11
Contents
Sets the data retention
period when creating a
user box.
0: Not deleted
1 to 999:
Retention period
(Unit: Day)
Sets the percentage of
HDD partition filled
when warning notification is sent.
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
* Related code
08-288
Sets the days left the
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
Sets the default value
for the partial size of Email to be transmitted
when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 64
2: 128
3: 256
4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
Sets the default value
for the page by page of
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creating a template.
0: Not divided
1: 256
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
0: Automatic density
1: Step -5
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual density)
0: 150 dpi
1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
283
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Default setting of original
SCN
0
SYS
mode
<0-3>
284
User
interface
Default setting of scanning
mode
SCN
0
<0-2>
SYS
285
User
interface
Default setting of rotation
mode
SCN
0
<0-3>
SYS
286
User
interface
Default setting of original
paper size
SCN
0
<0-22>
SYS
288
General
Searching interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD
partitions
ALL
12
<1-24>
SYS
290
Network
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
SYS
291
Network
Raw printing job
(Paper size)
PRT
1
<0-1>
EUR: 6
UC: 2
JPN: 6
<0 -13>
292
Network
Raw printing job
(Paper type)
PRT
0
<0-5>
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
SYS
294
Raw printing job
(Paper direction)
Raw printing job (Staple)
Code
Classification
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PRT
SYS
SYS
Contents
0: Text
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
3: Gray scale
0: Single
1: Book
2: Tablet
0: 0 degree
1: 90 degrees
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
0: Automatic
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
8: LG
9: B4
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
Sets the search interval of deleting expired
files and checking
capacity of HDD partitions. (Unit: Hour)
* Related code
08-271
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: LD
1: LG
2: LT
3: COMP
4: ST
5: A3
6: A4
7: A5
8: A6
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13 "LG
13: 8.5" x 8.5"
0: Plain paper
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
5: Tab paper
0: Portrait
1: Landscape
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 153
05/11
2
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Raw printing job (receiving
PRT
0
SYS
tray)
<0-5>
Code
Classification
295
Network
296
Network
Raw printing job
(Number of form lines)
PRT
1200
<50012800>
SYS
297
Network
Raw printing job
(PCL font pitch)
PRT
1000
<449999>
SYS
298
Network
Raw printing job
(PCL font size)
PRT
1200
<40099975>
SYS
299
Network
PRT
User
interface
User
interface
0
<0-79>
0
<0-2>
EUR: 2
UC: 0
JPN: 0
<0, 2, 4>
SYS
300
Raw printing job
(PCL font number)
Maximum number of copy
volume (MAX9)
Original counter display
302
PPC
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 154
05/11
SYS
SYS
Contents
0: Inner tray
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Not used
4: Job Separator
upper tray
5: Job Separator lower
tray* The settings 4 and
5 are effective only
when the Job Separator
(MJ-5004) is installed.
Sets the number of
form lines from 5 to
128. (A hundredfold of
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
Sets the font pitch from
0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
Sets the font size from
4 to 999.75.
(A hundredfold of the
font size is defined as
the setting value.)
Sets the PCL font number.
0: 999 1: 99 2: 9
Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
4: Displayed (Doublesized original is
counted as 2.)
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Number of
A3
PPC
0
SYS
output pages A4
<8 digits>
in copier func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS
output pages A4
<8 digits>
in Printer
A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the output
pages in the copier
function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output
pages in the printer
function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 155
05/11
Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Number of
A3
PRT
0
SYS
output pages A4
<8 digits>
at List Print
A5
Mode
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
output pages A4
<8 digits>
in FAX Func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 156
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the output
pages at the List Print
Mode for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
A3
PPC
0
SYS
Number of
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Copier FuncA6
tion
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
SCN
0
SYS
<8 digits>
scanning
A4
pages in
A5
Scanning
A6
Function
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the scanning
pages in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the scanning
pages in the Scanning
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08353).
4
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 157
05/11
Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
scanning
<8 digits>
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
transmitted
<8 digits>
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 158
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the scanning
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
Counts the transmitted
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0
Counter
Counter
320-1
Counter
320-2
Counter
321-0
Counter
321-1
Counter
321-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Number of
A3
FAX
0
SYS
received
<8 digits>
A4
pages in FAX A5
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
Large
PPC
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
output pages Small
PPC
0
SYS
in Copier
<8 digits>
Function
Total
PPC
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
output pages
in Printer
Function
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Large
PRT
Small
PRT
Total
PRT
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the received
pages in the FAX Function for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08352) and the definition
setting of largesized
paper (08-353).
4
Counts the number of
output pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
output pages in the
Printer Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
14
2
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 159
05/11
Code
Classification
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
322-2
Counter
323-0
Counter
323-1
Counter
323-2
Counter
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
327-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Large
PRT
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
output pages Small
PRT
0
SYS
at List Print
<8 digits>
Mode
Total
PRT
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
output pages
in FAX Function
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
Copier Function
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
PPC
Small
PPC
Total
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 160
05/11
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Counts the number of
output pages at the List
Print Mode Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
output pages in the FAX
Function according to
its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
328-0
Counter
328-1
Counter
328-2
Counter
329-0
Counter
329-1
Counter
329-2
Counter
330-0
Counter
330-1
Counter
330-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Large
FAX
0
SYS
Display of
<8 digits>
number of
scanning
Small
FAX
0
SYS
pages in FAX
<8 digits>
Function
Total
FAX
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
Scanning
Function
Display of
number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
Function
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Large
SCN
Small
SCN
Total
SCN
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
Scanning Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Counts the number of
transmitted pages in the
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Procedur
e
14
14
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 161
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS
<0-3>
331
User
interface
332-0
Counter
332-1
Counter
332-2
Counter
335-0
Counter
335-1
Counter
335-2
Counter
342
User
interface
Displaying number of original pages placed on original glass
PPC
344
Counter
ALL
346
Counter
347
Counter
Count setting of tab paper
(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (PM)
Definition setting of largesized paper (PM)
348
Counter
349
Counter
352
Counter
Display of
number of
received
pages in FAX
Function
Display of
total number
of pages
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
ALL
Small
ALL
Total
ALL
Count setting of thick paper
(PM)
Count setting of OHP film
(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 162
05/11
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
JPN: 0
OTHER:
1
<0-2>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets the screen to be
displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recovered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
Counts the number of
received pages in the
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number output pages of all
paper sizes.
Displays the total number of pages in the
Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.
SYS
SYS
M
M
M
M
M
M
Procedur
e
1
14
14
14
14
14
14
This setting is whether
the number of pages of
originals placed on the
original glass is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
2: Counted as 1
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
Definition setting of large<0-1>
sized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Counter for upper drawer
ALL
0
M
feeding
<8 digits>
Code
Classification
353
Counter
356
Counter
357
Counter
Counter for lower drawer
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
358
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
359
Counter
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
M
360
Counter
Counter for PFP upper
drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
370
Counter
Counter for PFP lower
drawer feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
SYS
381
Counter
Setting for counter installed
externally
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1
<0-7>
390
Counter
PPC
Counter
392
Counter
393
Counter
398
Laser
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
391
Number of errors in HDD
(Copier)
Number of errors in HDD
(FAX)
Number of errors in HDD
(Scanning)
Number of errors in HDD
(Printer)
Number of polygonal motor
rotational speed switching
399
Laser
Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
FAX
SCN
PRT
ALL
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
M
SYS
Contents
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP/8k
Counts the number of
sheets fed from upper
drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from lower
drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from bypass
feed
Counts the number of
sheets fed from LCF
Counts the number of
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
Counts the number of
output pages of duplex
printing.
Counts the number of
originals fed from RADF
Selects the job to count
up for the external
counter.
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
The number of error is
reset at HDD formatting.
Procedur
e
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
SYS
2
SYS
2
M
M
Counts the number of
time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
between normal rotation and standby rotation
Accumulates the time
the polygonal motor has
rotated at normal rotation.
2
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 163
05/11
2
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Fuser unit error status
ALL
0
M
counter
<0-19>
Code
Classification
400
Fuser
409
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature at
a energy saver mode
(Center thermistor)
ALL
0
<0-13>
M
410
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing (Center
thermistor/Plain paper)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
411
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature on
standby (Center thermistor)
ALL
12
<0-12>
M
412
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
paper 3)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
413
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
414
Developer
Toner density correctionsetting
ALL
0
<0-8>
M
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 164
05/11
Contents
0: No error
1: C411(Once)
2: C410(consecutively
occurred)
3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450
7: C440 8: C450
9: C440 10: C470
11: C470 12: C480
13: C480 14: C470
15: C480 16: C490
17: C470 18: C480
19: C490
0: OFF 1: 40°C
2: 50°C 3: 60°C
4: 70°C 5: 80°C
6: 90°C 7: 100°C
8: 110°C 9: 120°C
10: 130°C 11: 140°C
12: 150°C 13: 160°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C
1: 140°C 1: 145°C
3: 150°C 4: 155°C
5: 160°C 6: 165°C
7: 170°C 8: 175°C
9: 180°C 10: 185°C
11: 190°C 12: 195°C
13: 200°C 14: 210°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 210°C
0: Invalid
1: +3bit
2: +6bit
3: +9bit
4: +12bit
5: -3bit
6: -6bit
7: -9bit
8: -12bit
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
417
Fuser
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Pre-running time for first
ALL
0
M
printing (Thick paper 3)
<0-15>
Black band pattern
between sheets of paper
ALL
0
<0-20>
M
Fuser
Pre-running time at
warming-up
ALL
JPN: 3
UC: 4
EUR: 4
<0-10>
M
437
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor /Thick
paper 2)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
438
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/OHP
film)
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
439
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0
<0-15>
M
419
Image
Processing
420
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Sets whether or not a
black band pattern is
formed on the drum
between two sheets of
paper being transported.
0: Invalid
1 to 20: Black band
width (Unit: mm)
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 165
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
Pre-running time for first
<0-15>
printing
(Plain paper)
Code
Classification
440
Fuser
441
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing
(Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
<0-15>
M
449
Paper
feeding
Image
processing
Incorrect paper size jam
detection switching
Toner supply amount correction setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-2>
M
455
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 166
05/11
M
Contents
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Corrects the period of
the toner motor rotation
time during toner supply.
0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80%
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
462
RADF
463-0
463-1
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
0
M
Setting for switchback
<0-2>
operation in mixed-size
copying using RADF
Feeding retry
number setting (upper
drawer)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Plain
paper
Others
ALL
ALL
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
M
M
Contents
This setting is whether
the original length is
detected or not by
transporting without
scanning in reverse
when A4-R/FOLIO
paper or LT-R/LG paper
is detected in a mixedsize copying.
0: Disabled AMS:
A series - Judges as
A4-R without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by its length
without transporting
in reverse with no
scanning.
APS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO without
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG without transporting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Enable 1
AMS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO by transporting without scanning
in reverse to detect
its length.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by transporting
without scanning in
reverse to detect its
length.
APS:
The same as that of
APS in 0: Disabled.
2: Enable 2
AMS/APS:
The same as that of
AMS in 1: Enable 1.
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
Procedur
e
1
2
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 167
05/11
Code
464-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
464-1
465-0
Paper
feeding
465-1
466-0
Paper
feeding
466-1
467-0
Paper
feeding
467-1
468-0
Paper
feeding
468-1
469
Fan
471
Paper
feeding
472
Fan
478
Laser
479
Laser
480
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
5
M
Feeding retry Plain
paper
<0-5>
number setting (lower
Others
ALL
5
M
drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (PFP
Others
ALL
5
M
upper drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
paper
<0-5>
number setting (PFP
Others
ALL
5
M
lower drawer)
<0-5>
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
5
M
number setpaper
<0-5>
ting (bypass
Others
ALL
5
M
feed)
<0-5>
ALL
5
M
Feeding retry Plain
paper
<0-5>
number setting (LCF)
Others
ALL
5
M
<0-5>
Speed switching for subALL
0
M
separation fan
<0-1>
ALL
148/100
Paper size (Post card)
M
<148feeding/width wise direc432/100tion
297>
Speed switching for midALL
0
M
dle fan
<0-1>
ALL
0
M
Judged number of polygo<0-1>
nal motor rotation error
(Normal rotation)
Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error
(At acceleration/deceleration)
ALL
0
<0-1>
M
Default setting of paper
source
PPC
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 168
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
4
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
4
0: High speed
1: Low speed
* Post card is supported only for JPN
model.
1
0: High speed
1: Low speed
Displays the error
[CA10] when the set
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times
1: 12 times
0: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshooting 2.2 sec.
0: A4/LT
1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
4
4
4
4
4
10
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
481
482
Classification
Paper
feeding
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Automatic change of paper
PPC
1
SYS
source
<0-2>
483
Paper
feeding
Laser
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Pre-running rotation of
polygonal motor
ALL
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational
status switching at the Auto
Clear Mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
485
Laser
Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
0
<0-1>
0
<0-2>
M
SYS
Contents
Sets whether or not
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direction and size: ex. A4
to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the different direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. “1” is
applied when the
staple/holepunch is
specified.)
0: ON
1: OFF
Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the original is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the original is set manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using
RADF only)
Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the normal
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor
on standby.
0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at
08-490.)1: Stopped
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 169
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
0
SYS
Timing of auto-clearing of
<0-2>
polygonal motor pre-running rotation
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
Setting of polygonal motor
type
ALL
3
<2-3>
M
489
Laser
Polygonal motor rotation
number on standby
ALL
5
<0-5>
M
490
Laser
ALL
Transfer
0
<0-1>
165
<0-255>
M
491
Polygonal motor rotation in
the energy saving mode
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
492
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H) at duplexing
ALL
106
<0-255>
M
493
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
ALL
128
<0-255>
M
502
Image
Error diffusion and dither
setting at photo mode
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
503
User
interface
Image
Default setting of density
adjustment
Custom Mode setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
SYS
508
ALL
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 170
05/11
M
SYS
Contents
Switches the polygonal
motor to the standby
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the prerunning. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
0: 15 sec.
1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
* This setting is effective when “0” or “2”
is set at 08-483.
Set the type of polygonal motor.
2: 2 clock type
3: 3 clock type
0: 38090.55rpm
1: 35000rpm
2: 30000rpm
3: 25000rpm
4: 20000rpm
5: 10000rpm
0: Stopped
1: 10000rpm
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the center area
of paper at duplexing.
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the trailing
edge area of paper at
duplexing.
Sets the image reproduction method at
photo mode.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Automatic
1: Manual (Center)
0: Not used
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo
is set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set
as a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
509
Image
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
PPC
1
SYS
Error diffusion and dither
<0-1>
setting at a photo mode
(Custom Mode)
526
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (OHP film)
ALL
6
<0-15>
M
550
Image
Default setting of Original
mode
PPC
0
<0-3>
SYS
601
User
interface
User
interface
Setting for the EnergySaving Mode
Screen setting for Auto
power Save Mode and
Auto Shut OFF Mode
ALL
SYS
603
User
interface
Setting for automatic
duplexing mode
ALL
0
<0-1>
EUR:0
UC:1
JPN:1
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
604
User
interface
Default setting for APS/
AMS
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
605
User
interface
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
607
User
interface
Centering printing of primary/secondary direction
at AMS
Default setting of RADF
mode
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
610
User
interface
User
interface
Key touch sound of control
panel
Book type original priority
ALL
SYS
PPC
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
General
Summer time mode
ALL
602
611
612
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Switches the image
processing method
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Invalid
1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec.
3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec.
5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec.
7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec.
9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Text/Photo
1: Photo
2: Text
3: Custom Mode
0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1: Sleep Mode
0: OFF
1: ON
1
0: Invalid
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection
0: APS (Automatic
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
0: Continuous feeding
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Not summer time
1: Summer time
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 171
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Paper size selection for
PPC EUR:
[OTHER] button
FOLIO
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
6
SYS
<1-50>
613
User
interface
614
Network
615
General
Size information of main
memory and page memory
ALL
-
SYS
617
User
interface
Print setting without
department code
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
618
User
interface
Default setting when mixed
size originals are set on
RADF
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
619
Paper
feeding
Time lag before Auto Job
Start of bypass feeding
ALL
4
<0-10>
SYS
620
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Department management
setting (Copier)
Department management
setting (FAX)
Department management
setting (Printer)
Department management
setting (Scanner)
Department management
setting (List print)
Blank copying prevention
mode during RADF jamming
PPC
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
User
interface
Rotation printing at the
nonsorting
621
622
623
624
625
627
FAX
PRT
SCN
PRT
PPC
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 172
05/11
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Press the icon on the
LCD to select the size.
9
Sets the period of time
when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or parallel).
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
-50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)
Displays the sizes of
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each memory is properly recognized.
0: Printed forcibly
1: Not printed
2: Deleted forcibly
0: Scanned as all in
same size
1: Scanned as each
original size
Sets the time taken to
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5sec.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: OFF
1: ON (Start printing
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
0: Not rotating
1: Rotating
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
628
629
633
634
636
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
cation
able
tion
value>
User
Direction priority of original
PPC
0
SYS
interface image
<0-1>
User
Department management
ALL
0
SYS
interface setting
<0-1>
Releasing F200 service
ALL
0
SYS
Data
<0-2>
overwrite call
kit
User
interface
User
interface
Inner receiving tray priority
at Non-sort Mode
Width setting for image
shift copying (linkage of
front side and back side)
Time differences
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
EUR: 24
UC: 40
JPN: 6
<0-47>
SYS
EUR:1
UC:2
JPN:0
<0-2>
2
<0-4>
SYS
PPC
638
General
640
User
interface
Date display format
ALL
641
User
interface
Automatic Sorting Mode
setting (RADF)
PPC
642
User
interface
Default setting of Sorter
Mode
PPC
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
0
<0-4>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
2:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Automatic
Portrait
Invalid
Valid
Not used
Board installed
(GP-1060)
Service call
Normal
Inner receiving tray
ON
OFF
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
0: YYYY.MM.DD.
1: DD.MM.YYYY
2: MM.DD.YYYY
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Invalid
STAPLE
SORT
GROUP
ROTATE SORT
NON-SORT
STAPLE
SORT
GROUP
ROTATE SORT
Procedur
e
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 173
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
SYS
ratio in editing copy
<0-10>
645
User
interface
646
User
interface
Image position in editing
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
648
User
interface
Returning finisher tray
when printing is finished
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
649
User
interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
650
User
interface
User
interface
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating
order setting
Printing format setting for
Time Stamp and Page
Number
PPC
SYS
PPC
0
<0-1>
2
<0-3>
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Cascade operation setting
PPC
Cascade operation setting
PRT
Direction priority for date
and time stamp printing
PPC
651
652
653
657
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 174
05/11
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Sets the reproduction
ratio for the “X in 1”
printing (including magazine sort) to the
“Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio”.
0: 90% 1: 91%
2: 92% 3: 93%
4: 94% 5: 95%
6: 96% 7: 97%
8: 98% 9: 99%
10: 100%
Sets the page pasted
position for “X in 1” to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: Cornering
1: Centering
Sets whether or not
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
Hyphen
(with page number)
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
658
Classification
User
interface
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Auto Job Start setting for
PRT
0
SYS
bypass feed printing
<0-1>
Contents
Procedur
e
1
659
User
interface
Auto Job start setting for
bypass feed printing
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
ALL
SYS
0: Invalid1: Valid
1
662
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
-
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of
received FAX
Auto-forwarding setting of
received E-mail
Clearing of SMS partition
Sets whether or not
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Sets whether or not
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
0: Invalid1:Valid
SYS
3
665
General
M/SYS all clearing
ALL
-
M/
SYS
666
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
667
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
669
General
System all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
670
General
ALL
-
SYS
671
User
interface
HDD diagnostic menu display
Size indicator
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Clears SMS partition.
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
Initializes all the adjustment modesand the
setting modes.
Initializes the Electronic Filing.
Initializes the shared
folder.
Initializes system
NVRAM area.
Display the HDD information
0: Invalid 1: Valid
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 175
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Initialization of department
SYS
management information
Code
Classification
672
General
673
General
Trial period setting
ALL
254
<1-60>
SYS
678
General
Setting of banner advertising display
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
679
General
ALL
-
SYS
680
General
ALL
-
SYS
681
General
Banner advertising display
1
Banner advertising display
2
Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
682
Use
interface
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 176
05/11
Contents
Initializing of the department management
information
* Key in the code and
press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the
initialization.
If the area storing
the department
management information is destroyed
for some reason,
“Enter Department
Code” is displayed
on the control panel
even if the department management
function is not set
on. In this case, initialize the area with
this code. This area
is normally initialized at the factory.
Sets the trial period
from 1 to 60 days. This
setting is effective only
when the default value
is "254". Once the
default value is set, this
value is only used for a
reference.
Sets whether or not displaying the banner
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is displayed alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
* This button enables
the entry of “Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on
the control panel.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Procedur
e
3
1
1
11
11
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
683
General
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
1
SYS
Duplex printing setting
<0-1>
when coin controller is
used
684
685
General
General
Rebuilding all databases
Rebuilding all databases
related to Address Book
ALL
ALL
-
SYS
SYS
686
General
ALL
-
SYS
689
FAX
Rebuilding all databases
related to log
Adaptation of paper source
priority selection
FAX
0
<0-1>
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
HDD type display
ALL
<2>
<0-2>
692
Maintenance
Performing panel calibration
ALL
-
SYS
693
General
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
-
SYS
694
695
General
General
Performing HDD testing
Sets when the end of trial
period is notified.
ALL
PRT/
SCN
3
<0-59>
SYS
SYS
696
Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding
Installation of scrambler
board (Option)
ALL
0
<0-1>
-
Paper type priority
PPC
1
<1-2>
SYS
697
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
SYS
Contents
When the duplex printing is short paid with a
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is considered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this setting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
Rebuilds all databases.
Rebuilds all databases
related to the Address
Book.
Rebuilds all databases
related to the logs.
0: Not subjected for
APS judgment
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
2: Normal formatting
0: Not formatted
1: Not used
2: Normal format
Performs the calibration
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Returns the value to the
factory shipping default
value.
Checks the bad sector.
Sets when the end of
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Sets the paper type priority during copying.
1: Plain paper
2: Thick paper 1
Procedur
e
1
2
3
3
3
1
7
7
1
3
3
1
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 177
05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Entering the key code for
ALL
scrambler board
698
Scrambler
board
699
Scrambler
board
FAX
Erasing all data in HDD
ALL
-
-
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
function
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
703
Maintenance
ALL
-
SYS
704-0
User
interface
Remote-controlled service
HTTP server
URL setting
Interruption of Copying
stapling operation (no staple)
Printing /
BOX printing
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
https://
device.mf
p-support.com:
443/
device/firstregist.ashx
SYS
701
704-1
707
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
HTTP initially-registered
server
URL setting
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 178
05/11
Contents
Start up this code and
have the user enter the
key code.
Once the key code has
been set, this code cannot be set again on
security grounds.
This setting is effective
only when the scrambler board is installed.
0: Japan
1: Asia
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
0: Valid (Remote-controlled server)
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
Maximum 256 Bytes
0: Continues printing
by switching sort
setting
1: Interrupts printing
0: Continues printing
by switching sort
setting
1: Interrupts printing
Maximum 256 Bytes
Procedur
e
5
3
1
1
11
4
4
11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
710
711
715
Classification
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance
Maintenance
720
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
24
SYS
Short time interval setting
<1-48>
of recovery from Emergency Mode
Short time interval setting
of Emergency Mode
Remote-controlled service
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Remote-controlled service
Writing data of self-diagnostic code
Remote-controlled service
response waiting time
(Timeout)
Remote-controlled service
initial registration
Remote-controlled service
tentative password
Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only)
Service center call function
ALL
ALL
ALL
3
<1-30>
SYS
Unit: Minute
1
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
Maximum 10 letters
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Not registered
1: Registered
2
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1
<0-1>
-
SYS
ALL
728
Maintenance
HTTP proxy port number
setting
ALL
729
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)
HTTP proxy ID setting
HTTP proxy password setting
HTTP proxy panel display
732
733
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
000.000.000.000 255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
11
11
1
11
ALL
0
<065535>
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
1
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
1
Automatic ordering function of supplies
ALL
Mainte- Automatic ordering funcnance
tion of supplies
(Remote) FAX number
ALL
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1
1
HTTP proxy IP address
setting
731
0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
1
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
730
SYS
2
SYS
723
727
1
SYS
Sets the time interval to
recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode.
(Unit: Hour)
Unit: Minute
0
<0-1>
Maintenance
726
Procedur
e
ALL
721
Service center call HTTP
server URL setting
HTTP proxy setting
60
<30-360>
1230
Contents
-
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
11
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 179
05/11
Code
734
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
745
Maintenance
(Remote)
746
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
747
748
758
759
760
761
762
763
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
E-mail address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's name
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's telephone number
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's E-mail address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
User's address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service number
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service technician's name
Automatic ordering funcALL
SYS
tion of supplies
Service technician's telephone number
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Service technician's E-mail
address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Supplier's name
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Supplier's address
ALL
SYS
Automatic ordering function of supplies
Notes
ALL
SYS
Information about supplies
Part number of toner cartridge K
Information about supplies
ALL
1
SYS
Order quantity of toner car<1-99>
tridge K
ALL
1
SYS
Information about supplies
<1-99>
Condition number of toner
cartridge K
Information about supplies
ALL
SYS
Part number of toner bag
Contents
Procedur
e
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 5 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
11
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 128 letters
11
Maximum 20 digits
11
11
1
1
Maximum 20 digits
11
Information about supplies
Order quantity of toner bag
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS
1
Information about supplies
Condition number of toner
bag
ALL
1
<1-99>
SYS
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 180
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
764
765
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems
RAM
cation
tion
able
value>
ALL
1
SYS
Mainte- Automatic ordering sup<0-2>
plies
nance
(Remote) Result table printout
ALL
2
SYS
Mainte- Automatic ordering sup<0-2>
plies
nance
(Remote) Display
Contents
0:
1:
2:
0:
OFF
Always
ON Error
Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX/
HTTP)
2: Invalid
Enables to set up to 3
E-mail
addresses to be sent.
(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
Maximum 192 letters
Procedur
e
1
1
767
Mainte- Service Notification setting
nance
(Remote)
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
768
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
Destination E-mail address
ALL
-
SYS
Total counter information
transmission setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Total counter transmission
date setting
ALL
1
<1-31>
SYS
1 to 31
1
PM counter notification setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Dealer's name
ALL
-
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
-
SYS
Display setting of [Service
Notification] button
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Maximum 100 letters
Needed at initial registration
Maximum 20 letters
Needed at initial registration
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Sending error contents of
equipment
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
Setting total counter transmission interval
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Destination E-mail address
2
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Destination E-mail address
3
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Notification format selection
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Text
1: Text + XML data
1
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Day-1
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
1
769
770
771
772
773
Maintenance
774
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
775
776
777
778
779
780
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1
11
11
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 181
05/11
2
781
Maintenance
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Remote-controlled service
ALL
0
SYS
polling day selection Day-2
<0-31>
782
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Day-3
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
783
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Day-4
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
784
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
785
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
786
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
787
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
788
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
789
Maintenance
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Sunday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Monday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Tuesday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
Wednesday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
Thursday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Friday
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection Saturday
Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge K
Information of supplies setting of toner bag
Remote-controlled service
lengthened interval polling
(End of month)
Firmware download
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
0:
1:
0:
1:
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
1
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
1
ALL
Notifying address of trialperiod end
PRT/
SCN
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/
SCN
Code
790
794
795
796
797
Classification
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
798
Maintenance
General
799
General
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 182
05/11
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
-
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Accepted
1: Prohibited
Sets where the end of
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF
1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center
[CANCEL]: Cancel
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the “Forcible end
of trial period” is performed, “0” is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Main charger bias correcPRT
128<0M
tion (Toner saving mode)
255>
Code
Classification
826
Charger
840
Setting of toner density
temperature control
Transfer timing correction
ALL
841
Image
control
Transfer
855
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing (Center
thermistor / Tab paper)
856
Fuser
859
0
<0-1>
0
<0-7>
M
ALL
12
<0-14>
M
Pre-running time for first
printing (Tab paper)
ALL
10
<0-15>
M
Developer
Developer bias DC correction(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
860
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
861
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
862
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
863
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
864
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
865
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
866
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
867
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
M
Contents
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
0: Controlled
1: Not controlled
0: Standard
1: Timing 1
2: Timing 2
3: Timing 3
4: Timing 4
5: Timing 5
6: Timing 6
7: Timing 7
0: 140°C 1: 145°C
2: 150°C 3: 155°C
4: 160°C 5: 165°C
6: 170°C 7: 175°C
8: 180°C 9: 185°C
10: 190°C 11: 195°C
12: 200°C 13: 205°C
14: 210°C
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the developer bias
adjustment (05-205).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Corrects the value of
the main charger bias
adjustment (05-210).
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 183
05/11
2
Code
Classification
868
Transfer
869
Transfer
872
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Transfer charger bias corALL
128
M
rection (H)
<0-255>
Contents
Procedur
e
Transfer charger bias correction (L)
ALL
84
<0-255>
M
Laser
Laser power correction
(Normal)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
873
Laser
Laser power correction
(Text/Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
875
Laser
Laser power correction
(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128
<0-255>
M
876
Laser
Laser power correction
(Text)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
877
Laser
Laser power correction
(Photo)
PPC
128
<0-255>
M
900
Version
System firmware ROM version
ALL
-
-
903
905
907
908
911
Version
Version
Version
Version
Version
Engine ROM version
Scanner ROM version
RADF ROM version
Finisher main ROM version
Finisher hole punch ROM
version
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
915
920
Version
Version
FAX
ALL
-
-
921
922
Version
Version
ALL
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
923
Version
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
924
Version
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
925
Version
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
926
Version
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
927
Version
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
928
Version
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
929
Version
FAX board ROM version
FROM basic section software version
FROM internal program
UI data fixed section version
UI data common section
version
Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the leading
edge area of paper.
Corrects the transfer
charger bias output
value of the trailing
edge area of paper.
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
Corrects the value of
the laser power adjustment (05-286).
JPN: T364SY0JXXX
UC: T364SY0UXXX
EUR: T364SY0EXXX
Others: T364SY0XXXX
364M-XXX
364S-XXX
DF-XXXX
SDL-XX FIN-XX
PUN-XX
(This setting is displayed only when the
MJ-6101E is installed.)
F562-XXX
VX.XX/X.XX
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 184
06/06
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at powerON
Version of UI data lanALL
guage 7 in HDD
Web data whole version
ALL
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 1
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 2
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 3
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 4
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 5
Web UI data in HDD
ALL
Version: Language 6
HD version
ALL
-
Code
Classification
930
Version
931
Version
933
934
Version
Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
Version
945
Network
947
General
949
General
Automatic interruption
page setting during black
printing
ALL
0
<0-100>
SYS
950
Electronic
filing
Start-up method of Electronic Filing
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
953
User
interface
Access code entry for
Electronic Filing printing
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
954
User
interface
Clearing timing for files and
Electronic Filing Agent
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
969
User
interface
User
interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
Sound setting when
switching to Energy Saving
Mode
Enables/disables the display that the toner is nearly
empty
ALL
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
970
972
User
interface
Two-way setting of RawPort 9100
Initialization after software
version upgrade
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
0
<0-1>
UTY
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
JPN: T364HD0JXXX
UC: T364HD0UXXX
EUR: T364HD0EXXX
Others: T364HD0XXXX
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Perform this code when
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
Sets the number of
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
Sets the start-up
method of the Electronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up
(Not recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
0: Renewed automatically
1: Enter every time
0: Immediately after
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
12
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 185
05/11
2
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS
<0-3>
Code
Classification
973
Network
975
General
Job handling when printing is short paid with coin
controller
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
976
Electronic
Filing
Equipment name and user
name setting to a folder
when saving files
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
977
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
978
Network
Switching of extended
ASCII code in catFs filesystem
Raw printing job
(Paper feeding drawer)
PRT
0
<0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 186
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
Sets the PCL line feed
code.
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
Sets whether pause or
stop the printing job
when it is short paid
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
Sets whether or not
adding the equipment
name and user name to
the folder when saving
files.
0: Not add
1: Add the equipment
name
2: Add the user name
0: ISO8859-1
1: ISO8859-2
1
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
1
AUTO
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
PFP upper drawer
PFP lower drawer
LCF
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
979
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Raw printing job
PRT
0
SYS
(PCL symbol set)
<0-39>
985
ElecPrint mode setting of mixed
tronic Fil- input source of Electronic
ing
Filing
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
986
General
Copy function setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
988
Paper
feeding
Setting of paper size
switching to 13" LG
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Roman-8
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
PC-8,Code Page
437
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850,Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura International
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
23: ISO 6:ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
29: ISO 69: French
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
0: Image quality priority
mode
1: Function priority
mode
Sets the copy function
to be invalid.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Not switched
1: LG"13"LG
2: FOLIO"13"LG
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 187
05/11
Code
Classification
995
Version
999
1002
Maintenance
Network
1003
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Equipment number
ALL
0
(serial number) display
<10 digits>
FSMS total counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1
<1-2>
SYS
Selection of NIC board status information
ALL
Network
Communication speed and
settings of Ethernet
ALL
1
<1-5>
NIC
1005
Network
Availability of IP
ALL
NIC
Network
Address Mode
ALL
1
<1-2>
2
<1-3>
1006
1007
1008
Network
Network
Domain name
IP address
ALL
ALL
-
NIC
NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
-
NIC
1010
Network
Gateway
ALL
-
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
NIC
1012
Network
Network frame type
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-5>
1013
Network
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
NIC
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1015
Network
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
*
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 188
05/11
1
<1-2>
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Contents
This code can be also
keyed in from the
adjustment mode (05976).
10 digits
Refer to values of total
counter.
1: Not printed out
when the equipment
is restarted
2: Printed out when
the equipment is
restarted
1: Auto
2: 10MBPS Half
Duplex
3: 10MBPS Full
Duplex
4: 100MBPS Half
Duplex
5: 100MBPS Full
Duplex
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Fixed IP address
2: Dynamic IP address
3: Dynamic IP address
without AutoIP
Maximum 96 letters
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Automatic
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
1: Available
2: Not available
Procedur
e
11
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1017
Network
1018
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Availability of DNS
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
IP address to DNS server
ALL
NIC
(Primary)
1019
Network
IP address to DNS server
(Secondary)
ALL
-
NIC
1020
Network
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
<1-5>
NIC
1023
Network
NetBios name
ALL
MFP_
serial
UTY
1024
Network
Name of WINS server or IP
address (Primary)
ALL
-
UTY
1025
Network
Name of WINS server or IP
address (Secondary)
ALL
-
UTY
1026
Network
Availability of Bindery
ALL
NIC
1027
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028
1029
1030
Network
Network
Network
Directory service context
Directory service tree
Availability of HTTP server
ALL
ALL
ALL
1031
Network
Port number to NIC HTTP
server
ALL
1032
Network
Port number to system
HTTP server
ALL
1037
Network
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1038
Network
ALL
1039
Network
FQDN or IP address to
SMTP server
TCP port number of SMTP
client
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
80
<165535>
8080
<165535>
1
<1-2>
-
1040
Network
Availability of SMTP server
ALL
1041
Network
TCP port number of SMTP
server
ALL
1042
Network
E-mail box name to SMTP
server
ALL
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
25
<165535>
1
<1-2>
25
<165535>
-
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Contents
1: Available
2: Not available
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
Maximum 15 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
“serial“
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 47 letters
1: Available
2: Not available
Procedur
e
12
12
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
NIC
UTY
12
12
1: Available
2: Not available
UTY
UTY
12
12
12
Maximum 192 letters
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 189
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Availability of Offramp
ALL
2
UTY
<1-2>
Offramp security
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
Printing at Offramp
ALL
1
UTY
<1-2>
Availability of POP3 clients
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
FQDN or IP address to
ALL
NIC
POP3 server
Types of POP3 server
ALL
1
NIC
<1-3>
Code
Classification
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050
1051
Network
Network
1052
Network
1055
Network
TCP port number of FTP
client
ALL
1057
1058
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1059
Network
Login name to FTP server
Login password to FTP
server
Availability of FTP server
1060
Network
TCP port number of FTP
server
ALL
1061
1062
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1063
Network
Login name to FTP client
Login password to FTP client
MIB function
1065
1066
Network
Network
1067
Network
1068
Network
1069
Network
TRAP destination IP
address
1070
Network
1073
Network
Community setting of
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
1074
Network
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
Login name to POP3
server
Login password to POP3
E-mail reception interval
(Unit: Minute)
TCP port number of POP3
client
Setting of read Community
Setting of read/Write Community
Authentication TRAP function
ALERTS TRAP function
ALL
-
NIC
ALL
ALL
5
<0-4096>
110
<165535>
21
<165535>
NIC
NIC
ALL
ALL
1
<1-2>
21
<165535>
-
Contents
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
1: Automatic
2: POP3
3: APOP
Maximum 96 letters
Maximum 96 letters
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
1
<1-2>
public
private
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
NIC
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
-
UTY
ALL
public
NIC
ALL
1
<1-2>
9100
<165535>
NIC
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 190
05/11
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Maximum 31 letters
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1075
Network
1076
Network
1077
1078
Network
Network
1079
Network
1080
Network
1081
Network
1082
1083
1084
Network
Network
Network
1085
Network
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
1090
1091
Network
Network
1092
Network
1093
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
NIC
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
515
<165535>
LPD queue name
ALL
NIC
Availability of IPP
ALL
1
NIC
<1-2>
Availability of IPP port
ALL
1
NIC
number “80”
<1-2>
NIC
TCP port number of IPP
ALL
631
<165535>
IPP printer name
ALL
MFP_seri NIC
al
Contents
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Procedur
e
12
12
2
Maximum 31 letters
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
12
12
12
IPP printer location
IPP printer information
IPP printer information
(more)
Installer of IPP printer
driver
IPP printer “Make and
Model”
IPP printer information
(more)
MFGR
IPP message from operator
Availability of FTP print
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
NIC
NIC
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
“serial“
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
NIC
ALL
ALL
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
Printer user name of FTP
Printer user password of
FTP
TCP port number to FTP
print server
1
<1-2>
print
-
Network
Login name to Novell print
server
ALL
1094
Network
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
Login password to Novell
print server
Name of SearchRoot
server
Scan rate setting of print
queue
Page number limitation for
printing text of received
Email
MDN return mail setting
when receiving E-mail
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
NIC
NIC
21
<165535>
MFP_
serial
NIC
ALL
-
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
Maximum 47 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
“serial“
Maximum 31 letters
12
-
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
5
<1-255>
5
<1-99>
NIC
Unit: Second
12
2
<1-2>
NIC
12
UTY
UTY
12
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 191
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Trap destination of IPX
ALL
UTY
Code
Classification
1099
Network
1100
Network
Method of SMTP server
authentication
ALL
1
<1-6,10>
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
-
1102
Network
ALL
1103
Network
Login name for SMTP
server authentication
Login password for SMTP
server authentication
Rendezvous setting
ALL
1104
Network
Link local host name
ALL
1105
Network
Service name setting
1111
Network
1112
Contents
Procedur
e
12
NIC
Maximum 24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
1: Disable
2: Plain
3: Login
4: Cram-MD5
5: Digest MD5
6: Kerberos
10: Auto
Maximum 64 letters
12
-
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
NIC
12
ALL
Refer to
contents
NIC
POP Before SMTP setting
ALL
NIC
Network
Host name
ALL
2
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
1113
Network
ALL
-
UTY
1114
Network
ALL
Network
1118
1119
General
Network
Clearing of TAT partition
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
ALL
1
<0-1>
300
<1-9999>
-
SYS
1117
Windows domain No.1 of
user authentication
Sending mail text of InternetFAX
SMB time-out period
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 127 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
“serial“
Maximum 63 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
“serial“
<Default value>
e-STUDIO352:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO352_serial
e-STUDIO452:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO452_serial
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 63 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
“serial“
Maximum 128 letters
SYS
-
1121
Network
ALL
-
1122
Network
PDC (Primary Domain
Controller) name
BDC (Backup Domain
Controller) name
ALL
-
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 192
05/11
NIC
NIC
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Unit: Second
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
3
3
UTY
Initializes only the information of the Network
setting items.
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
NT domain ON/OFF setALL
4
UTY
ting
<3-4>
Code
Classification
1123
Network
1124
Network
Workgroup name
ALL
1125
General
ALL
1126
Counter
1128
Network
1129
Network
1130
User
interface
Data writing of address
book data import
(overwriting method)
Validity of interrupt copying when external counters
are installed
NetwareUserAuthTree
Name1
NetwareUserAuthContext
Name1
Job Build Function
1131
User
interface
1132
workgroup
0
<0-1>
Contents
Procedur
e
3: ON (Domain
selected)
4: OFF (Work group
selected)
Maximum 15 letters
12
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
UTY
12
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1
Maximum number of time
job build performed
ALL
2000
<5-2000>
SYS
General
Default screen selection of
the User Function menu
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1134
Network
ALL
-
UTY
1135
Paper
feeding
NetwareUserAuthTree
Name2
Default setting of drawers
(Printer/BOX)
Sets the Job Build
Function.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Sets the maximum
number of time a job
build has been performed.
5-2000: 5 to 2000 times
Selects the default
screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
1: COUNTER
Maximum 47 letters
PRT
1
<1-5>
SYS
1136
Network
ALL
13
<0-16>
SYS
1137
Network
ALL
SYS
8-20 M bytes
1
1138
Network
12
<8-20>
0
<0-3>
SYS
1
1139
Network
Sets the search method
when performing a
LDAP search.
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
0: Not authenticated
1: Authenticated
Number of lines simultaneously connectable when
using SMB
Memory partition size
when using Samba
LDAP search method setting
LDAP authentication setting
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
LCF
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
PFP upper drawer
PFP lower drawer
1
1
12
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 193
05/11
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
0
SYS
Restriction of the template
<0-1>
function with the administrator privilege
1
UTY
12
-
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
-
SYS
11
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 32 digits
Enter a hyphen with the
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
Maximum 127 letters
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<8 digits>
SYS
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
User
interface
1141
Network
Display of MAC address
ALL
-
SYS
1143
Network
ALL
-
1144
Network
ALL
1145
Maintenance
(Remote)
NetwareUserAuthContext
Name2
NetwareUserAuthTree
Name3
Counter notification
Remote FAX setting
1148
Network
1149
General
NetwareUserAuthContext
Name3
Enhanced bold for PCL6
1372
Image
processing
Heater and energizing time
accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
1376
Image
processing
Image
processing
Toner cartridge drive
counter Number of output
pages
Number of output pages
(Thick paper 1)
Image
processing
Number of output pages
(Thick paper 2)
1386
Procedur
e
Selects the restriction of
the template function
usage setting.
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
(**:**:**:**:**:**)
The address is displayed as above (6-byte
data is divided by a
colon at every 2 bytes).
Maximum 127 letters
1140
1385
Contents
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 194
05/11
M
0:OFF
1:ON
Counts up the heater
control time accumulated (when power of
the equipment is ON)
but does not count at
the Sleep Mode. When
the counter value of the
fuser roller is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
the PM support mode.
Counts the rotation
number of the toner
cartridge.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at the PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
2
12
1
1
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
1387
Classification
Image
processing
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Number of output pages
ALL
0
M
(Thick paper 3)
<8 digits>
Contents
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
When the number of
feeding retry (08-1390
to 08-1395) exceeds
the setting value, the
feeding retry will not be
performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value,
however, the feeding
retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.
Procedur
e
1
2
1
1388
Image
processing
Number of output pages
(OHP film)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1390
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(upper drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1391
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(lower drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1392
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(PFP upper drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1393
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1394
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(bypass feed)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1395
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
(LCF)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1396
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1397
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1398
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1399
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1400
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1
1401
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(upper drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(lower drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(PFP upper drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(PFP lower drawer)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value
(Bypass feed)
Feeding retry counter
upper limit value (LCF)
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 195
05/11
Code
Classification
1410
Counter
1412
Counter
1422
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Counter for period of toner
ALL
0
M
cartridge rotation time
<8 digits>
Counter for tab paper
ALL
0
<8 digits>
M
HDD data overwriting type
Data
overwrite setting
kit
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1424
HDD data clearing type
Data
overwrite setting (forcible clearing)
kit
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1426
Forcible HDD data clearing
Data
overwrite
kit
ALL
-
-
1427
Data
Forcible NVRAM data all
overwrite clearing
kit
ALL
-
-
1428
Forcible SRAM backup
Data
overwrite data all clearing
kit
ALL
-
-
1429
User
interface
Margin width
(Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
ALL
SYS
1430
User
interface
Margin width
(Bookbinding margin)
ALL
Front: 7/
Back: 7
<2-100/100-100>
14
<2-30>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 196
05/11
SYS
Contents
Counts up the period of
rotation time of the
toner cartridge.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
Select the type of the
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
Select the type of the
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
When this code is performed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
When this code is performed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
This setting is not
reflected in "Right",
even if the value less
than 2 is set for "Back".
Procedur
e
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
10
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1431
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
1
SYS
ACC
<0-2>
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE)
for Printer/Box printing
1432
Network
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1433
Network
"Disable e-Filing" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1435
Network
"Disable private and proof
print save" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1436
Network
"Disable fax save" function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1437
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
Hole punch on tab paper
ALL
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
1438
SYS
1439
Paper
feeding
1440
Network
Automatic feed setting of
tab paper and insertion
sheet
(Remote)
Automatic feed setting of
tab paper and insertion
sheet
(Local)
IP Conflict Detect
1441
Network
SNTP Enable
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1442
Network
SNTP Polling rate
ALL
-
1444
Network
Primary SNTP Address
ALL
24
<1-168>
-
-
1445
Network
Secondary SNTP Address
ALL
-
-
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
0: ACC prohibited
1: Only in the same
paper direction
2: In both same direction and different
directions
0: Normal mode
1: Mode for Private
Print
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted
0: No hole punch
1: Hole punch
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Data obtaining interval
(Unit: Hour)
SNTP server IP
Address (Primary)
SNTP server IP
Address (Secondary)
12
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 197
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Port number to SNTP
ALL
123
<165535>
IPP administrator name
ALL
-
Code
Classification
1446
Network
1447
Network
1448
Network
IPP administrator password
ALL
-
-
1449
Network
IPP authentication method
ALL
1
<1-4>
-
1450
Network
User name for IPP authentication
ALL
-
-
1451
Network
Password for IPP authentication
ALL
-
-
1464
Network
Samba server ON/OFF
setting
ALL
1
<1-4>
NIC
1470
General
ALL
General
0
<0-1>
0
<0-5>
SYS
1471
Device authentication function setting
User authentication
method
1472
General
1473
General
1474
General
1476
Network
User data management
automatic registration function setting
User data management
limitation setting
User data management
limitation
Setting by number of printouts
Restriction on Address
book operation by administrator
ALL
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<7 digits>
SYS
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 198
05/11
0
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
12
This should be an
account which can control all IPP jobs.
This should be the
password of an account
which can control all
IPP jobs.
1: Disabled
2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
This should be the
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
This should be the
password of the
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
1: Samba enabled
2: Samba disabled
3: Print Share disabled
4: File Share disabled
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Local
1: NTLM (NT Domain)
2: LDAP
3: Kerberos (Active
Directory)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0-9,999,999:
0-9,999,999 sheets
1
Some restrictions can
be given on the administrator for operating the
Address book.
0: No restriction
1: Can be operated
only under the
administrator's
authorization
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1477
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Restriction on "To" ("cc")
ALL
0
SYS
address
<0-3>
1478
User
interface
Display of paper size setting by installation operation of drawers
ALL
1479
User
interface
Default setting of sharpness
ALL
1481
General
User data management
clearing
1482
General
1483
JPN: 0
UC: 1
EUR: 0
<0-1>
5
<1-9>
SYS
ALL
-
-
User data department
management
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
General
User data recovery
ALL
-
-
1484
Network
Authentication method of
"Scan to Email"
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1485
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1486
Network
Setting whether use of
Internet FAX is permitted
or not when it is given an
authenticationn
Server setting for LDAP
user authentication
ALL
SYS
1487
Network
"From" address assignment method when it is
given an authentication
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
0
<0-2>
1488
Network
ID setting of LDAP server
for "From" address assignment
ALL
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
0
<04294967
295>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
0: No restriction
1: Can be set from
both of the Address
book and LDAP
server
2: Can be set only
from the Address
book
3: Can be set only
from the LDAP
server
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
1
1: -4 2: -3
3: -2 4: -1
5: 0 6: +1
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4
All the user data in the
database and backup
files can be deleted.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
* When this code is
set to “1” (Valid), the
department management setting
(08-629) should be
“1” (Valid).
The data in the database is overwritten with
the data in the backup
file.
0: Disabled
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
1
2
1
3
1
3
1
1
2
0: "User name" + @ +
"Domain name"
1: LDAP searching
2: Use the address
registered at "From"
field of E-mail setting
1
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 199
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Setting for "From" address
ALL
0
SYS
edit at "Scan to Email"
<0-1>
E-mail domain name
ALL
SYS
Code
Classification
1489
Network
1491
Network
1492
Paper
feeding
1494
General
Detection method of 13"
LG for single-size document
Limitation check method
1495
Maintenance
1496
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Service call checking
period setting
ALL
6
<0-12>
-
General
Operation setting for User
authentication/registration
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1497
Network
e-Filing Access Mode (for
Client)
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1498
FAX
1
<0-1>
SYS
Inbound FAX function
(Forwarding by TSI)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 200
05/11
Contents
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
96 + 2 (delimiter) character
ASCll sequence only
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Checked at every
page printed
1: Checked at every
job printed
0: No checking period
specified (= Calls
service technician
immediately)
0: 10 minutes
1: 30 minutes
3: 1 hour
4: 6 hours
5: 12 hours
6: 24 hours
7: 48 hours
8: 7 days
9: 1 month
10: 1 year
11: 5 years
12: Not limited (= Calls
service technician if
such error has
occurred in the past
even once or more)
0 : Disables operation
setting for User
authentication/registration
1 : Enables operation
setting for User
authentication/registration
0: Mode 1
1: Mode 2
2: Mode 3
0: OFF
(Function disabled)
1: ON
(Function enabled)
Procedur
e
1
11
1
2
12
1
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1530-0
Counter
1530-1
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
PPC
0
SYS
Number of
1-UP /
<8 digits>
output pages Duplex
printing
PPC
0
SYS
2-UP /
<8 digits>
Duplex
printing
1530-2
1530-3
1530-4
1533-0
Counter
1533-1
Number of
output pages
of the printer
or BOX
2-UP /
Simplex
printing
4-UP /
Duplex
printing
4-UP /
Simplex
printing
1-UP /
Duplex
printing
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
1535
Counter
1660
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Number of output pages of
the FAX printing
(1-UP / Duplex printing)
Wireless LAN driver
Radio ON/OFF setting
Wireless LAN driver
SSID
Wireless LAN driver
Network type
Wireless LAN driver
Security
Wireless LAN driver
Encryption system
Wireless LAN driver
Transmission output power
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN driver
Transmission rate
Wireless LAN driver
Transmission rate value
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN driver
Operation channel
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
Counts the number of
output pages.
4
Counts the number of
output pages using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
Counts the number of
sheets using [2IN1] or
[MAGAZINE SORT].
Counts the number of
output pages using
[4IN1].
Counts the number of
sheets using [4IN1].
4
4
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Counts the number of
output pages.
4
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
4
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
-
Counts the number of
output pages using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
* When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
Counts the number of
output pages in the
default settings.
1: OFF
2: ON
12
-
Maximum 32 letters
12
1
<1-2>
4
<1-4>
1
<1-3>
1
<1-5>
-
12
ALL
1: Infrared wireless LAN
2: Ad-hoc network
1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK
3: WEP 4: NONE
1: TKIP 2: AES
3: Dynamic WEP
1: 100% 2: 50%
3: 25%
4: 12.5%
5: min
1: Auto
2: Manual
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-12>
1
<1-2>
-
-
-
1: 1
3: 5.5
5: 6
7: 12
9: 24
10: 36
11: 48
12: 54
1: Auto
4
4
1
12
12
12
12
2: 2
4: 11
6: 9
8: 18
12
2: Manual
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 201
05/11
2
Code
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
Classification
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Operation channel value
<1-11>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
WEP bit number
<1-3>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
2
WEP key entry system
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
WEP key value
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
WPA-PSK passphrase
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Sleep mode setting
<1-3>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Slot-time limitation
<1-2>
ALL
5
Wireless LAN driver
<0-1000>
Number of times of software retry
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Preamble
<1-2>
Wireless LAN driver
ALL
1
Operation mode
<1-3>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
Wireless LAN setting
<1-3>
ALL
-
-
ALL
-
-
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name for secret key
of client certificate
ALL
-
-
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name for CA self-certificate
ALL
-
-
1685
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
EAP user name
ALL
-
-
1686
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
EAP user name
ALL
-
-
1688
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Log file output
ALL
-
-
1680
Wireless
LAN
1681
Wireless
LAN
1682
Wireless
LAN
1684
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name for configuration file
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name for client certificate
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 202
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
12
1: 64
3: 152
1: Hex
2: 128
12
2: ASCII
12
Maximum 32 letters
12
Maximum 64 letters
12
1: Off
2: Max
3: Normal
1: Long 2: Short
12
12
12
1: Long
2: Longshort
1: All
2: 11b
3: 11g
This setting is whether
the wireless LAN connection is enabled or
disabled.
1: Unset 2: Enabled
3: Disabled
Maximum 255 letters
This should be the path
name in full where the
client certificate is
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
This should be the path
name in full where the
client certificate is
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
This should be the path
name in full where the
CA self-certificate is
located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
This should be the user
name when the EAPTLS is used.
This should be the user
name when the PEAP
is used.
This should be the path
name to which the log
file is output.
(Maximum 255 letters)
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
30
Authentication interval
<3065535>
1689
Wireless
LAN
1690
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Holding interval
ALL
60
<6065535>
M
1691
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
EAPOL-Start
Number of times of packet
retry
ALL
3
<165535>
M
1692
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Session resume
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1693
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
MAC Frame size
ALL
1398
<1-1398>
-
1696
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Device file setting for
obtaining random number
ALL
/dev/
urandom
-
1697
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
CRL directory designation
ALL
-
-
1699
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
EAP authentication type
ALL
1
<1-3>
-
1700
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
CN name
ALL
-
-
1701
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
CN name check
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
This should be the timeout interval between
EAP responses.
30: 30 seconds
The EAP authentication will start after having been waited in this
period when an EAP
failure was received.
60: 60 seconds
When an EAPOL-Start
packet has been sent
and the request ID cannot be received, this
EAPOL-Start packet will
be re-sent for the number of times set in this
code.
3: 3 times
This setting is whether
the pre-master key
should be updated or
not upon a TLS renegotiation.
1: Session is resumed
2: Session is not
resumed
This is a MAC frame
size used in the wireless LAN connection.
The data is fragmented
into this size.
1398: 1398 bytes
This should be the
device file name which
can obtain a seed to initialize the WEP PRNG
for xsupplicant.
(Maximum 255 letters)
This should be the path
name of the directory in
full where the CRL file
is located.
(Maximum 255 letters)
This setting is for the
EAP authentication
type which xsupplicant
can authenticate.
1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP
3: EAP-TLS and PEAP
This should be an
authentication server
name (basically a
domain name in full).
(Maximum 255 letters)
1: NO
2: YES
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 203
05/11
2
Code
1702
1703
Classification
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
0
Debugging level
<0-7>
Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
1
Ethereal log file output
<1-2>
1704
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Update interval of PTK
(Pairwise Transient Key)
ALL
0
<0-720>
-
1705
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Strict packet check
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
1706
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Priority change at 4-way
handshake
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
1707
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Security level
ALL
1
<1-3>
-
1708
User
interface
Selectable security level
(EAP-TLS)
ALL
1
<1-3>
-
1709
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Installation status of option
Bluetooth
ON/OFF setting
Bluetooth
Device name
Bluetooth
Discovery
Bluetooth
Security
ALL
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
MFP
SYS
1710
1711
1712
1713
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 204
05/11
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
0-7: Setting of log file
output level
This setting is whether
the Ethereal log file is
output or not.
1: NO
2: YES
The update interval of a
secret key across AP
(Access Point) and STA
(Station) can be set.
This interval is for
updating the secret key
from STA.
0: Not updated
1-720: 1-720 minutes of
interval
The Ack bit and request
bit of EAPOL-Key is
checked.
1: Not checked
2: Checked
A higher priority is given
to the xsupplicant task
when a 4-way handshake is started.
1: Priority not changed
2: Priority changed
The encryption capability output in TLS clientHello message can be
selected.
1: LOW 2: MIDDLE
3: HIGH
These are the security
level which can be
selected from the user
interface. This setting is
not applied in case of
PEAP. ("LOW" and
"MIDDLE" is mandatory for PEAP)
1: LOW + MIDDLE +
HIGH
2: MIDDLE + HIGH
3: HIGH
0: Not installed
1: Installed
0: OFF
1: ON
Maximum 32 letters
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
0: Security function
OFF
1: Security function
ON
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
11
1
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
1714
Classification
Bluetooth
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Bluetooth
ALL
0000
SYS
PIN
Contents
Procedur
e
11
1715
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Data encryption
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1716
Bluetooth
ALL
6
<1-50>
SYS
1717
Bluetooth
ALL
6
<1-50>
SYS
Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
1
1720
Network
Bluetooth
HCRP reception time-out
period
Bluetooth
HCRP transmission timeout period
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 1)
Maximum 8 digits
(8-digit sequence)
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
0: Not encrypted
1: Encrypted
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
ALL
-
-
12
1721
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 1)
ALL
-
-
1722
Network
IP address range for IP filter I
(Minimum area 2)
ALL
-
-
1723
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 2)
ALL
-
-
1724
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 3)
ALL
-
-
1725
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 3)
ALL
-
-
1726
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 4)
ALL
-
-
IP filter minimum area 1
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
1
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 2
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
2
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 3
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
3
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 4
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 205
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 4)
Code
Classification
1727
Network
1728
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 5)
ALL
-
-
1729
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 5)
ALL
-
-
1730
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 6)
ALL
-
-
1731
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 6)
ALL
-
-
1732
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 7)
ALL
-
-
1733
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 7)
ALL
-
-
1734
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 8)
ALL
-
-
1735
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 8)
ALL
-
-
1736
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 9)
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 206
05/11
Contents
IP filter maximum area
4
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 5
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
5
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 6
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
6
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 7
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
7
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 8
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
8
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area 9
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
Procedur
e
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1737
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
ALL
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 9)
Contents
Procedur
e
IP filter maximum area
9
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter minimum area
10
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
10
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
12
2
12
1738
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 10)
ALL
-
-
1739
Network
IP address range for IP filter
(Maximum area 10)
ALL
-
-
1740
Network
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1741
Network
SSL setting
HTTP server OFF/ON setting
SSL setting
HTTP server port number
ALL
-
SSL HTTP server port
number
12
1742
Network
-
Network
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
SSL IPP server port
number
12
1743
1744
Network
SSL setting
SSL ftp server OFF/ON
ALL
10443
<165535>
2
<1-2>
443
<165535>
2
<1-2>
12
1745
Network
SSL setting
SSL ftp server Port
ALL
-
1746
Network
SSL setting
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
ALL
990
<165535>
2
<1-2>
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to FTP
Server
12
1747
Network
SSL setting
SSL LDAP Client Port
ALL
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to LDAP
Server
1748
Network
SSL setting
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
ALL
12
1749
Network
SSL setting
SSL POP3 Client Port
ALL
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to POP3
Server
1750
Network
SSL setting
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON
ALL
12
1751
Network
SSL setting
SSL SMTP Client Port
ALL
2: Invalid
3: SMTP with TLS
(STARTTLS)
4: SMTPS (SMTP
OverSSL)
Port number to SMTP
Server
SSL setting
IPP server OFF/ON setting
SSL setting
IPP server port number
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
ALL
ALL
636
<165535>
2
<1-2>
995
<165535>
2
<2-4>
465
<165535>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 207
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
Code
Classification
1755
Network
1756
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1757
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
1759
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1760
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1762
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
1763
Wireless
LAN
ALL
-
1764
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1765
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant
Direction of Ethereal log
file output
Wireless LAN supplicant
Control sequence setting
of "Cipher Suite"
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name for user certificate
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 208
05/11
Contents
Procedur
e
12
-
Domain Name Server
option (6)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
Name Server option
(44) = Primary and Secondary Wins NAME
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
The Host Name Vendor Extension option
(12)
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
SMTP Server Option
(69) Simple Mail Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
POP3 Server Option
(70) Post Office Server
Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
SNTP Server Option
(42)
NTP Server Address
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
Maximum 63 letters
12
-
-
Maximum 255 letters
12
-
-
Maximum 63 letters
12
12
12
12
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
Wireless LAN supplicant
Path name entered for CA
self-certificate
Enabling server's IP
ALL
2
SYS
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
1766
Wireless
LAN
1767
Network
1768
Network
Previous IP address
ALL
-
-
1779
Network
Default data saving directory of "Scan to File"
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1781-0
Network
Notification of
scan job
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
1781-1
When job
completed
On error
ALL
SYS
1782
Network
File name format of "Save
as file" and Email transmission
ALL
0
<0-5>
SYS
1783
Network
Date display format of the
file name of "Save as file"
and Email transmission
ALL
0
<0-4>
SYS
Contents
Procedur
e
Maximum 63 letters
12
DNS domain name
Option (15) DNS
domain name of the client
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
0: Local directory
1: REMOTE 1
2: REMOTE 2
Sets the notification
method of scan job
completion.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Sets the naming
method of the file of
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
0: [FileName]-[Data][Page]
1: [FileName]-[Page][Data]
2: [Data]-[FileName][Page]
3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName]
4: [Page]-[FileName][Data]
5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName]
Sets the data display
format of the file of
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
0: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
1: [YY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]
3: [YY][MM][DD]
4: [HH][mm][SS]
12
12
1
4
4
1
1
The order of [YY], [MM]
and [DD] varies
depending on the setting of the code 08-640
(Data display format).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 209
05/11
2
Code
Classification
1784
Network
1785
Network
1786
Network
1850
Network
1851
Network
1852
Network
1853
Network
1854
Network
1855
Network
1856
Network
1857
Network
1911
Finisher
1912
Finisher
1915
Network
1920
Network
1921
Network
1922
Network
1923
Network
1924
Network
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Single page data saving
ALL
0
SYS
directory at "Save as file"
<0-1>
1
ALL
-
UTY
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
1: Windows Server
2: Not Windows Server
Sets a user attribute
name.
12
ALL
4
<4-6>
SYS
ALL
3
<3-6>
SYS
IPP
MaxConnection
IPP
ActiveConnection
LPD
MaxConnection
LPD
ActiveConnection
AppleTalk
MaxConnection
ALL
16
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
NIC
Device domain name of
device authentication
Windows domain No. 2 of
user authentication
Windows domain No. 3 of
user authentication
LDAP authentication
Server type
LDAP authentication
User attribute
Procedur
e
Sets the directory
where the file of "Save
as file" is saved.
0: Save it under a subfolder
1: Save it without creating a subfolder
Sets the digit of a page
number attached on the
file.
4-6: 4-6 digits
Sets the extension digits of the file to be
saved.
3: Auto
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
Number of maximum
connections (IPP).
Number of active connections (IPP).
Number of maximum
connections (LPD).
Number of active connections (LPD).
Number of maximum
connections (AppleTalk).
Number of active connections (AppleTalk).
Number of maximum
connections (RawPrint).
Number of active connections (RawPrint).
3-30 sec. (in increments
of 1 sec.)
0: MJ-1023/MJ-1024
1: MJ-1101
0: Eliminates 2 mm
from circumference
(Void: 2 mm)
1: No space eliminated
(Void: 0 mm)
Maximum 128 letters
Page number display format of the file of "Save as
file" and Email transmission
Extension (suffix) format of
the file of "Save as file"
AppleTalk
ActiveConnection
RawPrint
MaxConnection
RawPrint
ActiveConnection
Manual stapling time-out
period
Finisher model switching
setting value
Filing size for Network
scanning function
Contents
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 210
05/11
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
10
<1-16>
15
<3~30>
0
<0~1>
0
<0-1>
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
M
M
SYS
NIC
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
1
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
Classification
1925
Network
1926
FAX
1928
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
2
SYS
Execution of user authenti<0-2>
cation when the user ID is
not entered
Tab/cover sheet printing at
FAX reception
Printing stop function
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Network
Role Based Access
LDAP search index
ALL
SYS
1929
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 1
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
0
<0-2>
1930
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 2
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
1931
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 3
ALL
EUR:2
Other:0
<0-2>
SYS
1932
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 4
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1933
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 5
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1934
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 6
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1935
User
interface
Keyboard layout for Language 7
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1936
Network
AppleTalk device name
ALL
MFP_
serial
UTY
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
SYS
Contents
0: Forcible execution
1: Execution impossible (pooled in the
invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
Sets on or off of the
printing function of special sheets such as tab
or cover sheet of FAX,
Email or list print.
0: Function off
1: Function on
Procedur
e
1
2
1
5
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
1: QWERTY layout
(for Europe)
2: QWERTZ layout
3: AZERTY layout
Maximum 32 letters
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial".
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 211
05/11
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
ALL
0
SYS
User name and password
<0-2>
at user authentication or
"Save as file"
Code
Classification
1937
Network
1939
Network
STAGE I/F startup setting
ALL
1940
Network
STAGE port number
ALL
1942
Network
ALL
1943
Network
1944
Network
1950
Network
Device authentication
PDC/BDC time-out period
User authentication
PDC/BDC time-out period
Device/User authentication
Method of Windows
domain authentication
SMB signature for SMB
server
1951
Network
1952
Network
1953
Network
1954
Network
1955
Network
1956
Network
1957
Network
1958
Network
1959
Network
ALL
ALL
0
<04294967
295>
20080
<165535>
60
<1-180>
30
<1-180>
1
<1-3>
Contents
Procedur
e
NIC
0: User name and
password of the
device
1: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(Template registration information
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
2: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(User information of
the authentication
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
32bit definition
0: Disabled
bit1: Normal Remote I/F
bit2: Remote Scan I/F
STAGE port number
12
NIC
Unit: Second
12
NIC
Unit: Second
12
NIC
12
12
NIC
1
12
ALL
1
<1-3>
UTY
SMB signature for SMB client
ALL
1
<1-3>
UTY
Device name for device
authentication
Password for the device
name used for device
authentication
PDC2 of user authentication
BDC2 of user authentication
PDC3 of user authentication
BDC3 of user authentication
PDC of device authentication
BDC of device authentication
ALL
-
UTY
1: Auto
2: Kerberos
3: NTLMv2
1: Auto
2: Valid
3: Invalid
1: Auto
2: Valid
3: Invalid
Maximum 128 letters
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 212
05/11
12
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.9)
Code
1500
Classification
Pixel
counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
Standard paper size setting
ALL
EUR: 0
SYS
UC: 1
JPN: 0
<0-1>
1501
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1502
Pixel
counter
Service technician reference counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1503
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference
counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1504
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter display setting
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1505
Pixel
counter
Displayed reference setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1506
Pixel
counter
Toner empty determination
counter setting
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1507
Pixel
counter
Threshold setting for toner
empty determination (Output pages)
ALL
400
<0-999>
SYS
1508
Pixel
counter
Threshold setting for toner
empty determination (Pixel
counter)
ALL
17550
<060000>
SYS
1509
Pixel
counter
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1510
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter clear flag/
Service technician reference
Service technician reference cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1514
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference
cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1518
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge reference
count started date
ALL
-
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Procedur
e
Selects the standard
paper size to convert it
into the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1: LT
Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
Clears all information
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
Clears all information
related to the toner cartridge reference pixel
counter.
Selects whether or not
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Selects the reference
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference1: Toner
cartridge reference
Selects the counter to
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1: Pixel counter
Sets the number of output pages to determine
toner empty. This setting is valid when “0” is
set at 08-1506.
Sets the number of output pages to determine
toner empty. This setting is valid when “1” is
set at 08-1506.
Becomes “1” when 081502 is performed.
1
Displays the date on
which 08-1502 was performed.
Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was performed.
Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was performed.
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 213
05/12
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
able
tion
value>
PPC <8 digits> SYS
Number of output pages
(Service technician reference)
1548
Pixel
counter
1550
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Service technician reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1551
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Service technician reference)
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1553
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
<8 digits>
SYS
1555
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages/
black (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1556
Pixel
counter
Number of output pages
(Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1566
Pixel
counter
Toner cartridge replacement counter
ALL
<3 digits>
SYS
1592
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1593
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 214
05/12
Contents
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
output pages converted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit. page]
Counts the number of
time of the toner cartridge replacement.
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Code
1594
Classification
Pixel
counter
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
FAX
0
Average pixel count
<0(Service technician refer10000>
ence)
1595
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1606
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1607
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Service technician reference)
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1608
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Service technician reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1613
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1619
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1624
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1625
Pixel
counter
Average pixel count (Toner
cartridge reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1634
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1639
Pixel
counter
Latest pixel count
(Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Contents
Displays the average
pixel count in the FAX
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function
and service technician
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy function, black mode and
service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the FAX function and service technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function
and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the average
pixel count in the FAX
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the FAX function and toner cartridge
reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy function and toner cartridge
reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur
e
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 215
05/12
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/452>
Default
Func- <AcceptItems
RAM
tion
able
value>
SYS
Latest pixel count
PRT
0
(Toner cartridge reference)
<010000>
1640
Pixel
counter
1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
Contents
Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function and toner cartridge reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the copy function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
Procedur
e
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
The pixel count data
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed.
[Unit: page]
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 216
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<<PM support mode related code>>
• The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
• Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
• When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
• When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Photoconductive drum
1150-0 to 8
1151
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
<Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Drum separation finger
1172-0 to 8
1173
<Default values of code 1172
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
<Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Items
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Remarks
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 217
05/12
2
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
<Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
<Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
<Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Transfer charger wire
1214-0 to 8
1215
<Default values of code 1214
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Separation charger wire
1224-0 to 8
1225
<Default values of code 1224
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
<Default values of code 1246
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
<Default values of code 1250
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Cleaning roller
1266-0 to 8
1267
Fuser roller separation finger
1268-0 to 8
1269
<Default values of code 1266
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
<Default values of code 1268
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
<Default values of code 1282
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
<Default values of code 1284
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1287
<Default values of code 1286
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
Items
Pickup roller
(RADF)
Feed roller
(RADF)
Separation roller
(RADF)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 218
05/11
Remarks
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1291
<Default values of code 1290
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
<Default values of code 1292
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
<Default values of code 1294
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
Feed roller
(Upper drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
<Default values of code 1298
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Feed roller
(Lower drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
<Default values of code 1300
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1303
<Default values of code 1302
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
Separation roller
(Upper drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
<Default values of code 1306
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(Lower drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
<Default values of code 1308
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
<Default values of code 1310
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 160000/160000
Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
<Default values of code 1312
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
<Default values of code 1314
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Separation roller
(Bypass unit)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
<Default values of code 1316
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
<Default values of code 1320
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
<Default values of code 1322
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Items
Feed roller
(LCF)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Remarks
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 219
06/01
2
PM management setting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Feed roller
(Bypass unit)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
<Default values of code 1324
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
<Default values of code 1328
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
<Default values of code 1330
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1333
<Default values of code 1332
(e-STUDIO352/452)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
Items
Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 220
05/11
Remarks
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
2
(3)
Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)
•
Key in “1” to copy the value of the total
counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(B)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 221
04/09
•
Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup
counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(4)
(B)
Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 222
04/09
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.2.9
Pixel counter
1) Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 223
05/12
2
2) Factors affecting toner consumption
Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:
- Original/Data coverage
- Original/Data density
- Original/Print mode
- Density setting
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption
per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Original density
Toner consumption
Original coverage
TEXT
/PHOTO
TEXT
Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual
density density density density density density
+5
Center
+1
-1
-5
PHOTO
Original mode
Density setting
Fig. 2-4 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 224
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3) Details of pixel counter
- Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference.
Toner cartridge reference
This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count
or output pages after the detection of toner empty has exceeded the threshold.The threshold to
be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and output pages (0:
Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode (08-1508)
and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507).When the new toner cartridge is
judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the
data after the installation of new cartridge.Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference
is performed in the setting mode(08-1503).
Service technician reference
This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.Clearing of the
counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode(08-1502).
-
Print count (number of output pages)
The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).The examples of
conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
1. “1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
2. “2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
3. “1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
4. “1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
-
Pixel count (%)
Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Note:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
####" Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
####" Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
####" Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 225
2
4. Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission
Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
####" Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4
5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
####" Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
6. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission
####" Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4
-
Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)
There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest
pixel count (%).
Average pixel count (%)
The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
Latest pixel count (%)
The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
-
Type of calculated data
Since this is multifunctional, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function.The following
list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be
confirmed by the setting mode (08).See after-mentioned (5)-(c) for details.
": With data
$: Without data
Toner cartridge reference
Service technician reference
Copier function
"
"
Printer function
"
"
FAX function
"
"
Total
"
"
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
-
Setting related with the pixel counter function
(f-1) Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).
(f-2) Pixel counter display setting
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).
(f-3) Display reference setting
The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge
reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).
(f-4) Determination counter of toner empty
This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner
empty is detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner
empty is not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output
pages is counted.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 226
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(f-5) Pixel counter clearing
There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.
4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption
The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density
setting may cause it as well.In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the
standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.The
relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:
Number of output pages per cartridge (page)
Standard number of output pages
X
X/2
X/10
60%
6% 12%
Pixel count (%)
Fig. 2-5 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 227
2
5) Pixel counter confirmation
- Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner
cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON.
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
Fig. 2-6 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
Fig. 2-7 Information screen of service technician reference
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 228
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
-
Data list printing
The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2003.4.23 09:55
2
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE
0 20030423
1 20030423
2 20030423
Print Count [LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
PPC
12345
12345
12345
PRN
23456
23456
23456
FAX
12345
12345
12345
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
FAX
12345
12345
12345
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
Fig. 2-8 Data list of toner cartridge reference
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2003.4.23 09:55
SERVICEMAN
No DATE
0 20030423
1 20030423
2 20030423
Print Count [LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
PPC
12345
12345
12345
PRN
23456
23456
23456
Fig. 2-9 Data list of service technician reference
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 229
-
Display in the setting mode (08)
Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see ! P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/
! P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/452)".
(c-1) Print count, pixel count
Copier
function
Printer
function
FAX function
Total
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Average pixel count
(%)
Toner cartridge reference
1553
Service technician reference
1548
1613
1592
1639
1606
1555
1550
1619
1593
1640
1607
1556
1551
1625
1594
1634
1608
1624
1595
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table
(c-2) Pixel count distribution
Pixel count distribution (page)
Copier function
1649
Printer function
1650
FAX function
1651
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
(c-3) Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566)
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (05-1518)
Service technician reference cleared date
The service technician reference cleared date is displayed. (08-1510)
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 230
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
2.2.10
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) /
Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Date/Time]
200, 638, 640
[Timer]
204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen]
207, 602, 1132
[File]
209, 219, 264, 288
[Language]
220, 221
[Administrator]
263
[Scanning]
265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing]
267, 270, 950, 976, 985
[HDD]
271
[E-mail]
272, 1097, 1098
[default setting]
276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331,
480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
986, 989, 1135
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 973, 978, 979
[Copy volume]
300
[Original counter]
302
[Custom Mode]
508
[Energy saving]
601
[AMS]
605
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Book duplexing]
611
[Summer time]
612
[Paper size]
613
[Department management]
620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 231
05/12
2
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
Scanner
Image
[Sorting]
627, 634, 641, 649
[Original direction]
628
[Image shift]
636
[Edit copying]
645, 646
[Box printing]
647, 953, 954
[X in 1]
650
[Annotation]
651, 657
[Automatic transfer]
660, 661
[Indicator]
671
[Priority drawer]
689
[Media type]
697
[Offsetting between jobs]
682
[Job build]
1130, 1131
[Position]
305, 306
[Distortion]
308
[Reproduction ratio]
340
[Carriage position]
359
[Margin]
430, 431, 432, 433, 434 -0 to 1, 435, 436,
437, 438
[Image density]
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509,
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719,
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862,
931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938,
939, 940, 941, 942
[Range correction]
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,
695, 825, 826, 827, 830, 831, 832, 835,
836, 837, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918,
919, 920, 921
[Gamma slope]
593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945
[Sharpness]
620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2,
867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924
[Smudged/Faint text]
653, 654, 655, 928
[Printer density]
672-0 to 4, 676-0 to 4
[Binarizing]
700, 701, 702
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 232
05/05
[Error diffusion / Dither]
502, 509
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/450
Classification
Drive
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Main motor]
421, 422
[Exit motor]
424, 425
Paper
feeding
[Aligning amount]
448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2,
452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3,
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2,
471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2
[Paper pushing amount]
466-0 to 7, 467
Laser
[Laser power]
286
[Polygonal motor]
401, 405
[Write starting]
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445,
498-0 to 1
[Sideways deviation]
497-0 to 5
[Auto-toner]
200, 201
Developer
High-voltage
transformer
[Main charger bias]
210
[Developer bias]
205
[Transfer bias]
221
[Separation bias]
231
Fuser
Fan
RADF
[Auto-toner]
414, 455, 840
[Black band]
419
[Transfer bias]
491, 492, 493, 868, 869
[Main charger bias]
826, 864, 865, 866, 867
[Transfer timing]
841
[Developer bias]
859, 860, 861, 862, 863
[Status counter]
400
[Temperature]
409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 438, 855
[Pre-running]
417, 420, 439, 440, 441, 526, 856
[Separation fan]
469
[Middle fan]
472
[Switchback]
462
[Aligning amount]
354, 355
[Sensors/EEPROM]
356, 367, 368
[Transporting]
357, 358, 365, 366
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[paper dimension]
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 245, 471
[Paper feeding]
254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988
[Retry]
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
[Paper size]
216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 256
[Blank copying prevention]
625
[Polygonal motor]
398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,
488, 489, 490
[Power correction]
872, 873, 875, 876, 877
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 233
05/05
2
Classification
Finisher
e-STUDIO350/450
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Folding / Binding position]
468-0 to 2
[Tray reset]
648
[Cascade]
652, 653
Network
[NIC]
1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1120
[IP address]
1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010
[IPX]
1011, 1099
[Frame type]
1012
[NCP]
1013
[Apple Talk]
1014, 1015
[LDAP]
1016, 1138, 1139, 1486
[DNS]
1017, 1018, 1019
[DDNS]
1020
[SLP]
1021
[NetBios]
1023
[WINS]
1024, 1025
[Bindery]
1026
[NDS]
1027
[Directory]
1028, 1029
[HTTP]
1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035
[SMTP]
1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100,
1101, 1102, 1111
[Offramp]
1043, 1044, 1045
[POP3]
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052
[FTP]
1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058,
1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090,
1091, 1092, 1107, 1108, 1109, 1110
[MIB]
1063
[Community]
1065, 1066
[TRAP]
1067, 1068, 1069, 1070
[Raw/TCP]
945, 1073, 1074
[LPD]
1075, 1076, 1077
[IPP]
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 234
05/05
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[Novell]
1093, 1094
[SerchRoot]
1095
[Print queue]
1096
[ASCII code]
977
[Rendezvous]
1103
[Link local host name]
1104
[Service name]
1105
[Host name]
1112
[Internet FAX]
1114, 1485
[SMB]
1117, 1136
[Samba]
1137
[Workgroup name]
1124
[Private print]
1432
[Function]
1433, 1434
[Scan to E-mail]
1484
[From Address]
1487, 1488, 1489
[E-mail domain]
1491
Counter
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[External counter]
202, 381, 683, 975
[Counter copy]
257
[Paper size]
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,
308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Large/Small size]
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,
335-0 to 2
[Double count]
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353
[Paper source]
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374
[HDD]
390, 391, 392, 393
[Department management]
629
[Fuser unit]
1372
[Toner cartridge]
1376
[Media type]
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412
[Toner cartridge driver counts]
1410
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 235
05/05
2
Classification
e-STUDIO350/450
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Version
[System firmware]
900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926,
927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935,
936, 937, 938, 939, 944
[Engine firmware]
903, 905, 907, 908
[FAX]
915
[NIC]
916
Maintenance
[PM counter]
251, 252
[Telephone]
250
[Error history]
253
[FSMS]
258, 999
[Service notification]
702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717,
718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769,
770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777,
778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785,
786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 796, 1145
[HTTP]
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[Supply order]
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759,
760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765, 794, 795
[Firmware download]
797
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 236
05/05
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/450
Classification
Others
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Equipment number]
976
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Destination]
201, 701
[Line]
203
[Private printing]
259
[Local I/F]
614
[Memory]
615
[Partition]
662, 666, 667
[Clear]
665, 669, 693
[Trial period]
673, 695, 798, 799
[Banner]
678, 679, 680
[Database]
684, 685, 686
[HDD]
670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426
[Control panel]
692
[Scrambler board]
696, 698, 699
[Equipment number]
995
[Message button]
681
[Initialization]
947
[Mode setting]
948, 949
[Template]
1140
[NVRAM]
1427
[SRAM]
1428
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 237
05/05
2
2.2.11
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) /
Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/452)
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
[Date/Time]
200, 638, 640
[Timer]
204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen]
207, 602, 1132
[File]
209, 219, 264, 288
[Language]
220, 221
[Administrator]
263
[Scanning]
265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing]
267, 270, 950, 976, 985
[HDD]
271
[E-mail]
272, 1097, 1098
[default setting]
276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331,
480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
986, 1135
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 973, 978, 979, 1856, 1857
[Copy volume]
300
[Original counter]
302
[Custom Mode]
508
[Energy saving]
601
[AMS]
605
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Book duplexing]
611
[Summer time]
612
[Paper size]
613
[Department management]
620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 238
05/12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO352/452
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
Scanner
[Sorting]
627, 634, 641, 649
[Original direction]
628
[Image shift]
636, 1429, 1430
[Edit copying]
645, 646
[Box printing]
953, 954
[X in 1]
650
[Annotation]
651, 657
[Automatic transfer]
660, 661
[Indicator]
671
[Priority drawer]
689
[Media type]
697
[Offsetting between jobs]
682
[Job build]
1130, 1131
[Display of REVERSE ORDER]
213
[Displaying number of original pages]
342
[Toner is nearly empty]
972
[Paper size setting (drawers)]
1478
[Selectable security level]
1708
[Keyboard layout]
1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935
[Position]
305, 306
[Distortion]
308
[Reproduction ratio]
340
[Carriage position]
359
[Shading position]
350, 351
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 239
05/11
2
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Image
[Margin]
430, 431, 432, 433, 434 -0 to 1, 435, 436,
437, 438
[Image density]
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509,
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719,
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862,
931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938,
939, 940, 941, 942
[Range correction]
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,
695, 825, 826, 827, 830, 831, 832, 835,
836, 837, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918,
919, 920, 921
[Gamma slope]
593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945
[Gamma balance]
596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2,
599-0 to 2
[Sharpness]
620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2,
867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924
[Smudged/Faint text]
648, 654, 655, 928
[Printer density]
672-0 to 4, 676-0 to 4
[Binarizing]
700, 701, 702
Drive
[Main motor]
421, 422
[Exit motor]
424, 425
Paper
feeding
[Aligning amount]
448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2,
452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3,
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2,
471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2
[Paper pushing amount]
466-0 to 7, 467
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 240
05/11
[Error diffusion / Dither]
502, 509
[Default setting of sharpness]
1479
[paper dimension]
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 245, 471
[Paper feeding]
254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988
[Retry]
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
[Paper size]
216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 256
[Blank copying prevention]
625
[Incorrect paper size jam]
449
[Tab paper]
1437, 1438, 1439
[Detection method of 13"LG]
1492
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO352/452
Classification
Laser
Developer
High-voltage
transformer
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Laser power]
286
[Polygonal motor]
401, 405
[Write starting]
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445,
498-0 to 1
[Sideways deviation]
497-0 to 5
[Polygonal motor]
398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,
488, 489, 490
[Power correction]
872, 873, 875, 876, 877
[Auto-toner]
200, 201
[Auto-toner]
414, 455, 840
[Black band]
419
[Transfer bias]
491, 492, 493, 868, 869
[Main charger bias]
826, 864, 865, 866, 867
[Transfer timing]
841
[Developer bias]
859, 860, 861, 862, 863
[Main charger bias]
210
[Developer bias]
205
[Transfer bias]
221
[Separation bias]
231
Fuser
[Status counter]
400
[Temperature]
409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 438, 855
[Pre-running]
417, 420, 439, 440, 441, 526, 856
Fan
RADF
Finisher
2
[Separation fan]
469
[Middle fan]
472
[Aligning amount]
354, 355
[Transporting]
357, 358, 365, 366
[Switchback]
462
[Folding / Binding position]
468-0 to 2
[Tray reset]
648
[Cascade]
652, 653
[Interruption of stapling operation (no staple) ]
704-0 to 1
[Manual stapling]
1911
[Finisher model]
1912
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 241
05/11
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[NIC]
1002, 1003, 1119
[IP address]
1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010
[IPX]
1011, 1099
[Frame type]
1012
[NCP]
1013
[Apple Talk]
1014, 1015, 1854, 1855, 1936
[LDAP]
1016, 1138, 1139, 1486
[DNS]
1017, 1018, 1019
[DDNS]
1020
[NetBios]
1023
[WINS]
1024, 1025
[Bindery]
1026
[NDS]
1027
[Directory]
1028, 1029
[HTTP]
1030, 1031, 1032
[SMTP]
1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100,
1101, 1102, 1111
[Offramp]
1043, 1044, 1045
[POP3]
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052
[FTP]
1055, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061,
1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092
[MIB]
1063
[Community]
1065, 1066
[TRAP]
1067, 1068, 1069, 1070
[Raw/TCP]
945, 1073, 1074
[LPD]
1075, 1076, 1077, 1852, 1853
[IPP]
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447,
1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 1850, 1851
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 242
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Novell]
1093, 1094
[SerchRoot]
1095
[Print queue]
1096
[ASCII code]
977
[Rendezvous]
1103
[Link local host name]
1104
[Service name]
1105
[Host name]
1112
[Internet FAX]
1114, 1485
[SMB]
1117, 1136, 1950, 1951
[Samba]
1137, 1464
[Workgroup name]
1124
[Private print]
1432
[Function]
1433
[Scan to E-mail]
1484
[From Address]
1487, 1488, 1489
[E-mail domain]
1491
[User authentication]
1113, 1471, 1496, 1921, 1922, 1925, 1937,
1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1943
[PDC]
1121
[BDC]
1122
[NT domain]
1123
[Address book]
1125, 1476, 1477
[Netware]
1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148
[MAC address]
1141
[ACC]
1431
[Disable print save]
1435
[Disable fax save]
1436
[IP Confilct]
1440
[SNTP]
1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446
[Device authentication]
1470, 1920, 1952, 1953, 1958, 1959,
1942, 1944
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 243
05/11
2
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[IP Filter]
1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725,
1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731,
1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737,
1738, 1739
[SSL setting]
1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745,
1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751
[Enable server's IP]
1755, 1756, 1757, 1759, 1760, 1762, 1767
[Previous IP address]
1768
[Scan to File]
1779, 1784, 1786
[Notification of scan job]
1781-0 to 1
[Save as file and Email transmission]
1782, 1783, 1785
[Network scanning]
1915
[LDAP authentication]
1923, 1924
[Role Based Access]
1928
[STAGE]
1939, 1940
Wireless LAN
[Driver]
1660, 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665,
1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671,
1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677,
1678
[Supplicant
1679, 1680, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685,
1686, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692,
1693, 1696, 1697, 1699, 1700, 1701,
1702, 1703, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707,
1763, 1764, 1765, 1766
Bluetooth
[Bluetooth]
1709, 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715,
1716, 1717
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 244
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Counter
[External counter]
202, 381, 683, 975, 1126
[Counter copy]
257
[Paper size]
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,
308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Large/Small size]
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,
335-0 to 2
[Double count]
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353
[Paper source]
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374
[HDD]
390, 391, 392, 393
[Department management]
629
[Fuser unit]
1372
[Toner cartridge]
1376
[Media type]
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412
[Toner cartridge driver counts]
1410
[Number of output pages]
1530-0 to 4, 1531-0 to 1, 1535
Version
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[System firmware]
900, 911, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924,
925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933,
934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944
[Engine firmware]
903, 905, 907, 908
[FAX]
915
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 245
06/06
2
Classification
e-STUDIO352/452
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Maintenance
[PM counter]
251, 252
[Telephone]
250
[Error history]
253
[FSMS]
258, 999
[Service notification]
702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717,
718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769,
770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777,
778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785,
786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 796, 1145
[HTTP]
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[Supply order]
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759,
760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765, 794, 795
[Firmware download]
797
[Service call checking period]
1495
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 246
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO352/452
Classification
Others
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Equipment number]
976
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[Destination]
201, 701
[Line]
203
[Private printing]
259
[Local I/F]
614
[Memory]
615
[Partition]
662, 666, 667
[Clear]
665, 669, 693
[Trial period]
673, 695, 798, 799
[Banner]
678, 679, 680
[Database]
684, 685, 686
[HDD]
670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426
[Control panel]
692
[Scrambler board]
696, 698, 699
[Data overwrite kit]
633
[Equipment number]
995
[Message button]
681
[Initialization]
947
[Mode setting]
949
[Template]
1140
[NVRAM]
1427
[SRAM]
1428
[TAT partition]
1118
[Enhanced bold]
1149
[User data management]
1472, 1473, 1474, 1481, 1482, 1483
[Limitation check]
1494
[Inbound FAX]
1498
[FAX reception]
1926
[e-Filing Access Mode]
1497
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 247
05/11
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 248
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3.
ADJUSTMENT
3.1
Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
<Procedure> (Adjustment Mode (05-200))
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit into the equipment.
Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.
100%
[0] [5]
[POWER]
(3)
3
A
A3
200
A3
TEST MODE
Key in code [200] and press the [START] button.
The display changes as follows.
B
230%
[200]
[START]
TEST MODE
128
128
C
A
Notes:
• A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output.
• B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
• C indicates the latest adjustment value.
(4)
After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.
230%
200
TEST MODE
A3
WAIT
128
128
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3-1
04/05
(5)
After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.
B
240%
200
A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
158
128
A
(6)
Check if the value B is within the range of 235 to 245 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.35 V to 2.45 V).
(7) If the value B is not within the range of 235 to 245, press the Up or Down button to adjust the
value manually.
Note:
The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.
(8)
Button to be pressed
Value A
Value B
Up
Increased
Increased
Down
Decreased
Decreased
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.
The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
100%
A
A3
TEST MODE
(9) Turn the power OFF.
(10) Install the toner cartridge.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-2
3.2
3.2.1
Image Dimensional Adjustment
General description
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted
•
Paper alignment at the registration roller
•
Printer related
adjustment
•
Scanner related
adjustment
Code in mode 05
448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed)
401
(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position
411
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)
421
(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445
(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position
at duplexing
498
(a) Image distortion
3
-
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
405
(c) Image location of primary scanning direction
306
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
340
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction
305
(f) Top margin
430
(g) Right margin
432
(h) Bottom margin
433
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3-3
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05S), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).
<Operation keys>
A
100%
0
5
Varies with the code “XXX” keyed in
<Display>
A3
TEST MODE
POWER
1
Code No.
Digital keys : Enter codes.
XXX
100%
START
A3
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment
values.
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
YYY
Current adjustment
value
100%
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored
replacing values YYY.
or
INTERRUPT
If the test copy does not
satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
procedure.
Adjustment value newly entered
(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
A
A3
A
A3
A
A3
TEST MODE
100%
FAX : Test copy
ZZZ
Wait Warming Up
100%
COPYING
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-4
04/05
3.2.2
Paper alignment at the registration roller
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
PPP
upper
drawer
PPP
lower
drawer
LCF
ADU
Bypass
feed
64 - 80 g/m2
17 - 20 lb.
450 (*1)
452 (*1)
448 (*1)
449 (*1)
457
455 (*1)
458 (*1)
Thick
paper 1
81 - 105 g/m2
21 - 28 lb.
469 (*1)
470 (*1)
471 (*1)
472 (*1)
473
474 (*1)
460 (*1)
Thick
paper 2
106 - 163 g/m2
29 - 43 lb.
-
-
-
-
-
-
461 (*1)
Thick
paper 3
164 - 209 g/m2
44 - 55 lb.
-
-
-
-
-
-
462 (*2)
OHP
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
463 (*3)
Paper
type
Weight
Plain
paper
Sub-code
*1 0: Long size
1: Middle size
2: Short size
*2 0: Long size
1: Middle size
2: Short size
*3 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220 - 239 mm (8.7 - 12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of "Post card" is for Japan only.
3: Post card
<Procedure>
(1)
Perform the test print according to the following procedure.
(Not necessary for LCF)
[0][5]
[Power]
(Code)
[START]
(Sub-code)
[SET] or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores in memory
Enter new
value
Current value
displayed
[START]
[Drawer
selection]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
(*3) +[FAX]
(Test print)
(*4) 1: Single-sided grid pattern 3: Double-sided grid pattern
(2)
Check if any transfer void is occurring. If
there is a transfer problem, try the values in
descending order as “31” " “30” " “29”···
until the transfer void disappears. At the
same time, confirm if any paper jam occurs.
Also, when the aligning amount has been
increased, this may increase the scraping
noise caused by the paper and the Mylar
sheet as it is transported by the registration
roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to
decrease the value.
Transfer void
50
mm
-1
00
mm
Fig. 3-1
(3)
Perform the same procedure for all paper sources.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3-5
3
Note:
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration
section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge
position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while
confirming the leading edge position is not shifted.
* As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the aligning amount.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-6
3.2.3
Printer related adjustment
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Press [1] " [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in code [401]) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
" "100% A" is displayed.
" Press [1] " [FAX] " (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/
step)
[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Press [1] " [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [411]) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
" "100% A" is displayed
" Press [1] " [FAX] " (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
(6) After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [410]) " [START]
" (Key in the same value in the step 5 above)
" Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
(1)
(2)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3-7
04/09
3
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment mode)
Press [1] " [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the
grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in code [421]) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
" "100% A" is displayed
" Press [1] " [FAX] " (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/
step)
[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source.
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values.
Order for
adjustment
Paper source
Code
Paper size
Acceptable
value
1
Lower drawer
441
A3/LD
0 to 40
2
Upper drawer
440
A4/LT
0 to 15
3
PFP or LCF
444/443
A4/LT
0 to 15
4
Bypass feed
442
A4/LT
0 to 15
5
Duplexing
445
A3/LD
0 to 15
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remarks
Paper fed from the lower drawer
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) " [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code shown above with digital keys) " [START]
" (Key in an acceptable value shown above with digital keys)
" [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
" "100% A" is displayed
" Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)
" [FAX] " (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes. (approx. 0.4 mm/step)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3-8
05/05
[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[E-1]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
[E-2]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Adjustment for long-sized paper
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Press [3] " [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in code [498]) " [START] " [0] " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
" "100% A" is displayed.
" Press [3] " [FAX] " (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
Adjustment for short-sized paper
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Press [3] " [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper
drawer.)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3-9
3
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [498]) " [START] " [1] " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) )
" [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
" "100% A" is displayed
" Press [3] " [FAX] " (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
1
21
A
6
30
C
Feeding direction
10
6
D
2
B, E
[Grid pattern]
Fig. 3-2 Grid pattern
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 10
04/09
<Adjustment order>
[0] [5] [Power ON] " [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) " [FAX]
A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) " 200±0.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)
B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) " 52±0.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)
" Key in the same value for 05-410.
C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) " 200±0.5 mm (0.125 mm/step)
D: 05-441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
" 52±0.5 mm (0.4 mm/step)
E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) " 52±0.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)
Remark:
When the adjustment (05-421) is performed, the same adjustment for FAX (05-422) is automatically and consecutively performed.
3
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 11
04/09
3.2.4
Scanner related adjustment
[A] Image distortion
A
B
Feeding direction
Step 1
C
Feeding direction
D
Step 2
Fig. 3-3
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously,
turn the power ON.
Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on
a sheet of A3/LD paper.
Key in [308] and press the [START] button to
move the carriage to the adjustment position.
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)
Carriage-2
Fig. 3-4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 12
04/09
(4)
(5)
Make an adjustment in the order of step 1
and 2.
• Step 1
- In case of A
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CW).
- In case of B
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CCW).
• Step 2
- In case of C
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CW).
- In case of D
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)
• Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Product name: 1401E
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Adjustment screw
for the mirror-1 (Rear)
Carriage-1
3
Fig. 3-5
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 13
04/09
[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON " (Adjustment Mode)
Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
Check if the distance A is within the range of 260±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [405] with the digital keys) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance
A become (approx. 0.125 mm/step).
50
100
150
Copied image of the ruler
A
200
250
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-6
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 14
04/05
[C] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
Check if the distance B is within the range of 10±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [306] with the digital keys) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance B
becomes narrower (0.085 mm/step).
B
50
100
150
200
Copied image of the ruler
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-7
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 15
04/05
3
[D] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON " (Adjustment Mode)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
Measure the distance C from 210 mm to 410 mm (in case of A3) or from 220 mm to 420 mm (in
case of LD) of the copied image of the ruler.
Check if the distance C is within the range of 200±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [340] with the digital keys) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes. (0.045 mm/step)
Copied image of the ruler
C (LD)
200
200
250
250
300
350
300
350
400
400
C (A3)
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-8
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 16
04/05
[E] Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON " (Adjustment Mode)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 400% and lower drawer.
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
Check if the distance D is within the range of 34±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [305] with the digital keys) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (0.68 mm/
step).
Copied image of the ruler
10
20
30
40
D
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 17
04/05
3
[F] Top margin
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Open the platen cover or RADF.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 ± 0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [430]) " [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx.0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
E
Fig. 3-10
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 18
04/05
[G] Right margin
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Open platen cover or RADF.
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [432]) ? [START]
" (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory)
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
F
Fig. 3-11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 19
04/05
3
[H] Bottom margin
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. " (Adjustment Mode)
Open platen cover or RADF.
Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±0.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) " (Key in the code [433]) " [START]
" (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
" Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
" (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
G
Fig. 3-12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 20
04/05
3.3
Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
3.3.1
Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
503
(931)
501
(933)
504
(932)
Manual density mode center
value
The larger the value is, the darker the
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
505
(934)
506
(936)
507
(935)
Manual density mode light
step value
The larger the value is, the lighter the
light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
508
(937)
509
(939)
510
(938)
Manual density mode dark
step value
The larger the value is, the darker the
dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
514
(940)
512
(942)
515
(941)
Automatic density mode
The larger the value is, the darker the
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
* The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. ? The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
Let the equipment restarted and perform copying job.
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 21
3
3.3.2
Gamma slope adjustment
Gamma slope is adjustable with the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
*
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
593
(943)
594
(945)
595
(944)
Gamma slope adjustment
Remarks
One's place:
0: equivalent to the set value 5
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle.
(The larger the value is, the
larger the angle becomes.)
Ten's place:0: equivalent to the set
value 5
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle
of the low density area. (The
smaller the value is, the darker
the background becomes.)
The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
3.3.3
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
620
(922)
621
(924)
622
(923)
Sharpness adjustment
Remarks
Key in the following values depending
on the original mode.
One's place:
1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 5: TextTen’s
place:
0: Use Default value1 to 9:Change
intensity (The larger the value
is, the sharper the image
becomes.)
• Example of value entry in case
the mode is “Text/Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9
Note:
Note:
When the value “0” is keyed in
at the ten’s digit, the value is
not displayed on LCD screen.
*
The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 22
04/05
3.3.4
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to “varied” or
“fixed” in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
*
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
570
(913)
571
(915)
572
(914)
Range correction for original
manually set on the original
glass
693
(916)
694
(918)
695
(917)
Range correction for original
set on the RADF
Remarks
The following are the default values
set for each original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for:
One’s place: Automatic density mode
Ten’s place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied
The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
3.3.5
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
*
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
532
(919)
533
(921)
534
(920)
Background peak for range
correction
Remarks
When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the
image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 64)
The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 23
3
3.3.6
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
< e-STUDIO 350/450 >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
653
(928)
Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text
When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
< e-STUDIO 352/452 >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
648
(928)
*
Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text
When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 2)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
3.3.7
Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/452 >
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language and screen
Item to be adjusted
Smooth
(PS)
Detail
(PS)
Smooth
(PCL)
Detail
(PCL)
596-0
597-0
598-0
599-0
Low density
596-1
597-1
598-1
599-1
Medium density
596-2
597-2
598-2
599-2
High density
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
Remarks
The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 24
05/11
3.4
Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
3.4.1
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language
Remarks
PS
PCL
654
655
When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value
decreases, the faint text is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
3
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job.
If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
3.4.2
Adjustment of image density
The image density level is adjustable both at standard and toner saving modes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Toner mode
Standard
Toner saving
672-0 to 4
676-0 to 4
Item to be
adjusted
Adjustment of
image density
Remarks
When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and small number of
the setting value corresponding to the sub code.
Ex.)
When substituting the setting value for 672-0 with
A0, · · ·, 672-4 with A4: A0 A1 A2 A3 A4
2. Remember that the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the
default value.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job.
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 25
3.5
Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
3.5.1
Density adjustment
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment button.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
845
847
846
Manual density
mode center value
850
852
851
Manual density
The larger the value is, the lighter the light side
mode light step value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
855
857
856
Manual density
mode dark step
value
The larger the value is, the darker the dark side
becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
860
862
861
Automatic density
mode
The larger the value is, the darker the image
becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
The larger the value is, the darker the image
becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job.
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 26
3.5.2
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
865-0
867-0
866-0
Reproduction ratio:
25% to 40%
865-1
867-1
866-1
Reproduction ratio:
41% to 80%
865-2
867-2
866-2
Reproduction ratio:
81% to 400%
Remarks
Key in the following values depending on the
original mode.
One’s place:
1: Text/Photo
5: Photo
2: Text
Ten’s place:
0: Use Default value
1 to 9: Change intensity
• The larger the value is, the sharper the
image becomes.)
• Example of value entry in case the mode is
“Text/Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9
Note:
Note:
When the value “0” is keyed in at the
ten’s digit, the value is not displayed on
LCD screen.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job.
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 27
3
3.5.3
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to “varied” or
“fixed” in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
826
Range correction for
original manually set
on the original glass
831
Range correction for
original set on the
RADF
The following are the default values set for each
original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 12
Each digit stands for:
One’s place: Automatic density mode
Ten’s place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
825
827
830
832
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-26 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
3.5.4
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
835
837
836
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Background peak for
range correction
When the value increases, the background (low
density area) of the image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: text/photo: 48, photo: 40, text: 48)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of ! P. 3-26 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 28
3.6
Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer
When replacing the high-voltage transformer, checking each output adjustment of main charger, developer bias, transfer charger and separation charger is needed.
3.6.1
Adjustment
[ 1 ] Preparation
Developer Bias
Main Charger
Transfer Charger
Separation
Charger
Developer unit
Disconnect the
connector.
Take off from the equipment. (Not used)
Cleaner unit
Take off the drum
and install the
cleaner unit in the
equipment.
Install the unit together with the current measuring jig in the
equipment.
Note:
Note:
Connect the green cable of the current measuring jig to
ground on the equipment frame. Refer to (a) Installation
of current measuring jig.
Developer unit connector
of the equipment
Not connected
Connect the jig detection connector with the developer unit
connector of the equipment.
Digital
Tester
(+) terminal
Connect in the hole
at the front side of
the developer unit.
Connect to the
main charger case
(between the case
and terminal).
(–) terminal
Connect to the
machine frame (to
ground).
Connect with the white cable of the current measuring jig (to
ground).
3
Function switch
Full-scale
Remarks
Connect with the red cable of the current
measuring jig.
DC
1,000 V
AC
2V
Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 M. (RMS value) or higher.
How to turn ON the power Attach the door switch jig and press the front cover opening/closing switch while the
front cover is opened.
Remarks
Refer to (b) Connection for developer bias
adjustment.
Refer to (c) Connection for main
charger adjustment.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Refer to (d) Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 29
[ 1-1 ]
Installation of the current measuring jig
Notes:
• Clean the toner recovery auger when the toner is sticking to it. Then attach the jig.
• Do not damage the tip of the separation fingers.
(1)
Open the front cover.
Front cover
Fig. 3-13
(2)
Remove the toner bag.
Toner bag
Fig. 3-14
(3)
(4)
Pull up the hinge pin and extract it.
Take off the front cover.
Front cover
Hinge pin
Fig. 3-15
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 30
(5)
(6)
Release the latches and take off the toner
bag full detection sensor-2.
Loosen 2 screws and take off the cleaner
unit from the equipment.
Cleaner unit
Screw
Toner bag full
detection sensor-2
3
Fig. 3-16
(7)
Release the latch and take off the main
charger unit.
Main charger unit
Fig. 3-17
(8)
Release the latch and take off the cleaner
stay.
Clear stay
Fig. 3-18
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 31
(9)
Rotate the lever of the drum shaft and
release the lock. Then pull out the drum
shaft.
Drum shaft
lever
Drum shaft
Fig. 3-19
(10) Take off the drum.
Drum
Fig. 3-20
(11) Press down the drum cleaning blade and fix
the blade with the blade releasing jig so that
it will not rebound.
Note:
Do not touch the edge of the drum cleaning
blade.
Blade
releasing jig
Cleaning blade
Fig. 3-21
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 32
(12) Put through the current measuring jig into the
drum shaft and fix it to the cleaner unit.
(13) Rotate the lever of the drum shaft to fix the
drum shaft.
Drum shaft lever
Current
measuring jig
Drum shaft
3
Fig. 3-22
(14) Remove the blade releasing jig.
Blade
releasing jig
Fig. 3-23
(15) Install the cleaner stay.
Cleaner stay
Fig. 3-24
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 33
(16) Install the main charger unit.
Main charger unit
Fig. 3-25
(17) Install the cleaner unit and fix it with 2
screws.
(18) Install the toner bag full detection sensor-2.
Cleaner unit
Screw
Toner bag full
detection sensor-2
Fig. 3-26
(19) Fix the green cable of the current measuring
jig to the frame of the equipment, and connect the jig detection connector to the connector of the developer unit in the
equipment.
Connector of
developer unit
Screw
Jig detection
connector
Green cable
Fig. 3-27
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 34
(20) Fix the front door switch to be closed with the
door switch jig.
Door switch jig
3
Fig. 3-28
(21) After the adjustment, remove the jigs in a
reverse procedure to return it to the original
state.
[ 1-2 ]
(1)
Connection
Connection for developer bias adjustment
(+) terminal:
Connect in the hole at the front
side of the developer unit
Front cover
opening/closing switch
(–) terminal:
Connected to the machine frame
Fig. 3-29
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 35
(2)
Connection for main charger adjustment
Front cover
opening/closing switch
Ground to the machine
frame (green cable)
(–) terminal:
Connect the white cable of the current
measuring jig
(+) terminal:
Connect the main charger case
Fig. 3-30
(3)
Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment
Front cover
opening/closing switch
Ground to the machine
(green cable)
(+) terminal:
Connect the red cable of the current
measuring jig
(–) terminal:
Connect the white cable of the
current measuring jig
Fig. 3-31
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 36
[ 2 ] Operation
Note:
When adjusting output of high-voltage transformer, make sure to use a current measuring jig
(except developer bias).
Connect the digital testers as described in (1) Preparation, and follow the procedure on the next
page to adjust the output from the main charger, developer bias charger, transfer charger and
separation charger.
<Keys to press>
<Display>
A3
A
100%
TEST MODE
[0][5]
[POWER]
3
1
[Digital keys] : Enter the code.
100%
A3
XXX
Code No.
TEST MODE
[START]
YYY
Current set value
[UP] or [DOWN]: Adjust the value “YYY” to satisfy the following table.
Main
Developer Transfer charger
charger bias charger Center value
Code
210
205
221
Adjustment value -790±5V
-521±5V
413±45mV
Separation
Center value
231
Code
Adjustment value RMS value 1267±115mV
Mean value 1235±112mV
[SET] : Adjusted value “YYY” is stored in memory.
or
[INTERRUPT]
100%
A
A3
TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter
the other adjustment
code.
[POWER] : OFF/ON
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 37
3.6.2
Precautions
[A] Developer bias
Note for adjustment
Adjust the developer bias if fogging occurs over the entire image even though the main charger grid
voltage and toner density are appropriate. However, the following may occur if the developer bias is
lowered too much:
• Image contrast becomes low.
• Image is patchy or blurred.
• The carrier in the developer material adheres to the photoconductive drum, causing scratches
around the cleaner.
[B] Transfer
Items to check before adjustment
Blotched image or poor transfer can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
transfer output. Check the following items before adjusting the transfer charger. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the transfer charger.
• Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty? Is the transfer guide deformed?
• Is the developer unit properly installed? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low?
• Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
• Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
• Is the output of the transfer guide bias normal?
• Is the separation output different from the set value?
• Is the developer bias value an appropriate one?
• Are the transfer/separation charger case and the drum shaft grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded?
• Is the transfer insulation film (transparent film attached to the transfer guide) damaged or deformed?
Note for adjustment
When blotched image appear:
• If blotched image appear in halftone areas, lower the transfer output value. Remember that transfer
performance becomes low if the transfer output value is lowered too much.
When transfer is poor:
Increase the transfer output value under the following conditions. Remember that blotched image
appear if the transfer output value is increased too much.
• Transfer is poor even though the charger wire is not dirty.
• Thick paper has been frequently used.
Note:
The Thick Paper Mode is recommendable when thick paper is used.
Increase the transfer output value only to prevent a poor transfer without selecting the Thick
Paper Mode when thick paper is frequently used.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 38
[C] Separation
Items to check before adjustment
Poor paper separation from the drum can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
the separation output. Check the following items before making an adjustment. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the separation charger.
• Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty?
• Is the developer unit installed properly? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low?
• Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
• Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
• Is the output of the main charger normal?
• Is the transfer output different from the set value?
• Is the transfer/separation charger case grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded?
• Is the sub-separation fan rotating?
• Is the separation finger in contact with the drum surface?
Note for adjustment
When poor paper separation occurs:
Increase the separation output value under the following conditions. Remember that if the separation
output value is increased too much, blotched image occurs and separation performance becomes low.
• Poor separation occurs even though the charger wire is not dirty.
• Thin paper has been frequently used.
When poor transfer occurs:
• Decrease the separation output value when poor transfer occurs. Remember that the separation
performance becomes low if the separation output value is decreased too much.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 39
3
3.7
Adjustment of the Scanner Section
3.7.1
Carriages
[A] Installing carriage wires
When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:
[Front side]
Carriage wire
Carriage-2
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1
Tension spring
Hook
Wire pulley
Fig. 3-32
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1
Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-33
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 40
[B] Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions
(1)
(2)
Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.
Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Pulley bracket
Carriage-2
[Rear]
[Front]
Exit side frame
3
A
B
Enlarged view of carriage
Fig. 3-34
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 41
(3)
Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Rear]
[Front]
Exit side frame
Bracket
Bracket
C
D
Enlarged view of carriage
Fig. 3-35
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 42
[A] Assembling carriage wires
Winding the wire around the wire pulley:
(1)
Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
• 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
• 4 turns toward the boss side
Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire.
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
4 turns
4 turns
2 turns
2 turns
Ball terminal
Ball terminal
No space between turns
Hook
Hook
Color: Silver
Color: Black
[Front]
[Rear]
Fig. 3-36
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 43
3
(3) After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.
Notes:
1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.
Fig. 3-37
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 44
3.7.2
Lens unit
[A] Replacing the lens unit
• The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the
field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole
unit.
• When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 10 screws indicated with the arrows.
3
Fig. 3-38
•
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-39
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 45
[B] Adjustment of the magnification ratio of the lens
Notes:
1. Perform this adjustment only when the lens unit is taken off or replaced.
2. Make sure that the primary scanning reproduction ratio (printer section) is correct before this
adjustment.
(1)
Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LTsized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
(2)
Compare the copied ruler with the actual
ruler.
Feeding Direction
Copied ruler
Actual ruler
Fig. 3-40
(3)
If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
Take off the original glass and lens cover.
Loosen 2 screws fixing the lens unit.
Screw
Lens unit
Fig. 3-41
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 46
(3)
Slide the lens unit to the right or left direction using the marks on the lens base as a guide. (Slide
right when the copied ruler is magnified and slide left when the copied ruler is demagnified.)
The following table shows how the reproduction ratio difference between the copied ruler and
actual ruler corresponds to the movement amount of the lens unit.
Reproduction-ratio error
Movement amount of unit
0.1%
0.5 mm
0.2%
0.9 mm
0.3%
1.4 mm
0.4%
1.8 mm
0.5%
2.3 mm
0.6%
2.7 mm
0.7%
3.2 mm
0.8%
3.6 mm
0.9%
4.1 mm
1.0%
4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig. 3-42
Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the “Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer)”
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
(4)
(5)
(6)
Tighten 2 screws fixing the lens unit.
Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.
Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 47
3
3.8
3.8.1
Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System
Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding
<Procedure>
•
The center of the printed image shifts to the
front side. " Move the guide to the front side
(Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure).
•
The center of the printed image shifts to the
rear side. " Move the guide to the rear side
(Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Center
Center
[Front]
[Front]
Fig. 3-44
Fig. 3-43
•
Bypass feeding
•
(A)
Drawer feeding
(B)
(B)
(A)
Fig. 3-46
Fig. 3-45
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 48
05/07
3.9
Adjustment of Developer Unit
3.9.1
Doctor-to-sleeve gap
Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig
(1)
(2)
Take out the developer unit from the equipment.
Take off the developer material cover and
discharge the developer material.
Developer
material cover
3
Fig. 3-47
(3)
Remove 2 screws and take off the developer
sleeve cover.
Screw
Developer sleeve
cover
Screw
Fig. 3-48
(4)
Loosen 4 screws fixing the doctor blade.
Doctor blade
Developer
sleeve
Screw
Fig. 3-49
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 49
(5)
Lift up the toner scattering prevention sheet
and insert the gauge “0.45” of the doctorsleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade. Tighten the
screws while pressing the doctor blade to the
doctor-sleeve jig lightly.
Note:
Make sure the mark on the developer sleeve
faces the blade when adjusting the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Developer
sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-50
(6)
Insert the gauge “0.40” of the doctor-sleeve
jig into the gap between the developer
sleeve and doctor blade. Confirm that the jig
moves smoothly to the front and rear side,
and the gauge “0.50” cannot be inserted into
the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Developer
sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-51
(7)
Confirm that the both ends of the toner scattering prevention sheet are inserted between
Doctor blade
support holder
the developer sleeve and doctor blade support holder, and the side seals are attached
Side seal
on the toner scattering prevention sheet.
Toner scattering
prevention sheet
Fig. 3-52
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 50
(8)
Attach the developer sleeve cover and
tighten 2 screws.
Notes:
1. Tighten the screws from the one on the
front side.
2. Make sure that the developer sleeve
cover is correctly attached otherwise it will
be deformed.
3. Make sure that the toner scattering prevention sheet is not caught up in the
developer sleeve cover.
Developer
sleeve cover
Screw
Screw
3
Fig. 3-53
(9)
Attach the developer material cover.
Developer
material cover
Fig. 3-54
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 51
3.10 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015)
3.10.1
Adjustment of RADF position
It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Remove the platen sheet during adjustment.
(1)
Open the RADF and then attach 2 positioning pins to the equipment.
(The positioning pins have been attached at
the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)
Positioning
pin
Fig. 3-55
(2)
Close the RADF to check that the positioning
pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.
If they do not, adjust them according to the
following procedure.
Fig. 3-56
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 52
(3)
Loosen the stepped screw 1 turn and 2
screws on the adjustment plate a half turn
(status of temporary fixing).
Half turn
1 turn
3
Fig. 3-57
(4)
Remove the stepped screw at the rear of
right-hand hinge.
Fig. 3-58
(5)
Open the RADF, and then loosen 2 hand
screws 1 turn (status of tentative fixing).
Screw
Fig. 3-59
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 53
(6)
Remove the positioning pin at the front side.
Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into
the hole at the rear side of the RADF. While
peering inside from the front side, fit the positions of the pin and hole by moving the
RADF right and left.
Fig. 3-60
(7)
Tighten the positioning pin at the front side.
Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into
the hole at the front side of the RADF. (For
the front side, adjust the RADF position all
around.)
Fig. 3-61
(8)
While peering inside from the left side, close
the RADF. Check the positions of the holes
of the RADF and pins and then fit their positions by moving the RADF back and forth.
(For the front side, also adjust the RADF
position right and left.) Make sure not to dislocate the positions of the pin and hole at the
rear side.
Fig. 3-62
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 54
(9)
Open the RADF to tighten 2 hand screws.
Close the RADF and then check again that
the positioning pins fit smoothly into the
holes on the RADF.
3
Fig. 3-63
(10) Fit the hinge hole into the hole of the equipment at the rear right of the RADF to tighten
the stepped screw. If they do not fit, adjust
the position of the hole by turning the screw
of the adjustment plate.
Fig. 3-64
(11) Tighten the stepped screw and 2 screws on
the adjustment plate. Open and close the
RADF to check again that the positioning
pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.
Remove the positioning pins after checking
it. (Replace the positioning pins at the rear of
the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)
Screw
Stepped Screw
Fig. 3-65
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 55
(12) Place the platen sheet on the original glass
with the semi round cutout toward you.
Align the platen sheet against the left and
rear side of the original glass. Close the
RADF slowly. Open the RADF to check that
the platen sheet is correctly attached.
Fig. 3-66
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 56
3.10.2
Adjustment of RADF height
It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Perform the following adjustment by using the screw of the left and right hinge.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after “3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position”.
Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check. (Test Mode: 03-267)
(1)
Adjustment standard
Adjust the height so that the platen guide front holder touches the ADF original glass.
Adjust the height so that the gap between the platen guide rear holder and the ADF original glass
becomes 0.5 mm ± 0.3.
3
Platen guide
front holder
0mm
0.5mm±0.3
Platen guide
rear holder
ADF original glass
Fig. 3-67
(2)
Adjust the height by turning the height
adjusting screw on the left hinge.
Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes
high.
Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge
becomes low.
Fig. 3-68
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 57
(3)
Adjust the height by turning the height
adjusting screw on the right hinge.
Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes
high.
Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge
becomes low.
Fig. 3-69
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 58
3.10.3
Adjustment of skew
When an image skew occurs, adjust it according to the following steps, Step 1 " Step 2 " Step 3.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly.
Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted.
(1)
Step 1
Case A: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side “-” of the original
(Chap. 3.10.5).
Case B: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side “+” of the original
(Chap. 3.10.5).
A
B
White arrow: feeding direction
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-70
(2)
Step 2
Case C: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn
the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
Case D: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn
the adjustment screw clockwise.
Note:
When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the
hinge position ±0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.
Fixing screw
C
D
Adjustment screw
Paper
Hand screw
Original
RADF
Front side
Fig. 3-71
Fig. 3-72
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 59
04/05
3
(3)
Step 3
Case E: ................Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side “-” of the original (Chap. 3.10.6).
Case F: ................Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side “+” of the original (Chap. 3.10.6).
E
F
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-73
3.10.4
Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM
When any of the PC board, original length sensor, read sensor, reverse sensor is replaced with a new
one, make sure to perform the initialization of EEPROM and adjustment of sensors in the Adjustment
Mode (05).
Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF.
Also, make sure to adjust the tray volume when the initialization of EEPROM and automatic sensor
adjustment have been performed.
Refer to ! P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)" for the details.
Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not initialized and the sensors are not
adjusted after the above mentioned parts were replaced.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 60
3.10.5
Adjustment of aligning
Adjust the aligning according to Step 1 of 3.10.3.
3
Rear side "+" of the original +
- Rear side "-" of the original
Skew of paper
Fig. 3-74
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 61
3.10.6
Adjustment of aligning at reversing
Adjust the aligning according to Step 3 of 3.10.3.
+
- paper
of
w
Ske
Fig. 3-75
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 62
3.10.7
Adjustment of reverse solenoid
When operating the reverse solenoid, adjust it if the position of the flapper lever is out of the followingdimension.
Gap between A of the front frame and the flapper lever “C”: 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm
<Procedure>
(1)
Remove the screw on the left and take off the
plate spring.
Plate spring
3
Fig. 3-76
(2)
Align B of the front frame with the edge of the
reverse solenoid, and temporarily fix the
reverse solenoid with the screw on the right.
B
Fig. 3-77
(3)
While the plunger of the reverse solenoid is
put in the position to be turned ON (by pressing it in the direction of an arrow), loosen the
screw on the right to adjust the reverse solenoid so that the gap (C) between A of the
front frame and the flapper lever is 0.5 mm to
2.0 mm.
C
A
Fig. 3-78
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 63
(4)
Fix the plate spring temporarily with the
screw on the left. Then press the plate spring
slightly in the direction of an arrow and
tighten the screw in the position where the
gap (D) between the plunger and the flapper
lever is eliminated.
Plunger
D
D
Flapper lever
Fig. 3-79
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 64
3.10.8
Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch
A
Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40-45 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).
Glass surface
3
Center
Fig. 3-80
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 65
3.10.9
Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor
A
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 30-35 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-81
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 66
3.10.10 Adjustment of tray volume
Adjust in the adjustment mode (05).
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously,
turn the power ON.
Narrow the original guide to the limit.
Input the code "367".
Press the [START] button.
3
Fig. 3-82
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Extend the original guide to the limit.
Input the code "368".
Press the [START] button.
Turn the power OFF.
Fig. 3-83
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 67
3.11 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)
3.11.1
Adjustment of RADF Position
Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position.
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1)
Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins
(the positioning pins are installed to the back
side of the hinge which is on the left side of
the RADF).
Fig. 3-84
(2)
Remove the platen sheet.
Fig. 3-85
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 68
05/11
(3)
Close the RADF and check if the positioning
pins fit the holes on the RADF.
3
Fig. 3-86
[B] Adjustment
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.
(1)
Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the
rear side.
Fig. 3-87
(2)
Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at the rear
side.
Fig. 3-88
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 69
05/11
(3)
Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
Fig. 3-89
(4)
Position the pins with the holes on the RADF
by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes
when the RADF is closed.
Fig. 3-90
(5)
Tighten the left-hand hinge screw at the rear
side.
Fig. 3-91
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 70
05/11
(6)
Loosen the hole position adjustment screws
on the right hand side.
3
Fig. 3-92
(7)
Match the screw hole positions.
Fig. 3-93
(8)
Install the right-hand hinge screw at the rear
side.
Fig. 3-94
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 71
05/11
(9)
Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
Fig. 3-95
(10) Place the platen sheet on the original glass
and align it to the top left corner.
Close the RADF gently and open it to check
if the platen sheet is attached properly.
Fig. 3-96
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 72
05/11
3.11.2
Adjustment of RADF Height
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1)
(2)
(3)
Close the RADF.
Light the exposure lamp.
• Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [3] simultaneously.
• Key in [267] and then press the [START] button. The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given
length of time.
Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the original glass
"B" from the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the
adjustment according to the following procedure.
A
A
B
B
0 mm
0.2-0.5 mm
[Tolerance of the gap]
Rear side: 0 - 0.5 mm
Front side: 0 mm
Fig. 3-97
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 73
05/11
3
[B] Adjustment
(1)
(2)
Close the RADF.
Adjust it by turning the adjustment screws on the hinges.
• Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwise ................. Heightened
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Lowered
Fig. 3-98
•
Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened
Fig. 3-99
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 74
05/11
3.11.3
Adjustment of Skew
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
3
Fig. 3-100 Chart (Original)
Simplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Duplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 75
05/11
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1)
Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-101
(2)
If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".
C
D
Fig. 3-102
Fig. 3-103
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 76
05/11
Duplex copying:
(1)
Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
3
Fig. 3-104
(2)
If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "", and if "D", shift it to "+".
C
D
Fig. 3-105
Fig. 3-106
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 77
05/11
3.11.4
Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Simplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
Duplex copying:
(1)
(2)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
E
F
Fig. 3-107 Chart (Original)
Fig. 3-108 Copy
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1)
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
•
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
(3)
Press the [ENTER] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 78
05/11
Duplex copying:
(1)
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
•
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
(3)
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
3.11.5
Adjustment of Horizontal Position
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
Press the [START] button.
Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
[B] Adjustment
(1)
(2)
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
G
Fig. 3-109
•
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 79
05/11
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
H
Fig. 3-110
(3)
Press the [ENTER] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 80
05/11
3.11.6
Adjustment of Copy Ratio
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
Press the [START] button.
Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.
[B] Adjustment
(1)
(2)
3
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig. 3-111
(3)
Press the [ENTER] button.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 81
05/11
3.11.7
Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor
A
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height “A” becomes 100 mm or
less (within the empty weight falling limit).
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-113
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 82
05/11
3.12 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)
3.12.1
(1)
(2)
Adjusting the jogging plate width
Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
Adjust the front jogging plate to the home position.
• Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-114.
• Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board.
- The front jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
8
Fig. 3-114
(3)
Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home position.
• Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-115.
• Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board.
- The rear jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 3-115
Rear jogging plate home position
Fig. 3-116
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 83
(4)
(5)
(6)
Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm).
Remove the processing tray.
Loosen the screw on the home position sensor plate at the front.
Screw
Home position
sensor plate
Fig. 3-117
(7)
Adjust the position of the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) with reference to the
index.
EX. 1
If the width is 319 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is +2 mm, it requires relocation
of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm.
EX. 2If the width is 316 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is -1 mm; it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm.
Sensor
A
B
Fig. 3-118
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 84
3.12.2
(1)
Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate
Without removing the processing tray unit, loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jogging
plate.
Screw
Rear jogging plate
3
Fig. 3-119
(2)
Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging plate. (At
this time, adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jogging plate so that it is
0 mm to 0.5 mm.)
0 mm to 0.5 mm
Paper
Screw
Butted
(3)
Rear jogging
plate
With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the
same manner.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 85
3.12.3
Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag
If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjustment.
(1)
(2)
Remove the processing tray unit.
Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Jogging plate
adjusting plate
Screw
Screw
Adjusting plate
Jogging plate Adjusting plate
adjusting plate
Fig. 3-120
(3)
Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front/rear jogging rack plate and the
sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm.
Sensor flag
Sensor
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig. 3-121
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 86
3.12.4
(1)
(2)
Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt
Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach the grip unit.
Screw
Grip unit
Screw
3
Fig. 3-122
(3)
Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate. (The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension
by the tension spring.)
Screw
Tension arm plate
Fig. 3-123
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 87
(4)
Move the returning roller shaft to its lower limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then, tighten
the screw on the tension arm plate.
Screw
Tension arm
plate
Returning
roller shaft
Fig. 3-124
(5)
Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly.
Returning
roller shaft
Fig. 3-125
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 88
3.12.5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate
Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board.
Remove the stack tray.
Remove the stack tray drive unit.
Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate
(front, rear). Then remove the fixing screw. (Perform the same for the front and the rear.)
3
Screw
Stack tray guide lever
fixing plate
Fig. 3-126
Note:
When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.
Stack tray
guide lever
Fig. 3-127
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 89
3.12.6
(1)
Adjustment of the upper tray angle
Remove the front cover.
Fig. 3-128
(2)
Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.
Fig. 3-129
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 90
(3)
The tension becomes loose.
While pushing the bracket down, hold the tray and move it up or down, to adjust the angle so that
the tray becomes parallel by a visual check.
3
Fig. 3-130
(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing screw of the bracket.
Note:
If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped
tooth.
Fig. 3-131
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 91
3.12.7
DIP switch functions
You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board
appropriately.
Initiating Operations
1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation.
2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink).
3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on during operation).
Setting
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Front jogging
plate motor
When not at the
home position
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
The front jogging plate
moves to its home position
and stops.
When at the
The front jogging plate
home position
moves over a specific position and stops at the home
position.
When not at the The rear jogging plate
home position
moves to the home position and stops.
When at the
The rear jogging plate
home position
moves over a specific distance and stops.
The upper stack tray moves up and stops
when the upper stack tray upper limit sensor
turns ON.
To stop
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
The upper stack tray moves down and stops
when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor
turns ON.
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Lower stack tray
motor (up)
The lower stack tray moves up and stops
when the lower stack tray upper limit sensor is
turned ON.
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Lower stack tray
motor (down)
The lower stack tray moves down and stops
when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor is
turned ON.
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Stapler motor
The stapler motor stops after the stapling
operation.
•
Press the stapler
safety switch (S14).
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
8
•
8
Shipping position operation
2
•
•
Upper stack tray
motor (down)
8
ON
1
The returning roller moves to the home position and stops.
8
ON
1
Stack processing motor
(returning roller)
8
ON
1
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Upper stack tray
motor (up)
ON
1
•
8
ON
1
The stack delivery lever moves to its home
position and stops.
Rear jogging
plate motor
ON
1
Stack processing motor (stack
delivery lever)
8
ON
1
Operation
The delivery roller rotates in a specific speed.
8
ON
1
Item
Delivery motor
The upper and lower stack trays move to the
shipping position and stop.
•
8
Note:
Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 92
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)
3.13.1
Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position
must be changed for some reason.
(1)
(2)
Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.
Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to the paper used for adjustment.
ON
ON
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
A4 paper
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LT paper
Fig. 3-132
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Turn ON the power.
Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
• When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stopper.
Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against
the paper.
• When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward.
• When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward.
When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once to store the adjustment in memory.
Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104.
Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 93
3.13.2
Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position
must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when
the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type.
(1)
(2)
Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.
Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.
ON
1
ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
A4/front stitch
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8
A4-R/rear stitch
ON
ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
LT/front stitch
3
4
5
6
LT/rear stitch
ON
1
4
ON
A4-R/front stitch
1
3
A4/rear stitch
ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
LT-R/front stitch
2
3
4
5
6
LT-R/rear stitch
Fig. 3-133
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Turn ON the power.
Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
• When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the
rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment
plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and
repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment.
Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled
paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once again.
Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is
needed, proceed to the step 9).
Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position.
• When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side.
• When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.
Repeat the steps 5) to 7).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 94
04/11
(9)
After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the
alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the
rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value
is stored in memory.)
• The staple position adjustment is completed.
(10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board.
(11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
3
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 95
3.13.3
Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper positioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position).
If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the
settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you
must change the folding position.
(1)
(2)
Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine.
If the optional puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.
Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller
PC board as follows:
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 3-134
(3)
Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).
(4)
Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-135
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Turn ON the power.
Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate.
(Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.)
Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of
the sheets push against the paper positioning plate.
Close the inlet cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 96
(9)
Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
• The saddle stitcher unit will “stitch” the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.
(10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform
“positive width adjustment” or “negative width adjustment” to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
• If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform “positive width adjustment.”
• If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform “negative width adjustment.”
Positive Width Adjustment
Negative Width Adjustment
Mark
Mark
3
L
Stitching position
Folding position
L
Folding position
Stitching position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm".
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.
• If the width adjustment is 0
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
• If for “positive width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.
• If for “negative width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting
in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
Bit 6
DIPSW1 bit settings
Bit 7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Bit 8
Setting
(in units of 0.5 mm)
ON
ON
+3
ON
OFF
+2
OFF
ON
+1
OFF
OFF
0
ON
OFF
ON
-1
ON
ON
OFF
-2
ON
ON
ON
-3
Do not use the following setting
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
ON
OFF
OFF
(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 97
3.13.4
Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.
Code
Paper size
468-0
A4-R / LT-R
468-1
B4
468-2
A3 / LD
Remarks
When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page. (0.25mm/step)
Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".
A: When the upper side of the folding is longer
than the lower side
B: When the upper side of the folding is shorter
than the lower side
Paper feeding direction
Paper feeding direction
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 98
3.13.5
Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)
Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photosensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit).
(1)
(2)
Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1
2
3
4
Fig. 3-136
3
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power.
Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
• Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinksalternately.
Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
Turn OFF the power.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 99
3.13.6
Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit)
This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that
the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed
when the punch driver PC board has been replaced.
(1)
(2)
Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1
2
3
4
Fig. 3-137
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Turn ON the power.
Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
• Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alternately.
Number of punch holes
LED601/LED602
2 hole (E)
Blinks 1 times per cycle
2/3 hole (N)
Blinks 2 times per cycle
4 hole (F)
Blinks 3 times per cycle
4 hole (S)
Blinks 4 times per cycle
Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.
• Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
Turn OFF the power.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 100
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101)
3.14.1
Adjusting the Alignment Position
Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the alignment position must
be changed for some reason.
(1)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2)
Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
3
SW1
Fig. 3-138
(3)
Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Adjusting for
A4 size paper
Adjusting for
LT size paper
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Fig. 3-139
(4)
Turn ON the power of the equipment.
The alignment plate moves to the A4 or LT size position and stops.
(It stops at the position of -3 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 101
06/01
(5)
Press the [Button1] to adjust the alignment position.
Every time the [Button1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 1 step (0.419 mm/step) toward the
“+ “direction. (The gap between the alignment plates becomes narrower.)
Adjustment range is from -3 to +3 steps.
If the [Button1] is pressed when the alignment position is at the “+3 step”, the plate will return to
the home position and then moves to the position of “-3 step”.
LED3
LED2
LED1
Button1
Button2
Fig. 3-140
(6)
When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory.
When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment value.
Number of Blinking
Adjustment Value
1
-3
2
-2
3
-1
4
0-
5
+1
6
+2
7
+3
(7)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(8)
Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(9)
Install the board access cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 102
06/01
3.14.2
Adjusting the Stapling Position
Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the stapling position must be
changed for some reason.
(1)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2)
Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
3
SW1
Fig. 3-141
(3)
Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Adjusting for
A4 size paper
Adjusting for
LT size paper
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Fig. 3-142
(4)
Turn ON the power of the equipment.
The alignment plate moves to the rear side stapling position and stops. (It stops at the position of
-20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 103
06/01
(5)
Press [Button 1] to adjust the stapling position.
Every time [Button 1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 4 steps (0.45 mm) toward the "+"
direction. (It moves toward the rear side.)
Adjustment range is from -20 to +20 steps. If [Button 1] is pressed when the alignment position is
at the “+20 steps”, the plate will return to the home position and then moves to the position of “20 steps”.
Note:
Stapling for checking the position can be done by pressing [Button 2] with sheets placed on the
finishing tray. (stapled on the rear side)
LED3
LED2
LED1
Button1
Button2
Fig. 3-143
(6)
When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray.
When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment
value.
Number of blinking
Adjustment value
1
-20
2
-16
3
-12
4
-8
5
-4
6
0
7
+4
8
+8
9
+12
10
+16
11
+20
(7)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(8)
Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(9)
Install the board access cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 104
06/01
3.14.3
Stopping Position Adjustment (Puncher unit)
This adjustment can change the position where paper transport stops during the punching operation.
Perform this adjustment when you adjust the punching position on the paper in the transporting direction.
(1)
Turn the power of the equipment OFF.
(2)
Take off the board access cover of the Finisher. Then set SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control
PC board as shown below.
3
SW1
ON
1
2
3
4
Fig. 3-144
(3)
Turn the power of the equipment ON. The finisher enters into the stopping position adjustment
mode.
(4)
LED1 on the finisher control panel blinks. The number of times it blinks indicates the current
adjustment value.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 105
06/01
(5)
Press Button1 on the finisher control panel to change the adjustment value. The number of times
LED1 blinks changes in ascending order (e.g. 1, 2, 3… 11) each time you press Button1
.
Number of LED1’s
blinking
Adjustment value*
Distance moved
1
-5
1.10 mm
2
-4
0.88 mm
3
-3
0.66 mm
4
-2
0.44 mm
5
-1
0.22 mm
6
0
0 mm (Reference position)
7
+1
0.22 mm
8
+2
0.44 mm
9
+3
0.66 mm
10
+4
0.88 mm
11
+5
1.10 mm
Note:
When the adjustment value goes further in minus numbers in the table above, the distance
between the paper edge and the holes becomes wider. When it goes further in plus numbers,
this distance becomes narrower.
Fig. 3-145
(6)
When the value change is completed, press Button2 on the finisher control panel to determine
the adjustment value. (The adjustment value is written into the flash ROM.)
(7)
Turn the power of the equipment OFF.
(8)
Turn all the bits of SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control PC board OFF.
(9)
Install the board access cover of the Finisher.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 106
06/01
3.15 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)
To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the equipment.
Key copy counter
MU-8
Counter socket
MU-10
3
<Installation procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
Remove the right upper cover.
Open the bypass tray, ADU, jam access
cover and fuser unit cover. Take off the IH
terminal cover.
Remove the right rear cover, and cut open
the window for the key copy counter.
Right upper cover
IH terminal
cover
Right rear cover
Fig. 3-146
(4)
Pull out the harness connector from the hole
of the machine frame, and cut the short harness of the connector. (Treat the cut harness
properly to avoid it causing a short circuit
with the machine frame.) Then, disconnect
the dummy connector.
Dummy connector
Harness
connector
Fig. 3-147
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 107
04/09
(5)
(6)
(7)
Connect the connector of the counter socket
to the harness connector of the equipment
side.
Install the counter socket to the machine
frame with two M3 screws.
Counter socket
Reattach the cover.
Harness connector
Screw
Fig. 3-148
(8)
Insert the key copy counter with its arrow
mark pointing the rear side of the equipment.
Key copy counter
Fig. 3-149
(9)
Enter the value “3” in the setting mode (08-202).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 108
3.16 Adjustment of Dogleg
Dogleg is the name given to an image which is deformed approx. 44 mm of the trailing edge of the output paper.
Since adjustment has usually been performed when the equipment was manufactured, dogleg image
should not occur. However, if the following dogleg image A or B does happen to occur, the following
adjustment must be performed. An original with a line parallel to the feeding direction is used for the
adjustment.
Normal Image
Feeding
Direction
Fig. 3-150
Dogleg Image A
Dogleg Image B
Feeding
Direction
Feeding
Direction
Approx. 44 mm of
the trailing edge
Approx. 44 mm of
the trailing edge
Fig. 3-151
Fig. 3-152
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 109
04/10
<Preparation>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Take off the front cover, right upper cover
and the paper exit tray.
Remove the upper drawer, and then open
the bypass tray and the ADU.
Take off the right front cover.
Open the jam access cover.
Fig. 3-153
<Adjustment procedure>
(1)
(2)
Check the scale position. (See Fig. 3-154.)
Loosen 2 screws so that the fuser unit and its
lower stay can move.
(3) • For dogleg image A
Move the lower stay of the fuser unit upward
from the position in Step 1 by 0.5 on the
scale, and then tighten the screws.
• For dogleg image B
Move the lower stay of the fuser unit downward from the position in Step 1 by 0.5 on the
scale, and then tighten the screws.
Note:
Be sure to match the height of both right and
left scales.
Fig. 3-155
For dogleg image A:
Move the stay upward
by 0.5 on the scale.
For dogleg image B:
Move the stay downward
by 0.5 on the scale.
Scale
Fig. 3-154
(4)
Check the copy image and repeat Step 1 to 3
if further adjustment is needed..
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 110
04/10
4.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4.1
PM Support Mode
4.1.1
General description
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever printed after
they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of
users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not
only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.
This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part
(the number of output pages, drive counts) and replacement record and to do a counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing.
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).
4.1.2
Operational flow and operational screen
4
[ 1 ] Operational flow
PM support mode activated
[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[RETURN] pressed
[2]
[1]
[START]
Auto-toner automatic
adjustment performed
(
Chapter 3.1)
Adjustment
finished
[START]
Main unit chosen
[SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen
Main unit list displayed
[RETURN]
pressed
[CANCEL] pressed
Main unit chosen
[RESET]
Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed
Clear finished
Clear screen
Counter clear
confirmation displayed
[CANCEL]
pressed
Sub unit chosen
[RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE]
pressed
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 4-1
*
The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4-1
[ 2 ] Operational screen
1) Main screen
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 4-2
1
Displaying of the main unit name
2
4
Back to the PM support mode activation screen
Clearing of the chosen unit counters (all the sub unit (parts) counters belonging to that unit)
All counters are cleared when the unit is not selected
Moving to the sub screen
5
Moving to the next/previous page
6
Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the present number of output pages counts (x1,000)
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), “_” is displayed and “CHECK SUBUNIT” is displayed at the top
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages counts has
exceeded its PM standard number.
Displaying of the number of output pages counts (Cpy.), driving counts (Cnt.) and previous
replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit.
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed
3
7
8
9
10
Notes:
1. “—” is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.
2. The paper source differs depending on the structure of options, however, “0.0k” is displayed
in “OUTPUT PAGES (k)” and its standard number of output pages is displayed in “PM OUTPUT PAGES (k)” even for the installed paper source.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-2
2) Sub screen
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 4-3
4
1
Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name
2
Back to the main screen
3
Clearing of the chosen sub unit (parts) counters
4
Displaying of the present number of output pages counts (x1,000)
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages counts has
exceeded its PM standard number.
5
Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit
(parts)
6
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
7
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
8
Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date
for a chosen sub unit
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4-3
3) Clear screen
1
Fig. 4-4
1
When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages counts” and
Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-4
[ 3 ] Access tree
Note:
The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen.
Main screen
Sub-screen
Drum/cleaner unit
[CLEANER/DRUM]
Drum [DRUM]
Drum cleaning blade [DRUM CLEANING BLADE]
Main charger grid [GRID]
Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE]
Separation finger for drum [SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)]
Developer unit
[DEVELOPER]
Developer [DEVELOPER]
Transfer /separation charger unit
[TRANS./SEP.CHARGER]
Transfer charger wire [TRANSFER CHARGER WIRE]
Separation charger wire [SEPARATION CHARGER WIRE]
Filter
[FILTER]
Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]
Fuser unit
[FUSER]
Fuser roller [FUSER ROLLER]
Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER]
Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER]
Separation finger for fuser roller [SEPARATION FINGER (FUSER)]
Upper drawer
[1st CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
Lower drawer
[2nd CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Bypass unit
[SFB]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (SFB)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (SFB)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (SFB)]
RADF
[RADF]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (RADF)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (RADF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (RADF)]
LCF
[LCF]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (LCF)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (LCF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (LCF)]
PFP upper drawer
[3rd CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
PFP lower drawer
[4th CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4-5
4
4.1.3
Work flow of parts replacement
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever made after
they were replaced before. However, its drive counts time is also to be considered when replacing the
parts.
Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part may still
be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the part may
need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replacement with its
driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed roller is
heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of output pages and the drive counts.
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
• The parts in RADF
• The parts in feeding system
• The parts in the drum/cleaner unit
• The parts in the fuser unit
• The parts in the developer unit
• The parts in the transfer/separation charger unit
Check the drive counts at PM
support mode.
Does it exceed the specified
drive counts?
Replace the part.
Yes
Replace the part.
No
The part is still usable.
Replace the part after the drive
counts has reached the specified
count.
Fig. 4-5
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.
Does it exceed the specified drive count?
Yes
Replace the part.
No
Check the part and equipment according to the “TROUBLESHOOTING”.
Fig. 4-6
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-6
4.2
(1)
General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance
Performed Every 120,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352)
and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452))
Preparation
• Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
• Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
• See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2 :
[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[2] Æ [START]
9S-103 :
[9]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[103]
[START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST
11-10-'03 09:30
UNIT
OUTPUT PAGES
DRUM
DRUM BLADE
GRID
MAIN CHARGER WIRE
SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)
81813
81813
81813
81813
81813
PM OUTPUT PAGE
DRIVE COUNTS
PM DRIVE COUNTS
150000
150000
150000
150000
150000
119758
119758
119758
119758
119758
220000
220000
220000
220000
220000
Fig. 4-7
•
Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2)
Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3)
Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4-7
05/11
4
4.3
Operational Items in Overhauling
Overhaul each equipment with the following timing.
e-STUDIO350/352:
When the number of output pages has reached 360,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier)
e-STUDIO450/452:
When the number of output pages has reached 450,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Replace all the supplies.
Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with
new ones if they are damaged.
Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.
Replace them with new ones if necessary.
Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if necessary.
Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4-8
05/11
4.4
Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output
Pages (e-STUDIO350/352) and 75,000 Output Pages
(e-STUDIO450/452)
Clean inside the machine as needed following the checklist.
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4-9
05/11
4.5
Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Symbols used in the checklist
Cleaning
A: Clean with alcohol
D: Clean with a well
squeezed cloth
O: Clean with soft pad,
cloth or vacuum
cleaner
Lubrication
L:
SI:
W1:
W2:
W3:
AV:
CG:
Replacement
Operation check
Data
The number of
sheets conCoating
sumed before
replacement
Silicon oil
(Value x 1,000)
White grease
R: Replace if
(Molykote X5-6020)
deformed or
White grease
damaged
(Molykote HP-300)
White grease
(Molykote EM-30L)
Alvania No.2
FL Floil
(GE-334C)
Conductive grease
(KS-660)
O: After cleaning
or replacement, confirm
there is no
problem.
User Name
Launa 40
Sirial No.
Inspector's name
Remarks
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]
Notes:
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in every 120,000 output pages for the e-STUDIO350/352,
and every 150,000 output pages for the e-STUDIO450/452. Lubricate the replacement parts
following to the replacement cycle.
2. Values under “Replacement” indicate the replacement cycle for the e-STUDIO350/eSTUDIO450 or e-STUDIO352/e-STUDIO452.
3. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed
from each paper source.
4. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
A. Scanner
Items to check
A1
Original glass
A2
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
O or A
*a1
ADF original glass
O
*a1
A3
Mirror-1
O
A4
Mirror-2
O
A5
Mirror-3
O
A6
Reflector
O
A7
Lens
O
A8
Exposure lamp
A9
Automatic original
detection sensor
A10 Slide sheet
(front and rear)
R
O
O
O
O or A
R
B. Laser unit
Items to check
B1
Slit glass
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
O
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 10
06/01
C. Feed unit
Items to check
Cleaning
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Lubrication
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
C1
Pickup roller
80/80
P14-I20
C2
Feed roller
80/80
P14-I24
C3
Separation roller
80/80
P14-I15
C4
Transport roller
A
C5
Paper guide
O
C6
Drive gear
(tooth face and shaft)
W1
C7
GCB bushing bearing
L
C8
One side of the plastic
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
W1
C9
Registration roller
AV, W2
Remarks
*c1
R
*c2
A
R
4
D. Automatic duplexing unit
Items to check
D1
Transport roller (upper,
middle and lower)
D2
One side of the GCB
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
D3
One side of the plastic
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
D4
Paper guide
Cleaning
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Lubrication
A
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
R
L
W1
O
E. Bypass feed unit
Items to check
E1
Pickup roller
E2
Feed roller
E3
Separation roller
E4
Bypass tray
E5
Drive gear (shaft)
E6
GCB bushing bearing
E7
Transport roller
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
AV, W2
Operation
check
80/80
P18-I26
80/80
P18-I37
80/80
P17-I1
*e1
O
W1
L
A
R
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 11
F. Main charger
Items to check
F1
Main charger case
F2
Main charger wire
F3
Contact point of terminals
F4
Charger wire cleaning
pad
F5
Main charger grid
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
D
Remarks
*f1
120/150
R
O
P23-I10
*f1
O
R
120/150
R
P23-I15
G. Transfer / Separation charger
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
D
Remarks
G1
Charger case
*g1
G2
Transfer charger wire
120/150
R
O
P24-I6
*g1
G3
Separation charger
wire
120/150
R
O
P24-I6
*g1
G4
Pre-transfer guide
O or A
G5
Post-transfer guide
O or A
G6
Separation supporter
O
G7
Terminal cover
O
G8
Contact point of terminals
O
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
R
H. Drum/Cleaner related section
Items to check
Cleaning
H1
Photoconductive drum
H2
Drum shaft
O
H3
Whole cleaner unit
O
H4
Drum cleaning blade
H5
Separation finger for
drum
H6
Recovery blade
O
H7
Discharge LED
O
H8
Ozone filter
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
CG
120/150
P103-I1
Refer to
Chapter
4.9.2
P25-I4
Refer to
Chapter
4.9.2
120/150
P25-I4
*h1
120/150
R
P25-I13
*h2
CG
R
120/150
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
*h3
P11-I16
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 12
04/05
I. Toner bag
Items to check
I1
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Toner bag
Operation
check
19.3/19.3
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
P103-I6
J. Developer unit
Items to check
Cleaning
J1
Whole developer unit
J2
Developer material
J3
Front shield
J4
Oil seal (5pcs.)
J5
Guide roller
J6
Toner cartridge drive
gear shaft
J7
Side shield
O
J8
Developer unit lower
stay
O
J9
Inside of the toner cartridge stay
O
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
P103-I2
*j1
P103-I33
*j2
O
120/150
O
R
AV
360/450
O or A
R
W1
4
K. Fuser unit
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
K1
Fuser roller
120/150
P103-I2
K2
Pressure roller
120/150
P103-I2
K3
Separation finger for
fuser roller
120/150
P103-I2
K4
Separation finger for
pressure roller
R
K5
Cleaning roller
K6
One side of the cleaning roller to which the
shaft is inserted
K7
Thermistor (2pcs.)
A
K8
Fuser unit entrance
guide
A
K9
Exit / reverse guide
A
K10 Exit roller
K11 Drive gear
120/150
Remarks
*k1
*k1
P103-I2
SI
R
A
*k2
R
SI
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 13
04/05
L. RADF (MR-3015)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
L1
Pickup roller
O
120
P8-I26
L2
Feed roller
O
120
P8-I25
L3
Separation roller
O
120
P6-I6
L4
Original length sensor
O
L5
Registration roller
A
L6
1st small roller
A
L7
2nd small roller
A
L8
Read sensor
O
L9
Read guide
O
L10 Read roller
A
L11 3rd small roller
A
L12 4th small roller
A
L13 Reverse sensor
O
L14 Exit roller
A
L15 Reverse roller
A
L16 Platen sheet
Remarks
O or A
M. PFP (KD-1011)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
M1
Pickup roller
(upper/lower)
80/80
P5-I29
M2
Feed roller
(upper/lower)
80/80
P5-I26
M3
Separation roller
(upper/lower)
80/80
P5-I12
*m1
M4
Drive gear (tooth face)
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
AV, W2
W1
N. LCF (KD-1012)
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Items to check
Cleaning
N1
Pickup roller
A
160/160
P4-I30
N2
Feed roller
A
160/160
P4-I28
N3
Separation roller
A
160/160
P5-I12
N4
Drive gear
W1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 14
06/01
O. Job Separator (MJ-5004)
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
O1
Idling roller
O or A
W1
O2
Other rollers
O or A
O3
Paper guide
O or A
O4
JSP stack sensor
(Lower)
O
O
O5
JSP stack sensor
(Upper)
O
O
O6
JSP paper jam sensor
O
O
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*o1
P. Offset Tray (MJ-5005)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
W1, FL
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
P1
OCT separator roller
O or A
P2
Other rollers
O or A
P3
Paper guide
O or A
P4
OCT stuck sensor
O
O
P5
OCT home position
sensor
O
O
P6
OCT feed sensor
O
O
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*p1
Q. Drive system
Items to check
Q1
Main motor drive
unit gear
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000 sheets)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
W1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 15
04/01
4
R. RADF (MR-3018)
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Items to check
Cleaning
R1
Pickup roller
A
120
5-1
R2
Separation roller
A
120
4-10
R3
Feed roller
A
120
5-1
R4
Registration roller
A
R5
Intermediate transfer
roller
A
R6
Front read roller
A
R7
Platen roller
A
R8
Rear read roller
A
R9
Reverse registration
roller
A
R10
Exit/reverse roller
A
R11
Platen sheet
or A
Remarks
S. Finisher (MJ-1101)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
(x1,000)
Operation
check
Parts list
Remarks
(P-I)
S1
Stack transport roller-1
A
S2
Stack transport roller-2
A
S3
Buffer roller
A
S4
Exit roller
A
S5
Entrance roller
A
S6
Transport roller
A
S7
Paddle
S8
Paper holder cam
W3
*s1
S9
Buffer tray shaf
W3
*s2
S10
Stapler carrier shaft
W3
*s3
S11
Rack & pinion gear
(Aligning plate)
W3
*s4
S12
Movable tray drive gear
W3
*s5
S13
Buffer tray guide
W3
*s6
S14
Finishing tray shaft
W3
*s7
1,000
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 16
06/01
A2
A4
A5
A8 A6
A3
A1
A9
A10
K10 K3
K9
K4
K2 K5,K6 H6
D1
K8
G5
H5
G6
G1
K7 K1
F2,F4
F1
A7
F5 H7
H4
H3
H1
H8
D1
G3
G2
G4
J5
C9
C9
B1
J2
I1
D1
C1
J1
C2
C3
4
E4
E1
E2
E3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J4
Fig. 4-8 Front side
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 17
04/05
Q1
Fig. 4-9 Rear side
L5
L4
L2
L3
L10 L11 L12
L13
L14
L1
L6
L8
L7
L9
L15
L16
Fig. 4-10 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 18
04/05
M1
M2
M3
M2
M3
M1
4
Fig. 4-11 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
N1
N2
N3
Fig. 4-12 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 19
04/05
O2
O5
O6
O3
O1
O2
O4
Fig. 4-13 Job Separator (JSP)
P4
P1
P3
P2
P6
P5
Fig. 4-14 Offset Tray (OCT)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 20
04/05
R5
R6
R9
R7
R3
R4
R8
R2
R10
R1
R11
Fig. 4-15 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF: MR-3018)
[Front side]
[Rear side]
4
S3
S8
S9
S4
S14
S12
S2
S5
S6
S11
S7
S13
S1
S10
Fig. 4-16 Finisher (MJ-1101)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 21
06/01
Remarks “*” in the Preventive Maintenance Check List
* a1.
Original glass / ADF original glass
Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original glass.
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
*
c1, m1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP)
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply grease on the
inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig. 4-18
Fig. 4-17
*
c2.
Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying Molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
Molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 22
04/05
*
e1.
Separation roller (SFB)
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply grease on the
inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig. 4-19
*
f1.
Fig. 4-20
Main charger case/Main charger wire
Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly,
and then wipe them with a dry cloth.
Note:
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 363 mm).
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not twist the wire.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
*
g1.
Transfer / separation charger case and transfer / separation wire
Clean the transfer / separation charger case and wires with a cloth soaked in water and
squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth.
Notes:
1. Do not deform the metal plate of the pre-transfer guide.
2. Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 353 mm)
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not twist the wire.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
*
h1.
Drum cleaning blade
Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as
the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are
printed due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages if which have
been made.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 23
04/05
4
*
h2.
Separation fingers for drum
The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the separation finger is damaged or deformed. If
there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of
output pages which have been made.
If any mark which was made by the finger appears on the printed image, clean the tip of
the finger.
Notes:
1. Wipe the tip of the finger lightly with a dry cloth trying not to deform it.
Do not leave the lint on the tip.
2. Apply patting powder to the tip of the fingers and drum surface after replacing or cleaning
them to reduce the load on the drum surface by the finger.
*
h3.
Recovery blade
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade
get damaged.
*
j1.
Developer material
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment.
(! P. 3-1 "3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor")
*
j2.
Oil seal (Developer unit)
Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2)
Developer sleeve (Rear side shaft)
4 pcs.
1 pc.
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvanian No.2).
(1)
(2)
(3)
Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or
outside of the nozzle mixer.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)
Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
• Amount: About two small drops
Wipe off any grease the exudes from the
inside.
Developer frame
(Nozzle mixer)
Outside
Inside
Grease
Oil seal
Fig. 4-21
*
k1.
Separation fingers for fuser roller and pressure roller
The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is
any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output
pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning.
The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly.
Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 24
04/05
*
k2.
Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is
replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a
new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
*
o1.
Idling roller
Apply one-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to each part A in the figure below.
A
4
Fig. 4-22
*
p1.
OCT separator roller
Apply one-rice-grain-amount of FLOIL (GE-334C) to the part A in the figure below. Also
apply three-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to each part B.
B
B
A
Fig. 4-23
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 25
04/05
*s1.Paper holder cam
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) all around the paper holder cam.
Paper holder cam
Fig. 4-24
*s2.Buffer tray shaft
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray shaft.
Buffer tray shaft
Fig. 4-25
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 26
06/01
*s3.Stapler carrier shaft
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire stapler carrier shaft.
Stapler carrier shaft
4
Fig. 4-26
*s4.Rack gear, pinion gear (Aligning plate)
*s5.Finishing tray shaft
1) Take off the metal shield plate.
* If the hole punch unit is installed, take it off beforehand.
2) Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the metal shield plate has been
removed.
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the rack and pinion gears which drive the aligning plate, and the entire finishing tray shaft.
Finishing tray shaft
Rack gear
Pinion gear
Fig. 4-27
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 27
06/01
*s6.Movable tray drive gear
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the gear-A and
gear-B.
Gear B
Gear A
Fig. 4-28
*s7.Buffer tray guide
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray guide (inside
of the folded section of the plate).
Buffer tray guide
Fig. 4-29
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 28
06/01
4.6
PM KIT
KIT name
DEV-KIT-3520
FU-KIT-3520
FU-KIT-3520T
ROL-KIT-16CST
ROL-KIT-1010
DF-KIT-3015
Component
Part name
Qty.
Drum cleaning blade
BL-3520D
1
Separation finger for drum
SCRAPER-DRUM
3
Main charger grid
GRID-220
1
Main charger wire
WIRE-CH-363
1
Transfer charger wire
WEX-CH-060*353
1
Separation charger wire
WEX-CH-060*353
1
Ozone filter
FILTER-OZ-SPB-700B
1
Developer material
D-3500
1
Fuser roller
HR-3520-U
1
Pressure roller
HR-3520-L
1
Separation finger for fuser roller
SCRAPER-H/R
6
Cleaning roller
SHAFT-CLAN-P/R
1
Fuser roller
HR-3520-U-TWD
1
Pressure roller
HR-3520-L
1
Separation finger for fuser roller
SCRAPER-H/R
6
Cleaning roller
SHAFT-CLAN-P/R
1
Leaf spring
SPG-L-GND-TWD
1
Pickup roller
ROLLER-PICK-AT
1
Feed roller
K-ROLL-FEED
1
Separation roller
K-ROLL-PST
1
Pickup roller
ROLL-PICK-UP
1
Feed roller
ROLL-PAPER-FED-F
1
Separation roller
ROLL-PAPER-FED-S
1
Pickup roller
ROLL-PICK-UP
1
Feed roller
ROLL-FEED
1
Separation roller
ROL-SPT-513
1
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 29
05/05
4
4.7
Jig List
Item
Parts list
Page
Item
Door switch jig
101
1
Brush
101
4
Downloading jig (DLM board)
102
1
Wire holder jig
101
9
Current measuring jig
101
5
Jig detection connector
101
2
Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs)
102
7
Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs)
102
2
ROM writer adapter (For 1881)
102
3
ROM writer adapter (For 1931)
102
4
Doctor-sleeve jig
101
5
Blade releasing jig
101
3
Developer material nozzle
101
8
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 30
04/01
4.8
Grease List
Parts list
Grease name
Part name
Volume
Container
Page
Item
SI Silicon oil
ASM-SILICONE-1M
100cc
Bottle
101
10
L Launa 40
OIL-LAUNA40-100
100cc
Oiler
101
11
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)
ASM-PG-HP300-S
100g
Bottle
101
12A
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)
GREASE-HP300-S
10g
Bottle
101
12B
ASM-PG-ALV2
100g
Tube
101
13
MOLYKOTE-100
100g
Tube
101
14
ASM-PG-GE334C-S
20g
Bottle
101
15
GRS-KS660
30g
Tube
101
16
AV Alvania No.2
W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020)
FL Floil (GE-334C)
CG Conductive grease (KS-660)
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 31
4.9
4.9.1
Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies
Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies
1) Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2) Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3) Drum cleaning blade
This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Fuser roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5) Cleaning roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
They should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.
6) Paper
Avoid storing paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 32
4.9.2
Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum
1) Use of gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photoconductive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the print image. So, do not touch the drum surface with bare hands.
2) Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. Also, apply conductive grease (KS660) to the circumference of the drum shaft and the entire inner surface of the flange on the drum
rear side, referring to the figures below. When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum
counter (the Setting Mode 08-1150-0,3,6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero).
This clearing can be performed in the PM Support Mode.
10mm
4
7mm
Apply it to the circumference
of this area
Apply it to the entire inner surface
Fig. 4-31
Fig. 4-30
Notes:
1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning
blade. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be
damaged.
2. When paper fibers or dint adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
3. When the cleaner unit has been assembled, wipe off the grease adhered on the head of the
drum shaft with a piece of cloth.
3) Installation of the equipment and storage of drum
Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the light drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light
such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the equipment.
4) Cleaning the drum
At preventive maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated
cleaning cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum
surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before
starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an
adverse effect on the drum.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 33
5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface
If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no print image will
be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a
new drum will be necessary.
6) Collecting used photoconductive drums
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the
relevant local regulations or rules.
4.9.3
Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade
1) Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.9.4
Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller
(1)
Handling precautions
• Fuser roller
- Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the fuser roller.
- Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the fuser roller, or it may be
damaged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.
• Pressure roller
- Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.
(2)
Checking
• Check for stain and damage on the fuser and pressure rollers, and clean if necessary.
• Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
• Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.
• Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
• Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
• Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller.
• Check the fuser roller for proper rotation.
(3)
Cleaning procedure
When fuser roller and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe
the surface clean with a piece of suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the roller white they
are still warm.
Note:
Be careful not to rub the fuser roller and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser roller and pressure roller.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 34
4.9.5
Checking and replacing the cleaning roller
(1)
Handling precautions
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the cleaning rollers.
(2)
Poor cleaning and corrective treatment
Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the pressure
roller surface. When its surface is stained with toner, check the cleaning roller. If toner is heavily
adhered on the cleaning roller, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the cleaning
roller should be replaced with new ones.
The cleaning roller is gradually worn out due to the heat and toner stain.
Replace it when a specified number of output pages have been made.
4
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 35
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 36
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING
When any of the PC boards or the HDD requires replacement, refer to ! P. 5-130 "5.3 Replacement of
PC Boards and HDD"
5.1
5.1.1
Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code
Paper transport jam
[E010] Leading edge of paper not reaching the exit sensor
[E020] Trailing edge of paper not passing the exit sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-108/158)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration clutch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1
04/09
5
[E030] Paper remaining inside the equipment at power-ON
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is blinking on the control panel. Is there any
paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table.)
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: refer to the following table.)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers (If a jam is occurring in
the ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area
Cover
Jam access cover
Exit area
Jam access cover
ADU
ADU
Sensor
Registration sensor
Test mode / Input check
03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
Upper drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E]
Exit sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B]
ADU entrance sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H]
ADU exit sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G]
Bypass unit
Bypass unit
Bypass feed sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F]
Feeding area
(Main unit)
Side cover
Lower drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
LCF
LCF side cover
LCF feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
PFP
PFP side cover
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
Bridge unit
Bridge unit
Bridge unit transport sensor-1
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
Bridge unit transport sensor-2
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E]
JSP
JSP cover
JSP feed sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
OCT
OCT cover
OCT feed sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
[E061] Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer (e-STUDIO352/452)
[E062] Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer (e-STUDIO352/452)
[E063] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer (e-STUDIO352/452)
[E064] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer (e-STUDIO352/452)
[E065] Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray (e-STUDIO352/452)
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the
drawer setting and the one in the drawer.
*
Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened
or closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-2
06/06
[E090] Paper jam by HDD abnormality
1) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
2) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited.
4) Replace the HDD.
5) Replace the SYS board.
[E200] Paper fed from the upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E210] Paper fed from the lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E300] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E330] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E3C0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the registration sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Are the transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches (high/low speed) are dis|
|
connected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the transport clutches (high/low speed).
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-3
5
[E220] Paper fed from the lower drawer not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
[E310] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
[E340] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
[E3D0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Are the transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches (high/low speed) are dis|
|
connected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the transport clutches (high/low speed).
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-4
[E320] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor
[E350] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor
[E3E0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor
Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Are the transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches (high/low speed) are dis|
|
connected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the transport clutches (high/low speed).
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-225)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the PFP transport clutch.
|
7)
Replace
the
PFP board.
"
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-5
5
[E360] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the
PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the
PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-225)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-6
[E510] ADU stack jam (paper not reaching the ADU entrance sensor)
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the ADU entrance sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the ADU entrance sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-121/171)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit motor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-110/160)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the ADU motor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are
worn out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-7
04/05
5
[E520] ADU transport jam (paper not reaching the ADU exit sensor)
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the ADU exit sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the ADU exit sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5-8
[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is blinking on the control panel. Is there any
paper on the transport path?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: refer to the following table)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the
ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Cover
Sensor
Test mode / Input check
Registration area
Jam access cover
Registration sensor
Upper drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E]
Exit area
Jam access cover
Exit sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B]
ADU
ADU
ADU entrance sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H]
ADU exit sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G]
Bypass unit
Bypass unit
Bypass feed sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F]
Feeding area
(Main unit)
Side cover
Lower drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
LCF
LCF side cover
LCF feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
PFP
PFP side cover
Bridge unit
JSP
Bridge unit
JSP cover
03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
Bridge unit transport sensor-1
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
Bridge unit transport sensor-2
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E]
JSP feed sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
OCT
OCT cover
OCT feed sensor
Finisher
Finisher door
Sensors in the finisher
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-9
5
[E950] Jam not reaching the JSP feed sensor
[E951] Stop jam at the JSP feed sensor
Open the JSP cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the JSP feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the JSP feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the JSP board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the JSP feed sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the
JSP board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
1) Replace the JSP board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[E960] Jam not reaching the OCT feed sensor
[E961] Stop jam at the OTC feed sensor
Open the OTC cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the OTC feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the OTC feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the OTC board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the OTC board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the OTC feed sensor.
|
7) Replace the OTC board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
1) Replace the OTC board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 10
[EB50] Paper left on the transport path due to multiple feeding
In case the paper is fed from the upper drawer, bypass unit or ADU:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
When the paper is fed from the upper drawer:
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[6]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the bypass feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
When the paper is fed from the ADU:
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the ADU exit sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the ADU board.
|
8)
Replace
the
LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 11
5
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
In case the paper is fed from the lower drawer, PFP or LCF:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E], /[7]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the upper/lower drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the upper/lower drawer feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
"
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 12
[EB60] Paper left on the transport path due to multiple feeding
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
|
YES # Remove the paper.
"
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 13
5.1.2
Paper misfeeding
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode:03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 14
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the bypass feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-204)
Is the bypass feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor
|
|
are disconnected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor.
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the bypass transport, feed separation and pickup rollers. Replace them if they are worn
out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 15
5
[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the upper drawer feed clutch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 16
[E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-202)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lower drawer feed clutch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
worn out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 17
5
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-226)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN247 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 18
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-228)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN248 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 19
5
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the LCF feed sensor.
|
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-209)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the LCF feed clutch.
|
7)
Replace
the
LCF board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn
out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 20
5.1.3
Cover open jam
[E400] Jam access cover opened during printing
Is the jam access cover open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[C])
NO # 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN301 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Replace the LGC board.
[E410] Front cover opened during printing
Is the front cover open?
" YES # Close the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[C])
NO # 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN301 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the front cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[D])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN317 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the front cover opening/closing switch. Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
Replace the LGC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 21
5
[E420] PFP side cover opened during printing
Is the PFP side cover open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is dis|
|
connected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
1) Replace the PFP board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[E430] ADU opened during printing
Is the ADU open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the ADU.
NO
Is the ADU opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN217 on the ADU board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the ADU opening/closing switch.
|
7) Replace the ADU board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Replace the ADU board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 22
[E440] Side cover opened during printing
Is the side cover open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the side door switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/
[G])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short circuited or
|
open circuited.
|
5) Replace the side door switch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Replace the LGC board.
[E450] LCF side cover opened during printing
Is the LCF side cover open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check in the test
mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is dis|
|
connected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN106 on the LCF board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the
LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
|
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
1) Replace the LCF board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 23
5
[E480] Bridge unit opened during printing
Is the bridge unit open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit.
NO
Is the bridge unit opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the bridge unit opening/closing switch is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the bridge unit opening/closing switch.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Replace the LGC board.
[E490] JSP cover opened during printing
Is the JSP cover open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the JSP cover switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/
[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the JSP cover opening/closing switch is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the JSP board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the JSP cover switch.
|
7) Replace the JSP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
"
YES
1) Replace the JSP board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 24
[E491] OCT cover opened during printing
Is the OCT cover open?
" YES # Remove the paper if there is any, then close the cover.
NO
Is the OCT cover switch working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/
[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the OCT cover switch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the OCT board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN302 on the OCT board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the OCT board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6) Replace the OCT cover switch.
|
7) Replace the OCT board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Replace the OCT board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 25
5.1.4
Transport jam (RADF)
Note:
When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform “Automatic
adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356)” and “RADF original
guide width adjustment (05-367/368)” consecutively at the Adjustment Mode whenever the
RADF board, original length sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.
[E711] Jam not reaching the original length sensor
[E712] Jam not reaching the registration sensor
[E713] Stop jam at the original length sensor
Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out?
" YES # Clean the rollers or replace them.
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
" YES # Flatten and set it again.
NO
Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [2]/[A])
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the original length sensor and registration sen|
|
sor are disconnected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the original length sensor and registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E714] Feed signal reception jam
Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B])
NO # 1) Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally.
|
|
2) Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN5 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the empty sensor.
|
7)
Replace
the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 26
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor
Are the registration roller and read roller stained?
" YES # Clean the rollers.
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the read sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning)
[E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning)
Is the read roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the exit sensor and reverse sensor.
|
6)
Replace
the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 27
5
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor
Is the registration roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor
Is the read roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the read sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E726] Transport/exit signal reception jam
1) If the original remains in the RADF, remove it.
2) If any paper remains in the equipment, remove it.
3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the jam still occurs, lead the following procedure.
4) Check the connection between the RADF board and SLG board, and the connection between the
RADF board and switching power supply.
- Are the connection of the connectors and joint connectors normal?
- Are the connector pins disconnected or are the harnesses open circuited?
5) Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal.
6) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
7) Replace the RADF board.
8) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
9) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 28
05/05
[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor
Is the exit roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E741] Stop jam at the reverse sensor
Are the read roller and reverse roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the reverse sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 29
5
[E742] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (feeding in reverse)
Is the reverse roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the reverse sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E743] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (feeding in reverse)
Are the reverse roller and read roller stained?
" YES # Clean the roller.
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the exit sensor.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E860] Jam access cover open
Is the jam access cover opened?
" YES # Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover.
NO
Is the jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the jam access cover switch is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN8 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the jam access cover switch.
|
6) Replace the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 30
[E870] RADF open jam
Is the RADF opened?
" YES # Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF.
NO
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range?
" NO # Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor.
YES
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is discon|
|
nected.
|
2) Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5)
Replace
the RADF opening/closing sensor.
|
6)
Replace
the RADF board.
|
"
YES
Replace the RADF board.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 31
5.1.5
Finisher jam
[ 1 ] Jam in bridge unit
[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2
[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H], /[3]/[E])
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are
|
|
disconnected.
|
2) Check if the connector J512 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2.
|
7)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232)
NO # 1) Check if the connector J512 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated?
(Perform the output check: 03-101/151)
" NO # Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
YES
Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 32
[ 2 ] Paper jam in finisher section
[EA10] Paper transport delay jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 33
5
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
l
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
• Replace the sensor.
"
NO
Is the gap between the flapper and entrance roller shaft other than 0.60±0.20mm when the
gate solenoid (SOL2) is pulled?
" #YES Adjust the gap.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) disconnected or open circuited?
Is the harness between the gate solenoid (SOL2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 34
06/01
[EA20] Paper transport stop jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
"
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and processing tray sensor)
working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
NO # 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
|
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
"
3) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the transport
sensor (S2)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 35
06/01
5
[EA21] Paper size error jam
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the paper size used shorter than the size specified in the specifications?
" #YES Use the paper size specified in the specifications.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the transport
sensor (S2)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) disconnected or open circuited?
Is the harness between the transport sensor (S2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 36
06/01
[EA30] Power-ON jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
|
3) Replace the sensors.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 37
5
[EA31] Transport path paper remaining jam
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the transport
sensor (S2)?
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
• Replace the sensor.
"
NO
Is the harness between the transport sensor (S2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
[EA32] Exit paper remaining jam
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the finishing tray
paper detection sensor (S12)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the finishing tray paper detection sensor (S12) and the finisher control
PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 38
06/01
[EA40] Finisher front door open jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the finisher connected with the equipment?
" NO # Connect the finisher with the equipment.
YES
Is the connector J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the joint sensor working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the joint sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 39
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is either of the covers upper and front of the finisher closed?
" NO # Close the cover.
YES
Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper and front cover opening
sensors (PI31 and PI32) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
"
YES
Is the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open
circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the front cover switch working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the front cover opening switch securely.
|
2) Replace the front cover switch.
"
YES
Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61)
open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open
circuited?
|
YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
"
NO
Are the upper and front door switches working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the front cover opening switch securely.
|
2) Replace the upper/front door switches.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 40
MJ-1101
Is the front cover or stationary tray cover opened?
l
#YES • Close the front cover.
• Close the stationary tray cover.
"
NO
Is there any breakage of the front cover hook which switches the front cover switch (SW1) to
ON?
" #YES Replace the handle cover.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the front cover
switch (SW1)?
Is there an incorrect installation or breakage of the stationary tray cover opening/closing switch
(SW2)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the front cover switch (SW1) / stationary tray opening/closing switch
(SW2) and the finisher control PC board (CN16) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 41
06/01
5
[EA50] Stapling jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
" YES # End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor
(S17) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the stapling home position sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
" YES # End.
NO
Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor
(PI40) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the staple home position sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 42
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment, or on the finishing tray?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
" #YES End.
NO
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the stapler interference sensor (S11) is
moved?
" #YES Reinsert the clip which fixes the actuator from the side of it.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 43
06/01
5
[EA60] Early arrival jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance sensor (S1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 44
06/01
[EA70] Stack delivery jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J9 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly?
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor
|
|
securely.
|
2) Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EA70] Stack exit belt home position error
MJ-1101
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stack exit
belt home position sensor (S9)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the stack exit belt home position sensor (S9) and the finisher control
PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 45
06/01
5
[EAF0] Stack return jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position
sensor (S3) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly?
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor
|
|
securely.
|
2) Replace the returning roller home position sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 46
[ 3 ] Paper jam in saddle stitcher section
[EA80] Stapling jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle
stitcher section or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples
stuck in the stapling unit?
" YES # End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position
switch (rear: SW5, front: SW7) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches securely.
|
2) Replace the stitcher home position switches.
"
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5
[EA90] Door open jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
" NO # Close the door.
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors
(delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the sensors.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 47
[EAA0] Power-ON jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20], vertical path paper sensor
[PI17] and delivery sensor[PI11]) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path
paper sensor and delivery sensor) working properly?
(Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
|
3) Replace the sensors.
"
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?
Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor
[PI11]) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor and delivery sensor) working properly?
(Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
|
3) Replace the sensors.
"
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 48
[EAC0] Transport delay jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the sensor securely.
|
|
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
|
3) Replace the sensor.
"
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 49
[ 4 ] Paper jam in puncher unit
[E9F0] Punching jam
MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
" YES # Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI63) open circuited?
" YES # Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
|
NO # 1) Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.
|
2) Replace the punch home position sensor.
"
YES
Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
" #NO
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
1) Replace the punch motor (M3).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 50
06/01
[ 5 ] Other paper jam
[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam
Is the main motor rotating normally?
"
NO
1) Replace the SYS board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam
Is the finisher working?
" YES # Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment
side is open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller
PC board is open circuited.
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EB30] Ready time time-out jam
Is there paper in the equipment?
" NO # Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?
" NO # Connect them properly.
YES
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?
" NO # Connect the harness properly.
YES
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher disconnected or any of those harnesses open circuited?
" NO # Connect the pin or replace the harness.
YES
1) Replace the IPC board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 51
5
[ED10] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
" #NO
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch sideways adjustment
motor (M2) correct?
Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
1) Replace the sideways adjustment motor (M2).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
[ED11] Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
" #NO
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
1) Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 52
06/01
[ED12] Shutter home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the shutter is opened/closed?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the shutter opening/closing sensor (S4)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the shutter opening/closing sensor (S4) and the finisher control PC
board (CN13) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the shutter clutch (CLT1) and the finisher control PC board (CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
5
[ED13] Front alignment plate home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the front alignment plate home position sensor (S7)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment plate home position sensor (S7) and the finisher
control PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 53
06/01
[ED14] Rear alignment plate home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S8)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S8) and the finisher
control PC board (CN11) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
[ED15] Paddle home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paddle is rotated?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the paddle home
position sensor (S3)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the paddle home position sensor (S3) and the finisher control PC
board (CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 54
06/01
[ED16] Buffer tray home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the buffer tray
home position sensor (S5)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray home position sensor (S5) and the finisher control PC
board (CN18) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
(CN18) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 55
06/01
5.1.6
Drive system related service call
[C010] Main motor is abnormal
Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-101/151)
NO # 1) Check if the connector CN1 of the main motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board
|
are short circuited or open circuited.
|
5) Replace the main motor.
|
6) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the LED on the main motor board lit without flickering?
NO # 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
|
circuited.
|
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board
|
are short circuited or open circuited.
|
3) Replace the main motor.
|
4) Replace the LGC board.
"
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN318-A1 output from the LGC board is always level “L”?
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the CPU input terminal IC24-14 is always “L”?
3) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 56
5.1.7
Paper feeding system related service call
[C040] PFP motor is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than PFP drawers)
Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159)
NO # 1) Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is discon|
nected.
|
5) Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is discon|
nected.
|
6)
Check
if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
7)
Check
if
the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
8) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
|
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
|
9) Replace the PFP motor.
|
10)Replace the PFP board.
|
11)Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flickering?
NO # 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
|
circuited.
|
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
|
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
3) Replace the PFP motor.
|
4) Replace the PFP board.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 output from the PFP board is always “L” level.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 is always “L” level.
3) Replace the PFP board.
4) Replace the LGC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 57
5
[C130] Upper drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than upper
drawers)
[C140] Lower drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than lower
drawers)
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-242/243)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[7]/[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 58
[C150] PFP upper drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than PFP
upper drawer)
[C160] PFP lower drawer tray is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than PFP
lower drawer)
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-278, 280)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the PFP board.
|
7) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H])
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN247 and CN248 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 59
05/05
5
[C180] LCF tray-up motor is abnormal (paper can be fed from the drawers other than LCF
drawer)
Does the tray move? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-271)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the LCF board.
|
7) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Are the LCF tray bottom sensor and LCF tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A])
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 60
05/11
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor is abnormal
(paper can be fed from the drawers other than LCF drawer)
Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-207)
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6)
Replace
the LCF board.
|
7) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B])
NO # 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6)
Check
if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 61
5
[C1B0] LCF transport motor is abnormal
(paper can be fed from the drawers other than LCF drawer)
Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-122/172)
NO # 1) Check if the connector CN1 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected.
|
3) Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is discon|
nected.
|
4) Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is discon|
nected.
|
5) Check if the connector CN303 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
6) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
7) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF
|
board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
8) Replace the LCF transport motor.
|
|
9) Replace the LCF board.
|
10)Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always “L” level.
4) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 is always “L”
level.
5) Replace the LCF transport motor.
6) Replace the LCF board.
7) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 62
5.1.8
Scanning system related service call
[C260] Peak detection error
Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-267)
YES # 1) Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.
|
|
2) Check if the shading correction plate is dirty.
|
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5) Replace the lens unit.
|
6) Replace the SLG board.
|
"
NO
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN9 is disconnected or the harness is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
4) Replace the SLG board.
5) Replace the inverter.
6) Replace the exposure lamp.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 63
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a fixed time
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a fixed time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
[C270] Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction? Are the carriages staying at a position other than home position?
YES # 1) Check if the connector of the scan motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short cir"
cuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
[C280] Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
YES # The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.
|
1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2) Replace the carriage home position sensor.
"
3) Replace the SLG board.
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are short circuited or
open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 64
5.1.9
Fuser unit related service call
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control circuit and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
[C410] Thermistor or heater abnormality at power ON
1.Check the thermistors
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the connectors are disconnected.
Check if the main and edge thermistors are in contact with the surface of the fuser roller properly?
Check if the harnesses of the main and edge thermistors are open circuited.
2. Check the IH board and IH coil
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the IH coil is broken.
Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected.
Check if the thermostat is blown.
Check if the connectors on the IH board are disconnected (AC input connector and LGC I/F connector CN455/456).
Check if the IH board or the switching power supply unit are abnormal.
• Replace the IH control board.
3. Check the LGC board
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the connectors CN316 are disconnected.
Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.
4. Clear the status counter
After repairing the matter which caused the error [C410], perform the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in "400", then press [START].
Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C410]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 65
5
[C440] Fuser abnormality after abnormality judgment
1,2.3. Check the thermistors, IH board, IH coil and LGC board
Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2 and 3 for [C410].
4. Clear the status counter
Change the current status counter value (08-400) "5", "7" or "9" to "0" for [C440], taking the same procedure as that for [C410].
• The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
- The error occurred during warming-up: "5"
- The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7"
- The temperature detected by the main thermistor is 230°C or higher: "9"
- The temperature detected by the edge thermistor is 280°C or higher: "9"
[C450] Thermistor abnormality during printing
1. Check the edge thermistor
1) Check if the connector is disconnected.
2) Check if the edge thermistor is in contact with the surface of the fuser roller properly.
3) Check if the harness of the edge thermistor is open circuited.
2. Check the LGC board
1) Check if the connector CN302 is disconnected.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the LGC board.
3. Clear the status counter
Change the current status counter value (08-400) “6” to “0”.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 66
[C470] IH power voltage is abnormal / IH initialization error
1. Check the AC input voltage
Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range. (especially when the heater becomes ON
after the power is turned ON (the equipment is warming up))
2. Check the thermostat
Check if the thermostat is blown.
3. Check the IH board
1) Check if the AC input connector on the IH board or the LGC I/F connector CN455/456 is disconnected?
2) Check if the fuse on the IH board has blown.
3) Replace the IH board.
4. Check the LGC board
1) Check if the connector CN316 is disconnected.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the LGC board.
5. Check the LGC board
Change the values “10”, “11”, “14” or “17” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
*
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred immediately after the power was turned ON: "10"
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "11"
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "14"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "17"
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 67
5
[C480] IGBT high temperature
1. Check the operation of the IH board cooling fan
Check if the IH board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?)
2. Check the IH board
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IH board.
3. Clear the status counter
Change the values “12”, “15” or “18” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
*
•
•
•
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "12"
The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15"
The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "18"
[C490] IH circuit or coil is abnormal
1. Check the IH board
(1)
(2)
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IH board.
2. Check the IH coil
(1)
(2)
Check if the coil is broken or shorted.
Replace the IH coil.
3. Clear the status counter
Change the values “13”, “16” or “19” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
*
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "13"
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "19"
[C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the power as long as the problem
was solved, and the status counter does not have to be changed to "0". The value of the status
counter remains until the next service call overwrites the value.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 68
5.1.10
Communication related service call
[C550 (C780)] RADF I/F error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the RADF board.
Replace the SLG board.
[C570] Communication error between main CPU and IPC board
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
Replace the LGC board.
[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Check if the specified finisher is attached.
Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[F070] Communication error between system CPU and main CPU
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and LGC board (CN321) is disconnected or open circuited.
Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
Replace the SYS board.
Replace the LGC board.
[F110] Communication error between system CPU and scanner CPU
[F111] Scanner response abnormality
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
Replace the SYS board.
Replace the SLG board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 69
5
5.1.11
RADF related service call (MR-3015)
Note:
When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform “Automatic adjustment of
RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356)” and “RADF original guide width adjustment
(05-367/368)” consecutively at the Adjustment Mode whenever the RADF board, original length
sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.
[C730] EEPROM initialization error
(1)
(2)
Check the RADF board, mainly IC12, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the RADF board.
[C740] Reverse sensor adjustment error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if there is any foreign matter between the reverse sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check
if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the reverse sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN4, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the reverse sensor.
Replace the RADF board.
[C810] Fan motor is abnormal
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Check if the load on the motor shaft is normal.
Remove foreign matters.
Check if the harness connecting the fan motor and RADF board is open circuited.
Check if the power is supplied to the pin 1 of the CN9 on the RADF board during the operation.
Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly Q12 and Q16, for short circuits
and open circuits.
Replace the fan motor.
Replace the RADF board.
[C820] Read sensor adjustment error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if
the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN6, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the read sensor.
Replace the RADF board.
[C830] Original length sensor adjustment error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if there is any foreign matter between the original length sensor and reflecting mirror.
Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the original length sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN3, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the original length sensor.
Replace the RADF board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 70
06/06
5.1.12
RADF related service call (MR-3018)
No service call for the RADF (MR-3018)
5.1.13
Laser optical unit related service call (MR-3018)
[CA10] Polygonal motor is abnormal
Is the polygonal motor rotating?
NO # 1) Check if the connector of the harness is disconnected between LGC
|
|
board (CN308) and the laser optical unit?
|
2) Check if the harness is open circuited and the connector pin is dis|
connected.
|
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
|
open circuited.
|
4) Replace the laser optical unit.
|
5) Replace the LGC board.
|
"
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[CA20] H-Sync detection error
Are the harness open circuited and the connectors disconnected between the LGC
board (CN309) and LRL board (CN204), and between the LRL board (CN204) and laser
optical unit?
YES# Replace the harness. Connect the disconnected connectors.
"
NO
1) Replace the LGC board.
2) Replace the laser optical unit.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 71
5
5.1.14
Finisher related service call
[CB10] Entrance motor abnormality
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the entrance roller is rotated?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the entrance motor (M1).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB11] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality
* You receive a [CB11] error when the [ED16] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed while the buffer
roller is lifted up?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
(CN18) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the buffer tray guide motor (M3).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB12] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer roller is rotated?
" #YES Fix the drive mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer roller drive motor (M6) and the finisher control PC board
(CN18) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the buffer roller drive motor (M6).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 72
06/01
[CB20] Delivery motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor (M1) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the delivery motor (M1).
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal?
" NO # Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/
M38) correct?
" NO # Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism?
" NO # Fix the lift mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB30] Movable tray shift motor abnormality
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the movable tray is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray shift motor (M7) and the finisher control PC board
(CN8) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
position A, B, and C sensors (S13, S14, and S15)?
l
#YES • Replace the harness.
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 73
06/01
5
1) Replace the movable tray shift motor (M7).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB31] Movable tray paper-full detection error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection
sensor (S17) is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
paper-full detection sensor (S17)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray paper-full detection sensor (S17) and the finisher
control PC board (CN13) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear aligning plate motor (M34)
correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the rear aligning plate motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB40] Front alignment motor abnormality
* You receive a [CB40] error when the [ED13] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 74
06/01
Replace the front alignment motor (M9).
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality
MJ-1022/1023/1024
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the stapler.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB50] Stapler home position error
* You receive a [CB50] error when the [EA50] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB51] Stapler shift home position error
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stapler unit
home position sensor (S10)?
l
#YES • Connect the connector securely.
l
• Reinstall the sensor correctly.
"
• Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit home position sensor (S10) and the finisher control PC
board (CN1) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
(CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 75
06/01
5
[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
" YES# Fix the mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stapler shift motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
(CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the stapler unit shift motor (M4).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
" YES# End.
NO
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
[CB80] RAM abnormality
MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
" #YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 76
06/01
[CB81] Flash ROM abnormality
MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
" #YES End.
NO
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB90] Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position
sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBA0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (front) abnormality
[CBB0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (rear) abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?
" NO # Install them properly.
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) on the front and rear stitchers and stitcher
motors (M7/M6) working normally?
" NO # Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBC0] Saddle stitcher alignment motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the alignment motor (M5).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 77
06/01
5
[CBD0] Saddle stitcher guide motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replacing the guide motor (M3).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBE0] Saddle stitcher paper folding motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21)
working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replacing the paper folding motor (M2).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBF0] Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 78
05/11
[CC00] Connection abnormality in saddle stitcher sensor connector
MJ-1024
Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)
and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller
PC board?
" NO # Connect them to the board.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
" NO # Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly
connected to the ground?
" NO # Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
End.
[CC10] Saddle stitcher microswitch abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3) normal?
" NO # Replace the switches.
YES
Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is
it 24V?
" NO # Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher
MJ-1024
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment?
" YES# End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
" NO # Connect the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 79
05/11
5
[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality
MJ-1022
[Procedure 1]
Is the tension of the drive belt normal?
" NO # Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
NO # Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing
|
"
contacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
" YES# Attach the spring.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack processing motor (M2) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replacing the stack processing motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 2]
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
NO # Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame where the bushing con|
"
tacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
" YES# Attach the spring.
NO
Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal?
" NO # Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the stack delivery motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 80
[CC30] Stack transport motor abnormality
* You receive a [CC30] error when the [EA70] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport belt is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the stack transport motor (M5).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CC31] Transport motor abnormality
* You receive a [CC31] error when the [ED12] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport roller -1 and -2 are rotated?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the transport motor (M2) and the finisher control PC board (CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the transport motor (M2).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CC40] Swing motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the swing mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the swing motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 81
06/01
5
[CC41] Paper holder cam home position abnormality
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holder cam is rotated?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the paper holder home position sensor (S6) and the finisher control PC
board (CN17) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the paper holder home position sensor (S6).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller
PC board correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62).
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CC51] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality
* The [CC51] error will be displays when the [ED11] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
" #NO
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and sideways adjustment motor
(M2) correct?
Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
1) Replace the punch sideways adjustment motor (M2).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 82
06/01
[CC52] Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality
* The [CC52] error will be displays when the [ED10] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
" #NO
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
1) Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
[CC60] Punch motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working normally?
" NO # Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the punch motor (M61).
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 83
06/01
5
[CC61] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error
* The [CC61] error will be displays when the [E9F0] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
" #YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
Fix the mechanism.
" #NO
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
Correct the wiring.
" #NO
YES
1) Replace the punch motor (M3).
2) Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
[CC71] Punch ROM checksum error
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short circuited?
" #YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CC72] Punch RAM read/write error
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short circuited?
" #YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 84
06/01
[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1022 (Front jogging motor abnormality)
Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor (M3) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
" YES # Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the front jogging motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality)
Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33)
correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
" NO # Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the front aligning plate motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 85
06/01
5
[CC80] Rear alignment motor abnormality
* You receive a [CC80] error when the [ED14] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the rear alignment motor (M10).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor (M5) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled?
" NO # Level them.
YES
Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S22) and stack
processing safety switch (S26) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
" NO # Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 86
06/01
[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor (M7) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled?
" NO # Level them.
YES
Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working
properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
" NO # Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the motor.
[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor (M4) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
" YES# Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the rear jogging motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 87
05/11
5
[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)
shutter clutch (CL31) correct?
" NO # Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism?
" YES# Fix the shutter mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism?
" YES# Fix the rear end assist mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the rear end assist motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal?
" NO # Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism?
" YES# Fix the gear change mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the gear change motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 88
[CDE0] Paddle motor abnormality
* You receive a [CDE0] error when the [ED15] error occurs three times in succession or during
the initial operation.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem with the paddle is rotated?
" #YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6) disconnected or open circuited?
l
#YES • Reconnect the connector securely.
• Replace the harness.
"
NO
1) Replace the paddle motor (M8).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit
MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment?
" YES# End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct?
" NO # Correct the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
[CE00] Punch communication error
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is the harness between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and the finisher control PC
board disconnected or open circuited?
" #YES Replace the harness. Correct the wiring.
NO
Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short circuited?
" #YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 89
06/01
5
5.1.15
Service call for others
[C940] Engine-CPU is abnormal
Is the “Call for Service” displayed even after the power is turned OFF and back ON?
" NO # Leave it and see what happens.
YES
1) Check if the circuit pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited or open
circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board if this error occurs frequently.
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Is the main charger installed securely?
Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed.
Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed.
Check if any foreign matters are on the charger wire or main charger grid.
Is the transfer/separation charger installed securely?
Check if the transfer/separation charger wire is broken or unhooked.
Check if any foreign matter is on the transfer/separation charger wire.
[CDF0] Initialize error of the offset tray
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Check if each connector between the OCT motor and OCT board (CN261) is disconnected.
Check if each connector between the OCT board (CN261) and LGC board (CN302) is disconnected.
Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.
Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT board and LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the OCT motor.
Replace the OCT board.
Replace the LGC board.
[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1)
(2)
(3)
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message "SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD, press [INITIALIZE]. (SRAM is cleared.)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 90
05/11
[F091] NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1)
(2)
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message "NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F092] SRAM/NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1)
(2)
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message "NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD,
press the [INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared and NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F100] HDD format error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Check if the HDD is mounted.
Check if the specified HDD is mounted.
Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
Check if the power supply connector is disconnected.
Check if the connector J111 on the SYS board is disconnected.
Replace the harness.
Initialize the HDD. (Key in “2” at 08-690.)
Replace the HDD.
Replace the SYS board.
[F101] HDD unmounted
[F102] HDD start error
[F103] HDD transfer time-out
[F104] HDD CRC error
[F105] HDD other error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are broken.
Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If
the check result is failed, replace the HDD.
Replace the SYS board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 91
5
[F106] Point and Print partition damage
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
Restart the equipment.
Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.
[F107] / SHR partition damage
Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[F108] /SHA partition damage
Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).
[F120] Database abnormality
(1)
(2)
Rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.)
If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Key in “2” at 08-690.)
[F130] Invalid MAC address (e-STUDIO352/452)
Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.
[F200] Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off
Clear the service call “F200”. (Key in “0” at 08-633.)
* When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off from the equipment, the service call “F200”
occurs.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 92
5.1.16
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing
Function of TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initialization.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initialization. Note that some of data cannot be backed up (Page 5-1).
[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
[1C10] System access abnormality
[1C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08690).
5
[1C11] Insufficient memory
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C12] Message reception error
[1C13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C14] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
[1C20] System management module access abnormality
[1C21] Job control module access abnormality
[1C22] Job control module access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 93
[1C30] Directory creation failure
[1C31] File creation failure
[1C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C61] Address Book reading failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[1C62] Memory acquiring failure
Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset
Reset the Terminal IP address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C66] Server time-out error
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C67] NIC time-out error
[1C68] NIC access error
[1C6D] System error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 94
[1C69] SMTP server connection error
Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C6A] HOST NAME error
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C6C] Destination mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C70] SMTP client OFF
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
5
[1C71] SMTP authentication ERROR
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authentication again.
[1C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentication again.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Reset the mail box.
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the "Received Fax Forward".
[1CC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 95
[ 2 ] RFC related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)
[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
[2551] Destination mail address error (RFC: 551)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[2550] Destination mail address error (RFC: 550)
Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.
[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[2553] Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 96
[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error
[2B10] No applicable job error in Job control module
[2B11] JOB status abnormality
[2B20] File library function error
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred
[2BC1] System management module resource acquiring failure
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2B50] Image library error
[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08666).
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted
Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of
client's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08666).
[2B51] List library error
Check if the Function List can be printed out.
If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again.
If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory.
If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 97
5
[2BA0] Invalid Box password
Check if the password is correct.
Reset the password.
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the
administrator's password.
If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing
(opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2BB1] Power failure
[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages
Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.
[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents
Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders
Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 98
[ 4 ] E-mail related error
[2C10] System access abnormality
[2C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08690).
[2C11] Insufficient memory
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2C12] Message reception error
[2C13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C14] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2C15] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Message size limitation" or reduce the number of pages and perform the job
again.
[2C20] System management module access abnormality
[2C21] Job control module access abnormality
[2C22] Job control module access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2C30] Directory creation failure
[2C31] File creation failure
[2C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality
[2C62] Memory acquiring failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 99
5
[2C61] Address Book reading failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset
Reset the Terminal IP address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C66] Server time-out error
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[2C67] NIC time-out error
[2C68] NIC access error
[2C6D] System error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[2C69] SMTP server connection error
Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 100
[2C70] SMTP client OFF
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[2C71] SMTP authentication ERROR
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authentication again.
[2C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentication again.
[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received
Reset the setting of the mail box or "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2CC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 101
5
[ 5 ] File sharing related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
[2D10] System access abnormality
[2D32] File deletion failure
[2DA6] File deletion failure
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion failure (in case of [2DA6])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08690).
[2D11] Insufficient memory
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D12] Message reception error
[2D13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2D14] [2D61] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D15] Exceeding document number
Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.
[2D20] System management module access abnormality
[2D21] Job control module access abnormality
[2D22] Job control module access abnormality
[2D60] File library access abnormality
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion failure (in case of [2DA6])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2D30] Directory creation failure
[2D31] File creation failure
[2D33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 102
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using
the Setting Mode (08-667).
[2D62] File server connection error
Check the IP address or path of the server.
Check if the server is operating properly.
[2D63] Invalid network path
Check the network path.
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D64] Login failure
Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed
Delete some documents in the folder.
5
[2D66] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2D67] FTP service not available
Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.
[2D68] File sharing service not available
Check if the setting of SMB is valid.
[2DC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 103
[ 6 ] E-mail reception related error
(when GM-1010/3010 or GM-2010 is installed (e-STUDIO350/450))
(when GM-1060/4060 or GM-2060 is installed (e-STUDIO352/452))
[3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.
[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error
[3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error
[3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error
The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.
[3A40] Partial mail related error
The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.
[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error
[3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs,
etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption
This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error
The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error
These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then
retransmit the mail.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 104
[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or
when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error
The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.
[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error
The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200,
200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error
The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG,
LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.
[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.
[3C70] Power failure error
Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.
[3D10] Destination address error
Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error
Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
[3D30] FAX board error
This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 105
5
[3E10] POP3 server connection error
Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check
if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error
Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.
[3E30] POP3 login error
Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
[3E40] POP3 Login Type ERROR
Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.
[4030] No printer kit/Invalid
Install the print kit and perform the job again.
Register it officially and perform the job again.
[4031] HDD full failure during printing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[4032] Private-print-only error
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4033] Printing data storing limitation error
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4034] e-Filing storing limitation error
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4035] Local file storing limitation error
Select "Remote" (SMB/FTP) for the destination of the file to save.
[4036] User authentication error
Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 106
[A221] Print job cancellation
This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.
[A222] Print job power failure
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[A290] Limit over error
[A291] Limit over error
[A292] Limit over error
Clear the limit counter.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 107
5.2
Troubleshooting for the Image
1) Abnormality of image density / Gray balance
Gray balance
Feeding direction
Image density
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Density /
Gray balance
1
Check the density / gray balance.
Adjust the density.
Printer density
2
Check test print image (04-113).
Go to step 4 if there is any problem on
image.
Scanner
3
Clean them.
Printed image
4
Are the original glass, mirrors and
lens dirty?
Is the image faded?
5
Is background fogging occurring?
Perform troubleshooting for background
fogging.
6
Is there a blotch on the image?
Perform troubleshooting for blotched
image.
7
Is the image transferred normally?
Perform troubleshooting for abnormal
transfer.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Perform troubleshooting for faded image.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 108
Feeding direction
2) Background fogging
Step
Check items
Density reproduction
Defective area
1
Check the reproduction of the image
density.
Background reproduction
Printer section
2
Check the background reproduction. Adjust the background.
3
Check test print image (04-113).
Go to step 4 if there is any problem on
image.
Scanner
4
Clean them.
Auto-toner
5
Are the original glass, mirrors and
lens dirty?
Is the auto-toner sensor normal?
6
7
Is the toner supplied normally?
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Check the motor and circuits.
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
Developer unit
8
Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap and polarity.
Developer material/
Toner/Drum
9
Is the contact between the drum and
developer material normal?
Using the specified developer material, toner and drum?
10
Have the developer material and
drum reached their PM life?
Replace the developer material and drum.
11
Is the storage environment of the
toner cartridge 35°c less without
dew?
Is the drum cleaned properly?
Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment within specification.
High-voltage transformer (Main
charger / Developer
bias)
Drum cleaning
blade
12
Toner dusting
13
Is toner heaped on the seal of the
developer unit?
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Prescription
Adjust the density.
Check the performance of the auto-toner
sensor and readjust.
Use the specified developer material, toner
and drum.
Check the pressure of the drum cleaning
blade.
Remove the toner and clean the developer
unit.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 109
5
3) Moire/lack of sharpness
B
Feeding direction
A
Moire
Step
Check items
Density reproduction
Defective area
1
Check the reproduction of the image
density.
Prescription
Parameter adjustment value
2
Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for sharpness.
eters.
Printer section
3
Check test print image (04-113).
Adjust the density.
When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure.
Lack of sharpness
Step
Check items
Density reproduction
Defective area
1
Check the reproduction of the image
density.
Parameter adjustment value
Printer section
2
Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for sharpness.
eters.
Check test print image (04-113).
When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure.
3
4
Prescription
Adjust the density.
Check the image processing param- Check the encircled areas A and B in the
eters.
image, and change the sharpness intensity
in the sharpness adjustment mode.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 110
Feeding direction
Approx.124mm
4)Toner offset
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 124 mm toward the dark image.)
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Density
1
Is the density too high?
Adjust the density.
Fuser unit
2
Is the pressure of the fuser roller
normal?
Check the pressure releasing parts and
pressurization mechanism.
3
Is the thermistor in contact with the
fuser roller?
Is there a scratch on the fuser roller
surface?
Has the fuser roller reached its PM
life?
Contact the thermistor with the fuser roller.
6
Is the setting temperature of the
fuser roller normal?
Check the adjustment values of fuser roller
temperature?
08-410:12 (200°C) 08-411:12 (200°C)
7
Has the appropriate paper type
been selected?
Select a proper mode.
8
Is the setting temperature of the
fuser roller in each paper type normal?
Using the recommended paper?
Check the setting and correct it. 08412,413,437,438
4
5
Paper
9
Developer material
10
Using the specified developer material?
Scanner
11
Are the original glass (especially the
position of shading correction plate),
mirror and lens dirty?
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Replace the fuser roller.
Replace the fuser roller.
Use the recommended paper.
Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Clean them.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 111
5
Feeding direction
5) Blurred image
Defective area
Paper
Step
1
Check items
Prescription
Is the paper in the drawer or LCF
damp?
Change paper. Avoid storing paper in
damp place.
Bedewed scanner
2
Is the scanner bedewed?
Clean it.
Drum
3
Is the drum surface wet or dirty?
Wipe the drum with a piece of dry cloth.
* Do not use alcohol or other organic solvents.
Ozone exhaust
4
Is the ozone exhaust fan operating
properly?
Check the connection of connector.
Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
5
Is the ozone filter stained or damaged?
Replace it.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 112
Feeding direction
6) Poor fusing
Defective area
IH electric power
Step
1
2
Check items
Prescription
Check if the connector contacts
properly.
Is the IH coil shorted or broken?
Is the IH board normal?
Are the pressure springs working
properly?
Correct it.
Replace the IH coil or IH board.
Pressure between
fuser roller and
pressure roller
3
Fuser roller temperature
4
Is the temperature of the fuser roller
normal?
Check the setting and correct it.
08-410:12 (200°C)
08-411:12 (200°C)
Developer material/
Toner
5
Using the specified developer material and toner?
Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Paper
6
Is the paper in the drawer or LCF
damp?
Avoid storing paper in damp place.
7
Is the paper type corresponding to
its mode?
8
Is the setting temperature of the
fuser roller in each paper type normal?
Using the recommended paper?
Use the proper type of paper or select the
proper made.
Check the setting and correct it.
08-412,413,437,438
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Check and adjust the pressure springs.
Use the recommended paper.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 113
04/09
5
Feeding direction
7) Blank copy
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Transfer charger
wire
1
Is the transfer charger wire cut off?
Replace the transfer charger wire.
High-voltage transformer (Transfer
charger / Developer
bias)
2
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
3
Developer unit
4
Are the connectors of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is
the harness open circuited?
Is the developer unit installed properly?
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
Reconnect the harness securely. Replace
the high-voltage harness.
Check and correct the engaging condition
of the developer unit gears.
5
Do the developer sleeve and mixers
rotate?
Check and fix the drive system of the
developer unit.
6
Is the developer material smoothly
transported?
Remove the foreign matter from the developer material.
7
Has the magnetic brush phase been
shifted?
Adjust the developer polarity.
8
Is the doctor blade positioned properly?
Is the drum rotating?
Adjust it using the doctor-sleeve jig.
Drum
9
CCD, SLG, SYS,
LGC boards and
harnesses
10
Are the connectors securely connected? Check if the harnesses
connecting the boards are open circuited.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check if the drum shaft is inserted. Check
the drive system of the drum.
Connect the connectors securely. Replace
the harness.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 114
05/11
Feeding direction
8) Solid print
Defective area
Step
Exposure lamp and
inverter
1
Does the exposure lamp light?
Check if the connector contacts with the
lamp terminal.
Replace the defective inverter.
Scanner
2
Remove it.
Bedewed scanner
and drum
3
Is there any foreign matter on the
light path?
Is the scanner or drum bedewed?
Main charger
4
5
High-voltage transformer (Main
charger)
6
CCD, SLG, SYS,
LGC boards and
harnesses
8
7
Check items
Is the main charger securely
installed?
Is the main charger wire open circuited?
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Are the connectors of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is
the harness open circuited?
Are the connectors securely connected? Check if the harnesses
connecting the boards are open circuited.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Prescription
Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.
Keep the power cord plugged in all trough
the day and night.
Install it securely.
Replace it.
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
Reconnect the harness securely. Replace
the high-voltage harness.
Connect the connectors securely. Replace
the harness.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 115
05/11
5
Feeding direction
9) White banding (in the feeding direction)
Defective area
Step
Check items
Laser optical unit
1
Remove the foreign matter or stain.
Main charger grid
2
Transfer charger
wire
3
Is there a foreign matter or stain on
the slit glass?
Is there a foreign matter or dew on
the charger grid?
Is there any foreign matter or stain
on the transfer charger wire?
Developer unit
4
Is the developer material transported properly?
Is there a foreign matter or dew on
the drum seal?
Remove the foreign matter if there is any.
6
Is the upper drum seal of the developer unit in contact with the drum?
Correct the position of the drum seal or
replace it.
Drum
7
Is there a foreign matter on the drum
surface?
Replace the drum.
Transport path
8
Does the toner image contact with
any foreign matter before the paper
enters the fusing section after the
separation?
Remove the foreign matter.
Discharge LED
9
Is any of the discharge LEDS off?
Replace the discharge LED.
Scanner
10
Is there a foreign matter on the light
path?
Are the original glass (especially the
position of shading correction plate)
mirror and lens dirty?
Remove the foreign matter.
Is there any foreign matter, which
contacts the drum on the cleaner
stay?
Remove the foreign matter.
5
11
Cleaner
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
Remove the foreign matter.
Clean the transfer charger wire.
Remove the foreign matter or dew.
Clean them.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 116
04/09
Feeding direction
10) White banding (at right angle with the feeding direction)
Defective area
Main charger
Step
1
2
Check items
Prescription
Is there a foreign matter on the
charger?
Is the connector in proper contact
with the terminal?
Is there any abnormality on the
drum surface?
Remove the foreign matter.
Clean or adjust the terminal.
Drum
3
Discharge LED
4
Does the discharge LED light normally?
Replace the discharge LED or clean the
terminals.
Developer unit
5
Is the developer sleeve rotating normally? Is there any abnormality on
the sleeve surface?
Check the drive system of the developer
unit, or clean the sleeve surface.
Drive system
6
7
Are the drum and scanner jittering?
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Check each drive system.
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
8
Is any foreign matter such as paper
shred sticking to the transfer
charger wire?
Is the aligning amount proper?
Remove the foreign matter from the wire.
High-voltage transformer (Main
charger / Developer
bias / Transfer
charger)
Transfer charger
Feed system
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Replace the drum.
Adjust the aligning amount.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 117
05/11
5
Feeding direction
11) Skew (inclined image)
Defective area
Drawers LCF
Step
1
Check items
Prescription
Is the drawer or LCF properly
installed?
Is there too much paper in the
drawer or LCF?
Install the drawer or LCF properly.
3
Is the corner of the paper folded?
Change the direction of the paper and set
it again.
4
Are the side guides of the drawer or Adjust the position of the side guides.
LCF properly installed?
Is the surface of the feed roller dirty? Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or
replace the roller.
2
Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less. (2500
sheets or less/stack for LCF)
Feed roller
5
Rollers
6
Are the roller and shaft secured?
Check and tighten the E-rings, pins, clips
and setscrews.
Registration roller
7
Is the spring detached from the registration roller?
Attach the spring correctly. Clean the roller
if it is dirty.
Pre-registration
guide
Carriage-1
8
Is the pre-registration guide properly
installed?
Is the carriage-1 slanted?
Correct it.
9
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Adjust the carriage-1.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 118
05/11
Feeding direction
12) Black banding (in the feeding direction)
Step
Check items
Scanner
Defective area
1
Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.
Shading correction
plate
2
Is there a foreign matter on the light
path?
Is there dust or stains on part of the
original glass where the shading
correction plate is placed.
Main charger grid
3
Is there a foreign matter on the grid?
Remove the foreign matter.
4
Is the grid dirty or deformed?
Clean or replace the grid.
5
Is there a foreign matter on the main
charger?
Is the charger wire dirty or
deformed?
Remove the foreign matter.
Is there a foreign matter inside the
charger case?
Is the inside of the charger case
dirty?
Is there paper dust sticking to the
cleaning blade edge?
Is the cleaning blade working properly?
Remove the foreign matter.
Has the used toner been recovered
properly?
Is the fuser roller surface dirty or
damaged?
Clean the toner recovery auger.
13
Is the thermistor dirty?
Clean the thermistor.
Drum
14
Are there scratches on the drum
surface?
Replace the drum.
Laser optical unit
15
Is there a foreign matter or stain on
the slit glass?
Remove the foreign matter or the stain.
Main charger
6
7
8
Cleaner
9
10
11
Fuser unit
12
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Prescription
Clean the plate.
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Clean the inside of the case.
Clean or replace the cleaning blade.
Check the pressurization of the drum
cleaning blade.
Clean or replace the fuser roller.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 119
05/11
5
Feeding direction
13) Black banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Main charge wire
1
Is the charger wire dirty or
deformed?
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Fuser unit
2
Are the fuser roller, separation finger
and thermistor dirty?
Has the cleaning roller for the pressure roller reached its PM life?
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Clean them.
5
Is there a deep scratch on the drum
surface?
Replace the drum if the scratch has
reached the aluminum base.
6
Is there thin scratch (drum pitting)
on the drum surface?
Check and adjust the contact condition of
the cleaning blade and recovery blade.
7
Is there a foreign matter on the carriage rail?
Remove the foreign matter.
3
High-voltage transformer
(Main charger /
Developer bias /
Transfer charger)
Drum
Scanner
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace it.
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 120
Feeding direction
14) White spots
Defective area
Developer unit /
Toner cartridge
Developer material/
Toner/ Drum
Step
Check items
1
Is the toner density in the developer
material appropriate?
2
Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper?
Adjust it.
3
Using the specified developer material, toner and drum?
Use the specified developer material, toner
and drum.
4
Have the developer material and
drum reached their PM life?
Replace the developer material and drum.
5
Is the storage environment of the
toner cartridge 35°c or less without
dew?
Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment with specification.
6
Is there any dent on the drum surface?
Is there any film forming on the
drum?
Replace the drum.
Is there any foreign matter on the
charger?
Is the charger wire dirty or
deformed?
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Remove it.
Is there any foreign matter such as
fiber in the paper transport area of
the transfer/separation charger?
Clean the charger.
7
Main charger
8
9
High-voltage transformer (Main
charger / Developer
bias / Transfer
charger)
Transfer/Separation charger
10
11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Prescription
Check and correct the auto-toner sensor
and toner supply operation.
Check if the amount of the toner is sufficient in the toner cartridge.
Clean or replace the drum.
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 121
5
Feeding direction
15) Poor image transfer
Defective area
Paper
Transfer charger
Step
Check items
Prescription
1
Is the paper in the drawer or LCF/
PFP curled?
Reinsert the paper with the reverse side up
or change the paper.
2
Is the paper in the drawer or LCF
damp?
Avoid storing paper in damp place.
3
Select the proper mode.
4
Is the paper type corresponding to
its mode?
Using the recommended paper?
Use the recommended paper.
5
Is the transfer charger case dirty?
Clean it.
6
Is the transfer charger wire dirty?
Registration roller
7
Is there any abnormality related to
the registration roller or with the
roller itself?
Clean it.
Clean the roller if it is dirty. Securely attach
the springs if they are detached. Replace
the clutch if it is defective. Adjust the rotation speed of the roller.
High-voltage transformer (Transfer
charger)
8
Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Adjust the output, or replace the transformer.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 122
Feeding direction
16) Uneven image density
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Main charger
1
Is the main charger dirty?
Clean or replace the charger wire/grid.
Transfer charger
2
Is the transfer charger dirty?
Clean it.
3
Is the transfer charger wire dirty?
Clean it.
Laser optical unit
4
Remove the foreign matter or stain.
Discharge LED
5
Is there any foreign matter or stain
on the slit glass?
Is the discharge LED dirty?
Clean it.
6
Is any of the discharge LEDs off?
Remove it.
7
Is the magnetic brush in proper con- Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
tact with the drum?
8
Is the developer sleeve pressurization mechanism working?
Is the developer material transported normally?
Is the platen cover or RADF
opened?
Check the mechanism.
Are the original glass (especially the
position of shading correction plate),
mirror and lens dirty?
Clean them.
Developer unit
9
Scanner section
10
11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Remove foreign matters if there is any.
Close the platen cover or RADF.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 123
5
Feeding direction
17) Faded image (low density, abnormal gray balance)
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Toner empty
1
Is “ADD TONER” symbol lit?
Replace the toner cartridge.
Auto-toner circuit
2
Is there enough toner in the cartridge?
Check the performance of the auto-toner
circuit.
3
Is the toner density in the developer
material too low?
Toner motor
4
Is the toner motor working normally?
Check the motor drive circuit.
Toner cartridge
5
Replace the toner cartridge.
Developer material
6
Is there any problem with the toner
cartridge?
Has the developer material reached
its PM life?
Developer unit
7
Is the magnetic brush in proper con- Check the installation of the developer
tact with the drum?
unit. Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap and
polarity.
8
Is the developer sleeve pressurization mechanism working?
Check the mechanism.
Main charger
9
Is the main charger dirty?
Clean it or replace the charger wire/grid.
Drum
10
Clean or replace the drum.
11
Is “film-forming” occurring on the
drum surface?
Has the drum reached its PM life?
Replace the drum.
Transfer charger
12
Is the transfer charger wire cut off?
Replace the transfer charger wire.
High-voltage transformer
13
Is the setting for the high-voltage
transformer proper?
14
Are the connectors of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is
the harness open circuited?
Adjust the output from the high-voltage
transformer.
Reconnect the harness securely. Replace
the high-voltage harness.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace the developer material.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 124
Feeding direction
18) Image dislocation in feeding direction
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Scanner/Printer
adjustment
1
Have the printed images been dislo- Adjust the position of the leading edge of
cated in the same manner?
paper in the Adjustment Mode.
Registration roller
2
Is the registration roller dirty, or the
spring detached?
Clean the roller with alcohol. Securely
attach the springs.
3
Is the registration roller working
properly?
Adjust or replace the gears if they are not
engaged properly.
Feed clutch
4
Is the feed clutch working properly?
Check the circuit or clutch, and replace
them if necessary.
Pre-registration
guide
5
Is the pre-registration guide installed
properly?
Install the guide properly.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 125
5
Feeding direction
19)Jittering image
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
—
1
Is the toner image on the drum normal?
If normal, perform steps 2 to 4. Perform
step 5 and followings in case the image is
abnormal.
Registration roller
2
Check the registration roller area and
springs for installation condition.
Fuser roller and
pressure roller
3
Is the registration roller rotating normally?
Are the fuser roller and pressure
roller rotating normally?
Drum
4
Is there a big scratch on the drum?
Replace the drum.
Operation of carriage
5
Is there any problem with the slide
sheet?
Is there any problem with the carriage foot?
Replace it.
Is the tension of the timing belt normal?
Is there any problem with the drive
system of the carriage?
Is the mirror secured?
Adjust the tension.
6
7
8
Scanner
9
Drum drive system
10
Is there any problem with the drive
system of the drum?
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the fuser roller area. Replace the
rollers if necessary.
Replace it.
Check the drive system of the carriage.
Secure it.
Check the drive system of the drum. Clean
or replace the gears if they have stains or
scratches.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 126
Feeding direction
20) Poor cleaning
Defective area
Step
Check items
Developer material
1
Using the specified developer material?
Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Cleaner
2
Is the blade in proper contact with
the drum?
Check the blade.
3
Has the cleaning blade been turned
up?
Replace the blade.
Check and replace drum if necessary.
Toner recovery
auger
4
Is the toner recovered normally?
Clean the toner recovery auger.
Check the pressure of the cleaning blade.
Fuser unit
5
Is the cleaning roller damaged or
has it reached its PM life?
Are there bubble-like scratches on
the fuser roller (125mm pitch on the
image)?
Has the fuser roller reached its PM
life?
Is the pressure of the fuser roller
normal?
Replace the roller.
Is the setting temperature of the
fuser roller normal?
Check the setting and correct it. 08-410:12
(200°C) 08-411:12 (200°C)
6
7
8
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Prescription
Replace the fuser roller. Check and adjust
the temperature control circuit.
Replace it.
Check and adjust the mechanism.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 127
5
Feeding direction
21) Uneven light distribution
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Original glass
1
Is the original glass dirty?
Clean it.
Main charger
2
Clean or replace them.
Discharge LED
3
Are the main charger wire, grid and
case dirty?
Is the discharge LED dirty?
Clean it.
4
Is any of the discharge LEDs off?
Replace the discharge LED.
Scanner
5
Are the reflector, exposure lamp,
mirrors, lens, and original glass
(especially the position of shading
correction plate) dirty?
Clean them.
Exposure lamp
6
Is the exposure lamp tilted?
Adjust the position of the lamp.
7
Is the lamp discolored or degraded?
Replace it.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 128
Feeding direction
22) Blotched image
Defective area
Step
Paper
1
Separation
Transfer
High-voltage transformer
(Transfer charger)
Check items
Prescription
Is the paper type corresponding to
its mode?
Check the paper type and mode.
2
Is the paper too dry?
Change the paper.
3
Is the output from the separation
charger too high?
Adjust the output.
4
Is the transfer charger case dirty?
Clean the case.
5
6
Is the transfer charger wire dirty?
Is the output from the high-voltage
transformer normal?
Clean the wire.
Adjust the output. Replace the transformer
if necessary.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 129
5
5.3
Replacement of PC Boards and HDD
When the HDD requires replacement, refer to "5.3.1 Replacing HDD".
When the SYS board requires replacement, refer to "5.3.2 Replacing SYS board".
5.3.1
Replacing HDD
<CAUTION IN REPLACING HDD>
When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing and to
recover them after replacing.
Notes:
1. To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users’ data/information
in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.
2. Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
The procedure for replacing the HDD is as follows.
(1)
Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibility and the measure of the backup.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Image data in the Electronic Filing
- Archive them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
F-code information, Template registration information, Address book
- Back them up in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Department management data
- Export them in “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Log data (Print, Scan, FAX (Transmission/Reception))
- Export them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot be performed.)
Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)
- Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to
the client computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)
Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)
- Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be
kept.)
Print job (Private print data, Schedule print data)
- If any jobs are left, print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
FAX saved data (Confidential / Bulletin board data)
- Print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission)
- The data cannot be backed up.
(2)
Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” (content of Function Mode (13) setting)
list.
• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
• Press the [LIST] button.
• Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.
(3)
Print out the “FUNCTION” list.
• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
• Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
• Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
• Press the [FUNCTION] button. The list is outputted.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 130
(4)
Replace the HDD.
(5)
Update of HDD program data and UI data.
• Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON. When “Firmware Version Up
Mode” appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] button.
• Update with the USB storage. See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for details.
• Format the HDD. (Setting Mode (08-690: 2))
* When the FAX unit (GD-1150/1200) is installed. Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
Perform the 1*-100 (FAX Set Up), 1*-102 (Clearing the image data) of the FAX Clearing
Mode.
• Perform the gamma automatic adjustment of the printer. See “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment” for details.
(6)
Ask users to reset the user’s setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
• Printer driver
- Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• F-code information, Template registering information, Address book
- Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess
• Department management data
- Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• Image data in the Electronic Filing
- Upload them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
(7)
Referring to the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting.
• Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. (Refer to the
procedure of (2).)
• While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
• Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting
items having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
• Turn the power OFF.
(8)
Referring to the “FUNCTION” list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the
default setting of the FAX function.
• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
• Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
• Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
• Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 131
5.3.2
Replacing SYS board
<<CAUTION IN REPLACING the SYS board>>
Perform the following procedures and settings when the SYS board is replaced.
<After replacing the SYS board>
(1)
Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2)
Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3)
(4)
Install NIC board to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board). (e-STUDIO350/450)
Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
* See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for the details of System ROM update.
(5)
Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(6)
When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
* SRAM is cleared
* If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
• When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of settings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
•
When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
(7)
[If a scrambler board has already been installed]
Perform 08-698 (Entering the key code for scrambler board). Have the user enter the key code.
(8)
Perform 08-200 (date and time setting) to set Date/Time.
(9)
Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the number on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995. (e-STUDIO352/452)
(10) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information). (e-STUDIO352/452)
(11) Turn the power OFF.
* If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (13).
(12) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 132
(13) Perform 1*-102 (Clearing the image data).
Notes:
Following image data are deleted when 1*-102 is performed.
• Images of fax polling transmission
• Images of fax Mailbox and box information
• Images of fax transmission
• Images of fax reception
(14) Turn the power OFF.
(15) Turn the power OFF.
(16) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS]
[ADMIN]
[FAX]
[INITIAL SETUP]
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 133
5.3.3
Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed, follow the cautions below.
<<Caution when disposing of the HDD>>
Be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD data clearing) before disposing of the HDD of the equipment.
* When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and
erased.
<<Caution when disposing of the SYS board>>
Before the SYS board is disposed, the following codes can be performed.
• 08-1427 (Forcible NVRAM data all clearing)
• 08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing)
Caution:
If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up.
5.3.4
HDD information display
This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer
-
Model name
HDD serial number
Items supported differ depending on the HDD manufacturer.
"---" is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 134
2) Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-180 or 120 occurred).
ID
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
Result
VALUE
0
0
From 1 to 999
0
Any value
1 or more
Either one is at
least 1000.
All values are displayed as "-------".
Description
Diagnosis
Low possibility of physical failure
HDD replacement
is not required.
Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered.
HDD replacement
is not required.
High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a
possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.)
HDD replacement
is recommended.
High possibility of physical failure
HDD replacement
is recommended.
High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness
or SYS board may be one of the causes.)
HDD replacement
is recommended.
3) ID=05 and c5
ID
Name
Description
Remarks
05
Re-allocated Sector Count
The number of sectors reassigned
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
c5
Current Pending Sector Count
The number of candidate sectors to
be reassigned
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
5
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 135
4) Description of each ID
ID
Name
Meaning
01
Read Error Rate
This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
02
Throughput Performance
This attribute is a measure of the throughput performance.
03
Spin Up Time
This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to
spin up from a spun down condition.
04
Spin Start/Stop Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups
from a spun down condition.
05
Re-allocated Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated
sectors.
07
Seek Error Rate
This is a measure of the seek error rate.
08
Seek Time Performance
This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance during normal online operations.
09
Power-On Hours
This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a
Spin Retry Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
0c
Power Cycle Count
This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive
has been turned on.
c0
Power off Retract Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency
unloads.
c1
Load Cycle Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/
unloads.
c2
Temperature
This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the HDD.
c3
ECC On the Fly Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On
the Fly.
c4
Reallocation Event Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallocation events.
c5
Current Pending Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate
sectors to be reallocated.
c6
Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7
Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate)
This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8
Write Error Rate
This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 TROUBLESHOOTING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 136
6.
FIRMWARE UPDATING
In this equipment, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.
Firmware
Stored
Master data (HDD program data, UI data)
Hard disk
System ROM (System firmware, OS data, UI data)
System control PC board (SYS board)
Engine ROM (Machine firmware)
Logic PC board (LGC board)
Scanner ROM (Scanner firmware)
Scanning section control PC board (SLG board)
NIC ROM (NIC firmware)
(e-STUDIO350/ 450 only)
NIC board
RADF ROM (RADF firmware)
RADF control PC board (MR-3015/ MR-3018)
Finisher ROM (Finisher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1023/ MJ-1024/ MJ-1101)
Finisher ROM (Saddle stitcher firmware)
Finisher control PC board (MJ-1024)
FAX ROM (FAX firmware)
FAX board (GD-1150/ GD-1200)
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions.
<e-STUDIO350/450>
• Updating with the download jig
! P. 6-2 "6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450)"
• Updating with PC connected
! P. 6-60 "6.3 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO350/450)"
• Updating with the USB Storage Device
! P. 6-73 "6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450)"
<e-STUDIO352/452>
• Updating with the download jig
! P. 6-33 "6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/452)"
• Updating with the USB Storage Device
! P. 6-85 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/452)"
Notes:
• Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC
board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the NIC board and
FAX board. The latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control
PC board and finisher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware
version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.
• The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When
the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and
then write the suitable version of the firmware.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-1
05/11
6
6.1
Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board. And three
types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Firmware
Download jig
Stored
Individual update
Batch update
Master data
Hard disk
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
-
System ROM
System control PC board
(SYS board)
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320 or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control
PC board (SLG board)
K-PWA-DLM-320 or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
NIC ROM
NIC board
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
RADF ROM
RADF control PC board
(MR-3015)
K-PWA-DLM-320
-
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1023/MJ-1024)
K-PWA-DLM-320
-
Finisher ROM (Saddle
stitcher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1024)
K-PWA-DLM-320
-
FAX ROM
FAX board (GD-1150)
K-PWA-DLM-320
-
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
! P. 6-4 "6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
! P. 6-10 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)"
! P. 6-21 "6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320"
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-2
05/11
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig. 6-1
Fig. 6-2
Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)
Important:
• The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) has two types having different ROM capacity.
ROM capacity for each jig is as follows.
*
Download jig
ROM capacity
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
8 MB x 6
Updating the master data
Application
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
8 MB x 2
Updating the system ROM, engine ROM, scanner ROM, NIC ROM
“PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)” is substitutable for “PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)”
•
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is different from the existing jigs. The ROM is
installed on the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required
to write the data to these ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
! P. 6-19 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
Connector
Mark for ROM
installation direction
LED
ROM
Fig. 6-3
Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-3
6
6.1.1
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
The master data written on the hard disk can be updated by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB).
Update the master data according to the need such as the case of replacing the hard disk.
The data to be overwritten are as follows.
• HDD program data (RIP data, list data, Web data, filing box control data)
• UI data (fixed section data, common section data, the language 1 to 7 data, the language 1 to 6 data
for Web)
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• Use the download jig “PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)”.
• Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
(1)
Write the data to the download jig.
! P. 6-19 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
(2)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3)
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-4
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-5
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
6
Fig. 6-6
(6)
Turn ON the power.
Downloading starts automatically and the processing status is displayed on LCD screen.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-5
(7)
“Update Completed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig.
(9)
Perform the “Updating System ROM” continuously.
! P. 6-10 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)" <Updating System ROM>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-6
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-7
[C] Display during the update
The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update..
The device check starts.
When the device check completes, copying the
data to HDD starts.
Copied
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
Total files
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6-8
When copying all the files completes, the
backup of the RIP font starts.
When the backup of the RIP font completes,
the update completes with the following
screen.
6
*
If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
Error message
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6-9
6.1.2
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)
The firmware of the equipment except the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in a
batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board, scanning
section control PC board, or NIC board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating System ROM>
• System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
• OS data (FROM basic section software)
• UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
<Updating NIC ROM>
NIC ROM data
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• Use the download jig “PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)”.
(“PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)” is substitutable.)
• Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.
! P. 6-19 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-7
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 10
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-8
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
6
Fig. 6-9
(6)
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 11
(7)
Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update it individually.
<Updating System ROM>
Select “1. OS Update”, “2. UI Update”, and “3. System Firmware”.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Select “6. Machine Firmware Update” only.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Select “5. Scanner Firmware Update” only.
<Updating NIC ROM>
Select “4. NIC Firmware Update” only.
Example: Updating the system ROM (Updating the system ROM is taken as an example and
explained.)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 12
(8)
Press the [START] button.
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
(9)
“Update Completed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
6
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 13
*
When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
below. Turn OFF the power and then check the above-mentioned items. After confirming
them, select only “4. NIC Firmware Update” and restart updating from the beginning. This
may complete the updating properly.
NIC error message
If the updating of the NIC firmware is still failed, check the prescription corresponding to the error
message. After confirming and clearing the problem, restart updating from the beginning.
NIC Error Message
Error Contents
Prescription
NIC UPDATE FAILED 1
NIC initialization time-out
The IP address may not be assigned correctly.
• Is the IP address assigned correctly?
• Does the IP address conflict with the
other system?
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC
board because it may be destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 2
ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may be disconnected.
• Is the HDD cable connected correctly?
If the HDD cable is connected correctly,
replace the SYS board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 3
HDD partition mount error
Replace the HDD because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 4
NIC setting information
backup error
Replace the HDD because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 5
NIC firmware transfer error
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 6
NIC firmware writing error
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 7
NIC status time-out
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 14
04/10
(11) Perform the initialization of the updating data (NVRAM updating).
a. Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
b. Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
c. Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating NIC ROM>
08-916: NIC ROM version
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 15
04/10
[C] Display during the update
The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example,
the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.)
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
Press [START] button after selecting the item
to be updated. The device check starts.
When the device check completes, erasing the
data in the ROM of the equipment starts.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 16
When erasing the data completes, copying the
data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
When copying the data completes, verifying
the data starts.
6
When verifying the data completes, copying
and verifying the other data are implemented
repeatedly.
When copying and verifying all the data complete, the update completes with the following
screen.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 17
*
If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 18
6.1.3
Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) differs from the existing jigs in that the Flash ROM is
mounted on the board of the jig directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to
write data to these Flash ROMs. Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter
to write data. For the procedure to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of
each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter
(PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-10
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer
ROM writer adapter
Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP
(or equivalent)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940
(or equivalent)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
(model 1881)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
(model 1931)
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
Fig. 6-11
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 19
6
[A] Precaution when writing the data
• Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
• When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written
• The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the
data (file) to be written
.
Rotary
Switch
File Name
Flash ROM
Master Data (PWA-DWNLD350-JIG2)
System, Engine, Scanner and NIC data
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1)
1
ROM. bin
ROM. bin
ROM1
2
1
Sysfirm. bin
ROM2
3
2
N/A
ROM3
4
3
N/A
ROM4
5
4
N/A
ROM5
6
N/A
N/A
ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 20
04/07
6.1.4
K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM date
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM date
<Updating RADF ROM>
RADF ROM date
<Updating Finisher ROM>
• Finisher firmware
• Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating FAX ROM>
FAX ROM date
[A] Update Procedure
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
• Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
<Updating Engine ROM>
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-3 "Fig. 6-3").
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 21
6
(3)
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-12
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-13
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-14
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 22
(7)
When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 23
<Updating Scanner ROM>
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-3 "Fig. 6-3").
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
(3)
Take off the right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Fig. 6-15
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-16
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 24
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).
Connector
Fig. 6-17
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 25
6
<Updating RADF ROM (MR-3015)>
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-3 "Fig. 6-3").
(2)
(3)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
Take off the RADF rear cover.
RADF rear cover
Fig. 6-18
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN14) on the RADF control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-19
(5)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(6)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 26
05/11
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1023/1024)>
Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the finisher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to
the finisher control PC board.
Tip:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
• MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.
• MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-3 "Fig. 6-3").
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
(3)
Take off the finisher rear cover.
Finisher rear cover
Finisher rear cover
*
(4)
Fig. 6-20
Fig. 6-21
[MJ-1023]
[MJ-1024]
Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-22
(5)
Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 27
05/11
6
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
Fig. 6-23
<Updating Finisher Firmware>
Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>
Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 28
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-24
Processing status
LED
LED103
LED102
LED101
0% or above
OFF
OFF
ON
15% or above
OFF
ON
OFF
30% or above
OFF
ON
ON
45% or above
ON
OFF
OFF
60% or above
ON
OFF
ON
75% or above
ON
ON
OFF
90% or above
ON
ON
ON
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
• Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download section (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(9)
Install the finisher rear cover.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 29
6
<Updating FAX ROM>
Important:
• Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number information. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
• Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the “MEMORY RX” LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Print the “Mailbox/Relay box report” and then confirm that there are no F code data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-3 "Fig. 6-3").
(2)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3)
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-25
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-26
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 30
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig. 6-27
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(9)
In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 31
6
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating RADF ROM>
08-907: RADF ROM version
<Updating Finisher ROM>
08-908: Finisher ROM version
<Updating FAX ROM>
08-915: FAX ROM version
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 32
6.2
Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/452)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board.
And two types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Firmware
Download jig
Stored
Batch update
PWA-DWNLD-350JIG2 (48 MB)
Individual update
System ROM
System control PC board
(SYS board)
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC
board
(SLG board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
RADF ROM
RADF control PC board
(MR-3018)
-
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1023/MJ-1024/MJ-1101)
-
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Saddle stitcher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1024)
-
K-PWA-DLM-320
FAX ROM
FAX board (GD-1200)
-
K-PWA-DLM-320
-
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
! P. 6-35 "6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
! P. 6-44 "6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 33
05/11
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig. 6-28 Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
! P. 6-44 "6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector
Mark for ROM
installation direction
LED
ROM
Fig. 6-29 Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 34
05/11
6.2.1
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
The firmware of the equipment except for the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in
a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board
according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board or
scanning section control PC board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating System ROM>
• System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
• OS data (FROM basic section software)
• UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
(1)
Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.
! P. 6-44 "6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
(3)
Remove the cover plate.
6
Cover plate
Fig. 6-30
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 35
05/11
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig. 6-31
(5)
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 36
05/11
(6)
Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update it individually.
<Updating System ROM>
Select “0. OS Update”, “1. UI Update”, and “2. System Firmware”.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Select “3. Engine Firmware Update” only.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Select “4. Scanner Firmware Update” only.
Example: Updating the system ROM
6
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 37
05/11
(7)
Press the [START] button.
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Status display during update
(8)
Status display when update is completed
OS Update
.......
OS Update
....... Completed
UI Data Update
.......
UI Data Update
....... Completed
SysFirm Update .......
SysFirm Update ....... Completed
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update
Engine MAIN Update .. Completed
Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update.. Completed
“Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 38
05/11
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and cleaning the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.
• Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 39
05/11
6
[C] Display during the update
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
［System ROM］
［Engine ROM］
［Scanner ROM］
0. OS Update
3. Engine Firmware Update
4. Scanner Firmware Update
1. UI Data Update
2. System Firmware Update
Update Completed
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
Select items to be updated and press the
[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Engine ROM] and
[Scanner ROM] in parallel.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 40
05/11
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
6
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is displayed and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 41
05/11
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..Completed”.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware
Update] has been updated, “SysFirm
Update…Completed” is displayed.
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,
“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..Completed”.
When all data has been updated, “Update
Completed” is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 42
05/11
*
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
6
Failed items
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 43
05/11
6.2.2
Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure
to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter
(PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-32
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer
ROM writer adapter
Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP
(or equivalent)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940
(or equivalent)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
Fig. 6-33 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
Fig. 6-34 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 44
05/11
•
Precaution when writing the data
- Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
- When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if
it is not set.
- The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the
data (file) to be written.
RotarySwitch
File Name
Flash ROM
1
firmImage0.bin
ROM1
2
firmImage1.bin
ROM2
3
firmImage2.bin
ROM3
4
N/A
ROM4
5
N/A
ROM5
6
N/A
ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 45
05/11
6.2.3
K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM date
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM date
<Updating RADF ROM>
RADF ROM date
<Updating Finisher ROM>
• Finisher firmware
• Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating FAX ROM>
FAX ROM date
[A] Update Procedure
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
• Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
<Updating Engine ROM>
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-34 "Fig. 6-29").
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 46
05/11
(3)
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-35
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-36
(5)
6
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-37
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 47
05/11
(7)
When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 48
05/11
<Updating Scanner ROM>
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-34 "Fig. 6-29").
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
(3)
Take off the right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Fig. 6-38
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
6
Cover plate
Fig. 6-39
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 49
05/11
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).
Connector
Fig. 6-40
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 50
05/11
<Updating RADF ROM (MR-3018)>
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-34 "Fig. 6-29").
(2)
Turning OFF the power of the equipment.
(3)
(4)
Take off the RADF rear cover.
Connect the download jig with the connector (CN81) on the PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-41
(5)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(6)
When the data rewriting is completed, the LED blinks slowly (at an interval of 0.8 sec.).
If the LED blinks fast (at an interval of 0.1 sec.), the rewriting has been failed. In this case, turn
OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from
the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 51
05/11
6
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1023/ 1024)>
Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the finisher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to
the finisher control PC board.
Tip:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
• MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.
• MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-34 "Fig. 6-29").
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
(3)
Take off the finisher rear cover.
Finisher rear cover
Finisher rear cover
*
(4)
Fig. 6-42
Fig. 6-43
[MJ-1023]
[MJ-1024]
Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-44
(5)
Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 52
05/11
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
Fig. 6-45
<Updating Finisher Firmware>
Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>
Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 53
05/11
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-46
Processing status
LED
LED103
LED102
LED101
0% or above
OFF
OFF
ON
15% or above
OFF
ON
OFF
30% or above
OFF
ON
ON
45% or above
ON
OFF
OFF
60% or above
ON
OFF
ON
75% or above
ON
ON
OFF
90% or above
ON
ON
ON
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
• Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download section (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(9)
Install the finisher rear cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 54
05/11
<Updating Finisher ROM (MJ-1101)>
(1)
Attach the ROM to the download jig
Make sure that the ROM and its direction are correct. (P. 6-34 "Fig. 6-29")
(2)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3)
Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
Board access cover
Fig. 6-47
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.
6
Download jig
Fig. 6-48
(5)
Turn ON the power while pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 55
06/01
(6)
When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking in approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update is failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed.
In this case, turn the power OFF and check the following items.
Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the downloading jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
• Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
• Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
(7)
Turn the power OFF and remove the download jig.
(8)
Install the board access cover.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 56
06/01
<Updating FAX ROM>
Important:
• Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number information. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
• Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the “MEMORY RX” LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Print the “Mailbox/Relay box report” and then confirm that there are no F code data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
(1)
Install the ROM to the download jig.
Make sure the direction is correct (P. 6-34 "Fig. 6-29").
(2)
Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(3)
Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
6
Fig. 6-49
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-50
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 57
05/11
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig. 6-51
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(9)
In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 58
05/11
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating RADF ROM>
08-907: RADF ROM version
<Updating Finisher ROM>
08-908: Finisher main ROM version
<Updating FAX ROM>
08-915: FAX ROM version
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 59
06/06
6.3
Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager)
(e-STUDIO350/450)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the downloaded firmware from the PC connected with the
equipment by using the utility software”FSMS (Field Service Manager)”. Firmware can be also downloaded through USB, in addition to an existing serial transfer through RS-232C.
This chapter explains only the firmware downloading method with FSMS. Refer to the Field Service
Manager Operator’s Manual for the details about installation method and functions of FSMS.
OS:
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Connecting cable:
USB cable or
RS-232C cable
PC:
IBM PC/AT or compatible machine
(USB port or RS-232C port is needed)
Fig. 6-52
Important:
• Updating with USB connection is more recommended since the data transfer speed is lower
and it takes more time to update in the serial connection with RS-232C cable.
Example:
Updating time for system ROM (sysfirm.tz: Approx. 8 MB)
RS-232C connection: Approx. 1 hour and 20 minutes
USB connection: Approx. 10 minutes
* The updating time noted above is a reference. It may vary depending on the performance
of the PC used.
•
•
Updating through USB is not feasible for Windows NT4.0 since this operating system does
not support USB. When this system is used, update in the serial connection with RS-232C
cable.
When updating through USB (using FSMS), a printer driver needs to be installed in the PC in
advance. Refer to the Printing Guide about the installation method of the printer driver.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 60
06/01
The types of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Firmware
Stored
Data file name
Master data
Hard disk
uidata2.tz, uidata3.tz, uidata4.tz, uidata5.tz,
uidata6.tz, uidata7.tz, webdata1.tz,
webdata2.tz, webdata3.tz, webdata4.tz,
webdata5.tz, webdata6.tz, all.tz
System ROM
System control PC board
(SYS board)
sysfirm.tz, uidataF.tz, uidata0.tz, uidata1.tz
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
mfirm.tz
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC board
(SLG board)
scnfirm.tz
NIC ROM
NIC board
nicfirm.tz
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 61
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• Do not operate the equipment or send a print job to the equipment during the update. This
interferes the updating operation and the firmware may not be written properly.
(1)
•
Do not turn OFF the power of equipment or PC during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be continued to function properly.
•
When using FSMS, set “1” at FSMS permission code (08-258) in the Setting Mode (08) in
advance.
•
The data file (tz file format) of each firmware is recommended to save at the local drive in the
PC (C drive, etc.) where FSMS program is installed.
Connect the equipment and PC with the cable.
USB connector (device)
*
*
RS-232C connector
USB cable
RS-232C cable
Fig. 6-53
Fig. 6-54
[USB connection]
[RS-232c connection]
Connect the cable to the RS-232C connector in RS-232C connection after taking off the connector cover of the equipment.
Connect the PC end of the cable to the USB port or RS-232C port on the PC.
(2)
Turn ON the power of the equipment.
Tip:
When updating with FSMS, updating can be performed in any of the normal mode, Adjustment
Mode (05) and Setting Mode (08). To avoid an interruption during the update, using the Setting
Mode (08) is recommended.
(3)
Turn ON the power of the PC.
(4)
Activate FSMS.
Select “TOSHIBA FSMS” starting with the Start menu.
(5)
Enter the login password and click the [OK] button.
* Set the login password at the installation of FSMS.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 62
(6)
Click the [F/W Download] button.
(7)
Select the model name of the equipment to be updated from the drop-down menu and click the
[OK] button.
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 63
(8)
Click the [OFFLINE] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 64
(9)
Select the transmit media and click the [OK] button.
In case of RS-232C connection: Select “Serial”
In case of USB connection:Select “USB”
* The connection status between the printer driver installed in the PC and the equipment to be
connected is displayed only when “USB” is selected. Select the equipment to be updated and
click the [Activate FSMS] button.
Tip:
The content of ”Status” display can be renewed to the latest status by clicking the [Refresh]
button. When the status is displayed as “Disconnected” because the start up of the equipment is
delayed, the status can be renewed to “Connected” by clicking this.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 65
6
(10) Check the firmware to be updated and click the [OK] button.
Tip:
The relation between the types of firmware to be updated and items to check is as follows in the
table below.
Item
Firmware
Program
UI Data
Date file name to update
sysfirm.tz
System ROM
uidataF.tz
Common UI Data
uidata0.tz
1st Language UI Data
uidata1.tz
MROM
Engine ROM
mfirm.tz
Scan ROM
Scanner ROM
scnfirm.tz
NIC ROM
NIC ROM
nicfirm.tz
Generic
Master data
uidata2.tz, uidata3.tz, uidata4.tz, uidata5.tz, uidata6.tz,
uidata7.tz, webdata1.tz, webdata2.tz, webdata3.tz,
webdata4.tz, webdata5.tz, webdata6.tz, all.tz
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 66
(11) Select the data file to be updated and click the [OK] button. There are two data filing methods:
Selecting the multiple data files in a batch (select the folder where the files are saved) and selecting each data file individually.
• Selecting the multiple data files in a batch
a. Select “Download File Folder”.
b. Click the [Browse] button and select the folder where the files are saved.
• Selecting each data file individually
a. Select “File Name Conversion”.
b. Click the [Browse] button of each data and select the file. When “Generic Driver” is used,
Tip:
When selecting the multiple files in a batch, the name of the unselected data file (not saved in the
folder) may be displayed. In this case, click the [OK] button and then the update of all files except
the displayed file starts.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 67
6
(12) The selected data is transmitted to the equipment.
The data file name being transmitted and transmission condition are displayed at the bottom.
Tip:
During transmission, the message “WAIT” or “NOW SERVICING” is displayed on the LCD
screen of the equipment. In this case, all the button operations are locked.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 68
(13) When the data transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. Then click the [OK]
button.
(14) The equipment restarts automatically and the items to be updated and processing status are displayed on the LCD screen.
Number of master data to be updated
Items
(" " is displayed next to the items to be updated.)
Processing staus of each item
Completed : Update completed
... ... ... ... : Updating
(15) “Update Completed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 69
04/10
6
“Update Failed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
• Are the equipment and PC properly connected?
• Is the selected data file proper?
• Do the cable, equipment and PC operate properly?
• Are FSMS and printer driver properly installed?
*
When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
below. Turn OFF the power and then check the above-mentioned items. After confirming
them, select only”NIC ROM” (6. NIC Firmware Update) and restart updating from the beginning. This may complete the updating properly.
NIC error message
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 70
04/10
If the updating of the NIC firmware is still failed, check the prescription corresponding to the error
message. After confirming and clearing the problem, restart updating from the beginning.
NIC Error Message
Error Contents
Prescription
NIC UPDATE FAILED 1
NIC initialization time-out
The IP address may not be assigned correctly.
• Is the IP address assigned correctly?
• Does the IP address conflict with the
other system?
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC
board because it may be destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 2
ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may be disconnected.
• Is the HDD cable connected correctly?
If the HDD cable is connected correctly,
replace the SYS board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 3
HDD partition mount error
Replace the HDD because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 4
NIC setting information
backup error
Replace the HDD because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 5
NIC firmware transfer error
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 6
NIC firmware writing error
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 7
NIC status time-out
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
6
(16) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(17) Perform the initialization of the updating data (NVRAM updating).
a. Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
b. Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
c. Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 71
04/10
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating Master data>
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating NIC ROM>
08-916: NIC ROM version
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 72
6.4
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device
(e-STUDIO350/450)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch. The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below. Also, the data file of each
firmware can be used commonly in the updating methods with USB storage device and Download jig.
Firmware
Stored
Date file name
Master data
Hard disk
1, 2, 3... n
* The file name should be consecutive numbers from
1 to “n” without file extension. The capacity of each
file is approx. 8 MB. However, the file capacity of “n”
(last number) may be less than 8 MB.
System ROM
System control PC
board (SYS board)
sysfirm.bin, ROM.bin
Engine ROM
Logic PC board (LGC
board)
ROM.bin
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC board (SLG
board)
NIC ROM
NIC board
Important:
• The following USB storage devices are recommended for updating.
- MELCO
ClipDrive (RUF-C128M)
- Lexar Media
JumpDrive (RD128-231)
- Iomega
Mini USB Drive (Mini 128MB USB Drive)
•
Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is 64 MB or more
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number:
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
*
Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in this equipment is not always
guaranteed since the most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC
environ ment (Windows or Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is
opera tional in this equipment when purchasing the device.
•
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
•
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 73
05/11
6
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the data file.
• Confirm the data file name before writing
(! P. 6-73 "6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450)").
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
• Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(2)
Turn OFF the power of equipment.
(3)
Take off the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-55
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device
USB connector
(host)
Fig. 6-56
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1010), printer/scanner kit (GM-2010) and scanner upgrade kit
(GM- 3010) are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 74
(5)
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. “*” is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings.)
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item
Condition
0. OS Update
ROM.bin is written.
1. HDD Update
All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update
ROM.bin is written.
3. System Firmware Update
sysfirm.bin and ROM.bin are written.
4. NIC Firmware Update
ROM.bin is written.
5. Scanner Firmware Update
ROM.bin is written.
6. Machine Firmware Update
ROM.bin is written.
6
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the
procedure from (5)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 75
04/10
(6)
Select the item with the digital keys. “*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete
the “*” by pressing the number of the item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update individually.
<Updating Master data>
Select “1. HDD Update” only.
<Updating System ROM>
Select “2. UI Data Update” and “3. System Firmware Update”.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Select “6. Machine Firmware Update” only.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Select “5. Scanner Firmware Update” only.
<Updating NIC ROM>
Select “4. NIC Firmware Update” only.
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM (Updating the master data and system
ROM is taken as an example and explained.)
(7)
Press the [START] button.
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen. When the multiple
items are selected, updating starts in order of item number.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 76
(8)
“Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Tip:
Updating can be continued with another USB storage device on which the firmware data is written in the following procedure when the updating is completed.
a. Confirm the message “Please Connect Next Storage Key. Push ‘START’ Button!!” is displayed
at the bottom of the LCD screen.
b. Replace the USB storage device while the power is left ON.
c. Press the [START] button.
d. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. Continue the updating from
procedure (6). However, the items already updated are not displayed on the screen.
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating (P. 6-73)?
• Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
* When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
below. Turn OFF the power and then check the above-mentioned items. After confirming
them, select only “4. NIC Firmware Update” and restart updating from the beginning. This
may complete the updating properly.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 77
04/10
6
NIC error message
If the updating of the NIC firmware is still failed, check the prescription corresponding to the error
message. After confirming and clearing the problem, restart updating from the beginning.
NIC Error Message
Error Contents
Prescription
NIC UPDATE FAILED 1
NIC initialization time-out
The IP address may not be assigned correctly.
• Is the IP address assigned correctly?
• Does the IP address conflict with the
other system?
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC
board because it may be destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 2
ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may be disconnected.
• Is the HDD cable connected correctly?
If the HDD cable is connected correctly,
replace the SYS board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 3
HDD partition mount error
Replace the HDD because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 4
NIC setting information
backup error
Replace the HDD because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 5
NIC firmware transfer error
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 6
NIC firmware writing error
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
NIC UPDATE FAILED 7
NIC status time-out
Replace the NIC board because it may be
destroyed.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the connector cover.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data (NVRAM updating).
a. Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
b. Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
c. Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 78
04/10
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating Master data>
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
6
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating NIC ROM>
08-916: NIC ROM version
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 79
[C] Display during the update
The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example,
the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.)
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The initial screen is displayed and the recognition of the USB storage device connected to
the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly after 3
minutes, the screen for selecting items is displayed.
Press the [START] button after selecting the
item to be updated. The device check starts.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 80
04/10
When the device check completes, copying the
data to the HDD starts.
6
File name of master data
Copied
Total files
When all files have been copied, the backup of
RIP font starts.
When the backup of RIP font is completed, the
following screen is displayed. Updating the
master data is completed.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 81
Updating the system ROM starts subsequently.
The device check starts.
When the device check completes, copying the
data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
When copying the data completes, copying the
other data are implemented repeatedly.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 82
When copying all the data complete, the
update completes with the following screen.
6
*
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 83
*
If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
Error message
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 84
6.5
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device
(e-STUDIO352/452)
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch.
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Firmware
Master data
Stored
Model specific
folder name
Hard disk
352_452
Data file name
1, 2, 3 ... n
* The file name should be consecutive
numbers from 1 to “n” without file
extension. The capacity of each file
is approx. 8 MB. However, the file
capacity of “n” (last number) may be
less than 8 MB.
System ROM
System control PC board
(SYS board)
firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
firmImage2.bin
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board
(SLG board)
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 85
05/11
Important:
• Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 64 MB to 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- Operation of the USB storage device used for updating has been confirmed at the input
check of this equipment (Test mode 03).
(! P. 2-34 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/452)")
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number:
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color
Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the
most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or
Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equipment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing the device.
•
The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
•
Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
•
Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
•
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
•
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 86
05/11
[A] Update procedure
Important:
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
• Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data
(! P. 6-85 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/452)").
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
• Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(2)
Shut down the equipment.
(3)
Take off the cover plate.
6
Cover plate
Fig. 6-57
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 87
05/11
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector
(host)
USB storage device
Fig. 6-58
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner upgrade kit
(GM- 4060) are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 88
05/11
(5)
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. “*” is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings.)
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item
Condition
0. OS Update
firmImage0.bin is written.
1. HDD Update
All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update
firmImage0.bin is written.
3. System Firmware Update
firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.
4. Engine Firmware Update
firmImage2.bin is written.
5. Scanner Firmware Update
firmImage2.bin is written.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 89
05/11
6
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again within 3 minutes, or turn OFF the
power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored, the following message is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file
stored in the USB storage device is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 90
06/01
(6)
Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update individually.
<Updating OS data>
Select “0. OS Update” only.
<Updating Master data>
Select “1. HDD Update” only.
<Updating System ROM>
Select “2. UI Data Update” and “3. System Firmware Update”.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Select “4. Machine Firmware Update” only.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Select “5. Scanner Firmware Update” only.
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM
6
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 91
05/11
(7)
Press the [START] button.
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Status display during update
OS Update
(8)
.......
Status display when update is completed
OS Update
....... Completed
HD Data Update .......
HD Data Update ....... Completed
UI Data Update
UI Data Update
.......
....... Completed
SysFirm Update .......
SysFirm Update ....... Completed
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update
Engine MAIN Update .. Completed
Scanner Firm Update.. Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update.. Completed
“Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 92
05/11
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating
(! P. 6-85 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/452)")?
• Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
(9)
Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.
• Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 93
05/11
6
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating Master data>
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 94
05/11
[C] Display during the update
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
[System ROM]
[Master data]
[Engine ROM]
[scanner ROM]
0. OS Update
1. HDD Update
4. Engine
Firmware Update
5. Scanner
Firmware Update
2. UI Data Update
3. System
Firmware Update
Update Completed
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 95
05/11
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
The initial screen is displayed and the recognition of the USB storage device connected to
the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly, the
screen for selecting update items is displayed.
Select items to be updated and press the
[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Master Data], [Engine ROM]
and [Scanner ROM] in parallel.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 96
05/11
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
6
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is displayed and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 97
05/11
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..Completed”.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware
Update] has been updated, “SysFirm
Update…Completed” is displayed.
Total files
File name of
master data
Copies
When the [Master Data] has been updated,
“HD Data Update…Completed” is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 98
05/11
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,
“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..Completed”.
When all data has been updated, “Update
Completed” is displayed.
6
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 99
05/11
*
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
*
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Failed items
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
Error message
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 100
05/11
6.6
Appendix
6.6.1
e-STUDIO350/450
[A] Assist Mode
This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1)
NVRAM flag clearing (“Clear NvRAM flags.”)
Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in
the download process with this function.
(Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
(2)
Data storage partition formatting (“Format Loader Partition.”)
When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary.)
(3)
HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
6
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode
(1)
Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
• The following screen is displayed.
(2)
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 101
05/11
6.6.2
e-STUDIO352/452
[A] Assist Mode
This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1)
NVRAM flag clearing (“Clear NvRAM flags.”)
Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in
the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the
download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
(2)
Data storage partition formatting (“Format Loader Partition.”)
When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary.)
(3)
HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode
(1)
Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
• The following screen is displayed.
(2)
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 FIRMWARE UPDATING
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 102
05/11
7.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7.1
Output Channel
The followings are five output channels which are not linked with the door switch.
1) +3.3V
+3.3VA:
+3.3VB:
+3.3VB:
+3.3VB:
2) +5.1V
+5.1VA:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
3) +12V
+12VA:
+12VB:
+12VB:
+12VB:
CN412 Pins 13, 14, 15 and 16
Output to the SYS board
CN412 Pins 19 and 20
Output to the SYS board
CN413 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
CN415 Pins 17 and 18
Output to the SLG board
CN412 Pins 24 and 26
Output to the SYS board
CN412 Pin 25
Output to the SYS board
CN413 Pins 3 and 4
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
CN413 Pin 11
Output to the FIL board or FUS board
CN415 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the RADF
CN415 Pins 21 and 22
Output to the SLG board
CN416 Pin 1
Output to the finisher
CN412 Pin 7
Output to the SYS board
CN412 Pin 5
Output to the SYS board
CN413 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board
CN415 Pin 15
Output to the SLG board
7
4) -12V (e-STUDIO350/450 only)
-12VA:
CN412 Pin 9
Output to the SYS board
-12VB:
CN412 Pin 3
Output to the SYS board
5) +24V (e-STUDIO350/450 only)
+24VB:
CN413 Pin 13
Output to the FAX board
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-1
05/11
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the door switch.
1) +5.1V
+5.1VD:
2) +24V
+24VD1:
+24VD1:
+24VD2:
+24VD3:
+24VD4:
+24VD5:
CN414 Pin 9
Output to the LGC board
CN414 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
CN418 Pin 1
Output to the power supply cooling fan
CN414 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the LGC board, Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC
board)
CN415 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the RADF
CN415 Pins 9 and 10
Output to the SLG board
CN416 Pin 3
Output to the finisher
<Output connector>
1) Not linked with the door switch
CN412
For the SYS board
CN413
For the LGC board, FIL board / FUS board, FAX board (e-STUDIO350/450 only),
PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC
board)
CN415
For the SLG board, RADF
CN416
For the finisher
2) Linked with the door switch
CN414
For the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
CN415
For the SLG board, RADF
CN416
For the finisher
CN418
For the power supply cooling fan
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
7-2
05/11
7.2
Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part
using the following table.
Voltage
+24VD1
Board/Unit
LGC
+24VD2
Power supply
PFP/LCF
LGC
+24VD3
+24VD4
+24VD5
Part
Polygonal motor
ADU motor
Tray-up motor
Laser unit cooling fan
Upper drawer feed clutch
Lower drawer feed clutch
Bypass feed clutch
ADU clutch
Transport clutch (High speed)
Transport clutch (Low speed)
Bypass pickup solenoid
Power supply cooling fan
Exit motor
Main motor
Toner motor
Middle fan
Exhaust fan
Sub-separation fan
Fuser unit cooling fan
IH board cooling fan
Developer unit cooling fan-1
Developer unit cooling fan-2
Auto-toner sensor
Registration clutch
Developer drive clutch
Discharge LED
Key copy counter / Copy key card
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray
RADF
SLG
Scan motor
Exposure lamp (Lamp inverter)
Finisher
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
Fuse type
F3:8A(Semi time-lag)
F4:8A(Semi time-lag)
F5:4A(Semi time-lag)
F6:4A(Semi time-lag)
F7:5A(Semi time-lag)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-3
05/11
7
Neutral
Live
Breaker
Noise
filter
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-4
05/11
FUS board
FIL board
Main switch
*ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard
*MJD model: Option
AC IN
*NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard
AC MAIN
AC DOOR
Door switch
CN411
CN411
F2
Switching
power supply
F1
IH
Noise
filter
Noise
filter
Reg.
Reg.
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
CN412
CN412
CN413
CN415
SYS board
SYS board
LGC board
SLG board
CN413 LGC board
CN415 SLG board
CN412 SYS board
CN413 FAX board (e-STUDIO350/450 only)
-12VB
+24VB
CN412 SYS board
+12VB
+12VB
CN412 SYS board
-12VA
+12VB
CN412 SYS board
+12VA
+5.1VB CN415 SLG board, RADF
+5.1VB CN416 Finisher
+5.1VA CN412 SYS board
+5.1VB CN412 SYS board
+5.1VB CN413 LGC board, FIL board / FUS board,
PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit /
Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
+3.3VA
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
+5.1VD CN414 LGC board
+24VD5 CN416 Finisher
+24VD4 CN415 SLG board
+24VD3 CN415 RADF
+24VD2 CN414 LGC board, Bridge unit / Job separator /
Offset tray (via LGC board)
+24VD1 CN418 Power supply cooling fan
+24VD1 CN414 LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
7.3
Configuration of Power Supply Unit
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8.
REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service.
(1)
Auto Supply Order
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container by FAX or E-mail.
(2)
Service Notification
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
8.1
Auto Supply Order
8.1.1
Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.
(1)
Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
• FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
• E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)
(2)
Order Intervals
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the
specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner container full detection.
(3)
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
If Order Failure Occurs
If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8-1
05/05
8.1.2
Setting Item
To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required.
Note:
When selecting E-mail to place an order, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
(1)
Self-diagnosis (08) Setting
As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel.
To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-765) is required.
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)*
2: Invalid (Default)
When changing the setting value from "2" (default) to "0", the Auto Supply Order setting screen is
displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-2
04/05
(2)
Touch Panel Setting
Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
•
Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER
FAX NUMBER
E-MAIL
CUSTOMER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECNICIAN
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-mail address of supplier (*3)
Customer information
Supplier information
Service technician information
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.
*2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
•
Detailed setting for the order
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]
*
•
•
***** TONER ORDER
Order information (TONER /USED TONER CONTAINER)
PART NUMBER
Part number to be ordered
CONDITIOIN
The number of conditions (*)
QUANTITY
The quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
ON/OFF setting of order for each part
The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
FAX number of this equipment (common information)
[ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME
ID name of this equipment
FAX NUMBER
FAX number of this equipment
8
E-mail information of this equipment (common information)
[ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS
E-mail address of this equipment (*)
FROM NAME
E-mail username of this equipment
*
(3)
When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is
not sent.
Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the
setting list.
[USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8-3
04/05
8.1.3
Setting procedure
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0".
Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
Press the [ADMIN] button.
• When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is
displayed.
(5)
Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
(6)
Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-4
05/05
(7)
The SERVICE screen is displayed.
(8)
Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
(9) Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.
[FAX NUMBER]
Input the FAX number of supplier.
(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not
input the number.)
[E-MAIL]
Input the E-mail address of supplier.
(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do
not input the address.)
(12) Press the [NEXT] button.
(Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.)
(13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER]
Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL]
Input the E-mail address of customer.
[ADDRESS]
Input the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
[ADDRESS]
Input the name of supplier.
Input the address of supplier.
(15) Press the [NEXT] button.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-6
(16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME]
Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER]
Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL]
Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[DESCRIPTION] Input the remarks if you want to register.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8-7
05/05
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.
(22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
(23) Press the [TONER] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8-8
(24) Input the order information of TONER.
[PART NUMBER]
Toner number
[CONDITION]
The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number
specified for the CONDITION.
[QUANTITY]
Quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF]
Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not.
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
(26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
(27) Press the [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information of USED
TONER CONTAINER in the same way of TONER.
8
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information.
(29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING.
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8-9
Note:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
08 code
Contents
The transmitting way of order
[FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF]
732
0: Ordered by FAX
2: Ordered by HTTP
SUPPLIER
[FAX NUMBER]
733
Maximum 32 digits
SUPPLIER
[E-MAIL]
734
Maximum 192 letters
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
738
Maximum 50 letters
CUSTOMER
[TEL NUMBER]
739
Maximum 32 digits
CUSTOMER
[E-MAIL]
740
Maximum 192 letters
CUSTOMER
[ADDRESS]
741
Maximum 100 letters
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
746
Maximum 50 letters
SUPPLIER
[ADDRESS]
747
Maximum 100 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
742
Maximum 5 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NAME]
743
Maximum 50 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[TEL NUMBER]
744
Maximum 32 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[E-MAIL]
745
Maximum 192 letters
Remarks
[DESCRIPTION]
748
Maximum 128 letters
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
764
0: OFF
TONER
[PART NUMBER]
758
Maximum 20 digits
TONER
[CONDITION]
760
1-99
TONER
[QUANTITY]
759
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER
[PART NUMBER]
761
Maximum 20 digits
USED TONER CONTAINER
[CONDITION]
763
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER
[QUANTITY]
762
1-99
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
1: Ordered by E-mail
3: OFF
1: Always
2: ON Error
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 10
04/05
8.1.4
Order Sheet Format
The sample of order sheet is as follows.
(1)
FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME
CUSTOMER NUMBER
CUSTOMER NAME
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL
SUPPLIER NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
:99-99-'99 99:99
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE
BLACK
USED TONER CONTAINER
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
QUANTITY
99
(*1)
99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................
.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NUMBER
DEVICE FAX NUMBER
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER
999999999
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
(2)
E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order
sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
Date&Time: '03-09-12 00:17
Customer Number: svc02
MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450
SerialNumber: CV
Device FAX Number: 1122
Device Email: [email protected]
OrderInformation:
BLACK PartNumber: kuro-01
(*1)
Quantity: 1
CounterInformation:
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:5
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:0
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 11
(3)
Result list
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME
CUSTOMER NUMBER
CUSTOMER NAME
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL
SUPPLIER NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
:99-99-'99 99:99
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE
BLACK
USED TONER CONTAINER
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
QUANTITY
99
(*1)
99
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................
.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NUMBER
DEVICE FAX NUMBER
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER
999999999
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 12
8.2
Service Notification
8.2.1
Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
•
•
•
Total Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and
time every month).
Service Call Transmit (E-mail only)
When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call
error.
PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2
Setting
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-774
Setting of notification display
0: Invalid (Default)
1: Valid
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
• Confirm the password to the administrator.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 13
05/05
(2)
Press the [SERVICE] button.
(3)
Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
(4)
Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION".
• When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffective.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 14
05/05
(5)
Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.
• When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
•
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 15
05/05
(6)
Press the [ON] button to notify or [OFF] button not to notify of each item for E-mail and FAX.
When the Total Count Transmit is set ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure. (The information is notified on the set
date and time every month.)
•
Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in "Date" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the
value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value
by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the
[SET] button is already pressed.)
•
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".
Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the
minute column of "Time" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the value by pressing the
[CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value by pressing the
[RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the [SET] button is
already pressed.)
•
Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure 5).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 16
05/05
(7)
Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
08 code
Contents
Service Notification setting
767
0: OFF (Invalid)
E-mail address 1
768
Maximum 192 letters
1:E-mail
E-mail address 2
777
Maximum 192 letters
E-mail address 3
778
Maximum 192 letters
FAX number
1145
Maximum 32 digits
Total Counter Transmit setting
769
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
Total counter transmission date setting
770
1 to 31
Total counter transmission interval setting (Hour/Hour/
Minute/Minute)
776
00:00-23:59
Service Call Transmit setting
775
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
PM Counter Transmit setting
771
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
2:FAX
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 17
8.2.3
Items to be notified
The items to be notified are shown below.
1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the
same format.)
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)
1
2
3
4
Date
Machine Model
Serial Number
Total Counter
5
6
ChargeCounterFormat:
LargeSizeChargeCount
1
LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
7
8
PMCounterFormat:
LargeSizePMCount
LargeSizePMPaperDefinition
:
:
:
:
10/20/2003 13:47
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450
1234567890
00300000
1
1
Charge Counter:
Large
Small
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
9
10
11
12
<Print Counter>
Copy
Print
List
FAX
13
14
15
<Scan Counter>
Copy Scan
00000000 00000000
FAX Scan
00000000 00000000
Net Scan
00000000 00000000
16
17
<FAX Counter>
Transmit
Receive
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
Periodical Maintenance Counter:
18
19
20
21
22
Set PM
Current PM
Set PMTime
Current PMTime
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Printer Error History:
Date
Time
ErrorCode
----------------------------------------------10/18/2003 16:44
F110
10/15/2003 22:28
F110
(*1)
10/15/2003 22:23
F110
09/15/2003
08/25/2003
22:23
11:12
F110
F110
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 18
05/05
1
Date
2
Machine model name
3
Serial number
4
Total counter value
5
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
6
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
7
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
8
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
9
Number of output pages in the Copier Function
10
Number of output pages in the Printer Function
11
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode
12
Number of output pages in the FAX Function
13
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function
14
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function
15
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function
16
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function
17
Number of received pages in the FAX Function
18
PM count setting value
19
PM count present value
20
PM driving count setting value
21
PM driving count present value
22
History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 19
04/10
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX
*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
NOTIFICATION".
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
1
2
3
4
DATE
MACHINE MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
TOTAL COUNTER
:
:
:
:
05/03/10 13:47
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450
1234567890
00004787
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT
5
6
PM COUNTER FORMAT
LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT
:1
LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION : 1
7
8
LARGE SIZE PM COUNT
:1
LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION : 1
CHARGE COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
9
10
11
12
SCAN COUNTER
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
COPY
PRINT
LIST
FAX
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
13
14
15
FAX COUNTER
16
17
22
COPY SCAN
FAX SCAN
NET SCAN
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
LARGE
SMALL
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
18
19
20
21
SET PM
CURRENT PM
SET PM TIME
CURRENT PM TIME
:00000000
:00000000
:00000000
:00000000
PRINTER ERROR HISTORY
DATE
05/03/09
05/03/05
05/03/05
05/02/15
05/01/25
TIME ERROR CODE
16:44
F110
22:28
F110
22:23
F110
22:23
F110
11:12
F110
DATE
TIME
ERROR CODE
(*2)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 20
05/05
1
Date
2
Machine model name
3
Serial number
4
Total counter value
5
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
6
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
7
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
8
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
9
Number of output pages in the Copier Function
10
Number of output pages in the Printer Function
11
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode
12
Number of output pages in the FAX Function
13
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function
14
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function
15
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function
16
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function
17
Number of received pages in the FAX Function
18
PM count setting value
19
PM count present value
20
PM driving count setting value
21
PM driving count present value
22
History of error
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
8
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 21
05/05
3) Service Call Transmit
Subject: Service Call Notification
1
Date: 10/20/2003 13:47
Machine Name: e-STUDIO450 SerialNumber: 1234567890
2
3
4
5
6
Function: Print
Severity: Error
ErrorCode: XXXX
Message:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7
8
Printer Error History:
Date
Time
ErrorCode
-----------------------------------------10/18/2003 16:44 F110
10/15/2003 22:28 F110
(*1)
10/15/2003 22:23 F110
09/15/2003 22:23
08/25/2003 11:12
F110
F110
1
Date (When an error occurs)
2
Machine model name
3
Serial number
4
Function: Fixed at "Print"
5
Severity: Fixed at "Error"
6
Error code
7
Error message: The content of error is displayed.
8
History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 REMOTE SERVICE
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 22
04/10
9.
DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
(e-STUDIO352/452)
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning
the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been
written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board.
The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method.
This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in
a batch.
Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table.
Storage location
Root directory
Program file name
rootusb, clone_352_452
Important:
• It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
• The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h)
(Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h)
(SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h)
(Bulk-only)
*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equivalent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter values are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-1
05/11
9
[A] Data cloning procedure (Backup)
Important:
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
• Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be damaged and the operation not carried out properly.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
• Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(2)
Write the program file.
• Write the data cloning program into the root directory.
(3)
Shut down the equipment.
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector
(host)
USB storage device
Fig. 9-1
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner kit (GM-4060)
are used, the data must be backed up after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-2
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<User Data Backup>
(5)
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
(6)
Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.
• In case of backup, select one of the following items.
<Backing up User data>
Select "1: User Data Back Up".
<Backing up Setting item>
Select "3: Setting Back Up".
<Backing up SRAM data>
Select "5: SRAM Data Back Up".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(7)
Press the [1] button.
The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
backed up are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
9
Fig. 9-3
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-3
05/11
(8)
Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To back up the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
• To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Backing up Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
< Backing up Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Backing up 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Backing up Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
< Backing up User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-4
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.)
(9)
Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-5
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-6
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-5
05/11
<Setting Backup>
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-7
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(14) Press the [3] button.
The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed
up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-8
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-6
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(15) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Backing up Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.)
(16) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-9
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-7
05/11
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-10
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
<SRAM Data Backup>
(19) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(20) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-11
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-8
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(21) Press the [5] button.
The screen to select the SRAM data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
backed up is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-12
(22) Select the item to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To back up the data individually, select the following item.
<Backing up SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)
(23) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
9
Fig. 9-13
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9-9
05/11
(24) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-14
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 10
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[B] Data cloning procedure (Restore)
Important:
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
• Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be damaged and the operation not carried out properly.
(1)
Shut down the equipment.
(2)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector
(host)
USB storage device
Fig. 9-15
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner kit (GM-4060)
are used, the data must be restored after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 11
05/11
<User Data Restore>
(3)
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-16
(4)
Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.
• In case of restore, select the following items.
<Restoring User data>
Select "2: User Data Restore".
<Restoring Setting item>
Select "4: Setting Restore".
<Restoring SRAM data>
Select "6: SRAM Data Restore".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(5)
Press the [2] button.
The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
restored are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
Fig. 9-17
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 12
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(6)
Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To restore the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
• To restore the data individually, select the following items.
Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually.
<Restoring Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Restoring Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
< Restoring Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Restoring 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Restoring Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
<Restoring User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-18
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 13
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.)
(7)
Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-19
(8)
"Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-20
(9)
Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] ![ADMIN] !Enter the password !
[COUNTER] ![DEPARTMENT SETTING] !Enter the password ![RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 14
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
<Setting Restore>
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-21
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(13) Press the [4] button.
The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-22
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 15
05/11
9
(14) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To restore the data individually, select the following items.
<Restoring TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Restoring Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Restoring Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
Note:
Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were
backed up.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)
(15) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-23
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 16
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-24
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
<SRAM Data Restore>
(18) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(19) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-25
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 17
05/11
9
(20) Press the [6] button.
The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-26
(21) Select the item to be restored with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
• To restore the data individually, select the following item.
<Restoring SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)
(22) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-27
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 18
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-28
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 19
05/11
[C] Confirmation of the error
"Back Up ERROR X" (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have
not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following
items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
• Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged?
Fig. 9-29
Error number
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR 3
ERROR 4
ERROR 5
ERROR 6
ERROR 7
ERROR 8
ERROR 9
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
Error content
Copy error
I/F error
USB memory full error
Working folder error
File not found error
Security error
Checksum error
Model check error
Version check error
Destination check error
Serial number check error
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 20
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
[D] Backup file
Backed up data files are encrypted.
<User data file>
The folder "user_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
Address book
Mailbox
Template
Back up the Address book, Mailbox and Template in a batch
Department management information
User management information
File name
BACKUP_ADDR.sct
BACKUP_MBOX.sct
BACKUP_TEMP.sct
BACKUP_ALL.sct
BACKUP_Department.sct
BACKUP_User.sct
<Setting data file>
The folder "setting_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
Network / Print service
SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX
Notification setting
Directory Service
FAX setting
Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth setting
File name
network.sct
scan.sct
notice.sct
ldap.sct
fax.sct
wl.sct, bl.sct
<SRAM data file>
The folder "sram_data" is created in the root directory and the following file is stored in it.
Data item
File name
SRAM
*
sram.sct
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item
File name
user_data.txt
setting_data.txt
sram_data.txt
User data
Setting item data
SRAM data
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
•
File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common)
Line 1: Version
Line 2: Serial number
Line 3: Date
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 21
05/11
9
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/452)
9 - 22
05/11
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
MJD MODEL:
OPTION
CN431
AC(L)
4
PWA-F-FUS
INLET
(AC IN)
MAIN
GND
RY
G
F
AC(L:MAIN)
AC(N:MAIN)
NF
4
3
AC(N)
AC(L)
SAD,TWD NAD
MODELS:
STANDARD
NS-FIL
(NOISE FILTER)
2
1
J656
2 2
3 3
1 1
J662
CN432
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN432
1
2
3
4
5
6
PWA-F-FIL
CN433
3
2
1
RY
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
2 2
1 1
J581
CN528
1 3
2 2
SG
3 1
+5.1VB
(OPTION)
+5V
WIRELESS LAN
AC ADAPTER
CN433
3
2
1
1
2
SG
3
BREAKER
+5.1VB
N
A
GND
B
L
C
CN493
AC(L)
1
2
J655
J582
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
LOAD
J653
AC(N:OUT)
AC (GND)
AC(L:OUT)
3
AC(N)
4
CN494
AC(L)
4
FG
AC(N)
3
2
1
CN495
+5.1VB
1
2
SG
3
ASD,AUD,CND
MODELS:
STANDARD
AC(N)
3
10 - 1
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
4
2
SG
+5.1VB
J541
3
1
4
3
COV-INTLCK-SW
2
1
J598
2 2
1 1
J606
A
CN451
AC(N:SCN DH)
AC(L:SCN DH)
AC(N:DRM DH)
AC(L:DRM DH)
PS-IH
SCANNER
J641 J60
2
1
J635
J463
J462
2
J583
1
6
3
4
J411
1
J61
J62
THERMO-SCN-DH
THERMO-DRM-DH
CN454
DH-SCN-N
1 1
DH-SCN-L
2 2
J644
2
1
J607
B
CN450
CN453
AC-IN-THM(N)
AC-IN-THM(N)
AC-IN-THM(N)
AC-IN(L)
AC(L:DOOR)
AC(N:DOOR)
AC(L:MAIN)
AC(L:MAIN)
J604
AC(N:MAIN)
AC(N:MAIN)
OPENING/CLOSING
(COVER
)
INTERLOCK SWITCH
MAIN-SW
(MAIN-SWITCH)
AC(N:DRM DH)
AC(L:DRM DH)
AC(N:SCN DH)
AC(L:SCN DH)
AC(L)
AC(N)
1 1
2 2
J63
J64
1 1
2 2
CN413
11
12
+5.1VB
SG
NAD,MJD MODELS:
OPTION
ASD,AUD,SAD,
TWD,CND MODELS:
STANDARD
FUSER
DC
SCN-L-DH
SCN-R-DH
IH-COIL
THERMO-FSR
AC-DC
DC
PS-ACC
AC-DC
DRM-DH
F1
F2
NF
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
NF
e-STUDIO350/450 only
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10.1 AC Wire Harness
10
Fig. 10-1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10 - 2
November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC
H
G
F
E
D
C
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SCRAMBLER BOARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J428
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J429
A
PCI SLOT(1)
1
J425
LDFC-1
1
LDFC-2
2
LDFC-4
3
LDFC-5
4
LDFC-6
5
LDFC-7
6
LDFC-8
7
LDFC-9
8
LDFC-10
9
LDFC-11
10
LDFC-12
11
LDFC-13
12
LDFC-15
13
LDON0
14
LDON1
15
SG
16
J426
SCN15
1
SCN14
2
SCN13
3
SCN12
4
SCN11
5
RET0
6
RET1
7
RET2
8
RET3
9
RET8
10
RET9
11
J424
FRAWE
1
LOAD
2
CP
3
SG
4
+5.1VA
5
SG
6
VEE
7
D.OFF
8
D0
9
D1
10
D2
11
D3
12
J422
YD
1
XL
2
XR
3
YU
4
J423
CCFL+
1
2
CCFL3
PCI SLOT(0)
PWA-F-DSP
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
J427
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
COIN CONTROLLER/
COPY KEY CARD
(OPTION)
XSCL-1A
LP-1A
WE-1A
YP-1A
SG
BZON-0A
CPPOW-0A
LDCLKA
LDDAT-0A
LDLTH-0A
LDON1-0A
LDON0-0A
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
RSTCP-0A
SG
RTS1-0A
CTS1-0A
SOUT0-1A
SIN0-1A
SG
UD3-1A
UD2-1A
UD1-1A
UD0-1A
SG
LCDEN-1A
PCI
J527
J523
J526
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
CN150
CN126
L/S
1
FULL-C
2
MONO-C
3
B/W
4
+5.1VA
5
SG
6
NC
7
CN118
XSCL-1A
1
LP-1A
2
WF-1A
3
YD-1A
4
INVGND
5
BZON-0A
6
CPPOW-1A
7
LDCLK-1A
8
LDDAT-1A
9
LDLTH-1A
10
LDON1-0A
11
LDON0-0A
12
SG
13
+5.1VA
14
+5.1VA
15
+5.1VA
16
+5.1VA
17
CPRST-0A
18
SG
19
RTS0-0A
20
CTS0-0A
21
SOUT[0]
22
SIN[0]
23
SG
24
UD3-1A
25
UD2-1A
26
UD1-1A
27
UD0-1A
28
SG
29
LCDEN-1A
30
CN124
+3.3VA
1
+3.3VA
2
+3.3VA
3
SG
4
-12VA
5
-12VA
6
+5.1VA
7
+5.1VA
8
+3.3VA
9
OPBINT(2)
10
OPBINT(0)
11
SG
12
PCICLK(5)
13
SG
14
PCICLK(3)
15
SG
16
REQ(1)#
17
REQ(0)#
18
+3.3VA
19
AD[31]
20
AD[29]
21
SG
22
AD[27]
23
AD[25]
24
+3.3VA
25
C/BE(3)#
26
AD[23]
27
SG
28
AD[21]
29
AD[19]
30
+3.3VA
31
AD[17]
32
C/BE(2)#
33
SG
34
IRDY#
35
+3.3VA
36
DEVSEL#
37
SG
38
LOCK#
39
PERR#
40
+3.3VA
41
SERR#
42
+3.3VA
43
C/BE(1)#
44
AD[14]
45
SG
46
AD[12]
47
AD[10]
48
M66EN
49
SG
50
AD[8]
51
AD[7]
52
+3.3VA
53
AD[5]
54
AD[3]
55
SG
56
AD[1]
57
+3.3VA
58
+5.1VA
59
SG
60
+3.3VA
61
+3.3VA
62
+3.3VA
63
SG
64
+12VA
65
+12VA
66
+5.1VA
67
+5.1VA
68
+3.3VA
69
OPBINT(1)
70
+3.3VA
71
PCIRST#
72
+3.3VA
73
PCICLK(4)
74
+3.3VA
75
GNT(1)#
76
GNT(0)#
77
SG
78
PME#
79
AD[30]
80
+3.3VA
81
AD[28]
82
AD[26]
83
SG
84
AD[24]
85
+3.3VA
86
+3.3VA
87
AD[22]
88
AD[20]
89
SG
90
AD[18]
91
AD[16]
92
+3.3VA
93
FRAME#
94
SG
95
TRDY#
96
SG
97
STOP#
98
+3.3VA
99
+3.3VA
100
SG
101
SG
102
PAR
103
AD[15]
104
+3.3VA
105
AD[13]
106
AD[11]
107
SG
108
AD[9]
109
SG
110
C/BE(0)#
111
+3.3VA
112
AD[6]
113
AD[4]
114
SG
115
AD[2]
116
AD[0]
117
+3.3VA
118
+5.1VA
119
+5.1VA
120
CN120
VBUS
1
D2
D+
3
SG
4
VBUS
5
D6
D+
7
SG
8
CN119
VBUS
1
D2
D+
3
SG
4
CN109
TXD
1
RXD
2
RTS
3
DSR
4
DTR
5
CTS
6
CNT
7
SG
8
CN172
2
3
2
7
6
4
8
1
5
NC
9
CN108
STB
1
DATA0
2
DATA1
3
DATA2
4
DATA3
5
DATA4
6
DATA5
7
DATA6
8
DATA7
9
NACK
10
BUSY
11
PERROR
12
SELECT
13
NATFD
14
NC
15
SG
16
FG
17
LOGIC
18
SG
19
SG
20
SG
21
SG
22
SG
23
SG
24
SG
25
SG
26
SG
27
SG
28
SG
29
SG
30
NINIT
31
NFAULT
32
NC
33
NC
34
NC
35
NSELIN
36
A
CN112
/RESET
1
SG
2
DD7
3
DD8
4
DD6
5
DD9
6
DD5
7
DD10
8
DD4
9
DD11
10
DD3
11
DD12
12
DD2
13
DD13
14
DD1
15
DD14
16
DD0
17
DD15
18
SG
19
NC(KEY)
20
MDARQ
21
SG
22
/DIOW
23
SG
24
/DIOR
25
SG
26
IORDY
27
SG
28
/DMACK
29
SG
30
INTRQ
31
NC(RESERVED)
32
DA1
33
/PDIAG
34
DA0
35
DA2
36
/CS0
37
/CS1
38
/DASP
39
SG
40
STANADARD
CN113
+12VA
1
SG
2
SG
3
+5.1VA
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN170
1
2
3
4
CN171
HDD
CN116
SG
1
DQ0
2
DQ1
3
DQ2
4
DQ3
5
+3.3VA
6
DQ4
7
DQ5
8
DQ6
9
DQ7
10
DQ8
11
SG
12
DQ9
13
DQ10
14
DQ11
15
DQ12
16
DQ13
17
+3.3VA
18
DQ14
19
DQ15
20
NC
21
NC
22
SG
23
NC
24
NC
25
+3.3VA
26
/WE
27
DQMB0
28
DQMB1
29
/CS0
30
NC
31
SG
32
A0
33
A2
34
A4
35
A6
36
A8
37
A10
38
BA1
39
+3.3VA
40
+3.3VA
41
CLK0
42
SG
43
NC
44
/CS2
45
DQMB2
46
DQMB3
47
NC
48
+3.3VA
49
NC
50
NC
51
NC
52
NC
53
SG
54
DQ16
55
DQ17
56
DQ18
57
DQ19
58
+3.3VA
59
DQ20
60
NC
61
NC
62
CKE1
63
SG
64
DQ21
65
DQ22
66
DQ23
67
SG
68
DQ24
69
DQ25
70
DQ26
71
DQ27
72
+3.3VA
73
DQ28
74
DQ29
75
DQ30
76
DQ31
77
SG
78
CLK2
79
NC
80
NC(WP)
81
SDA
82
SCL
83
+3.3VA
84
SG
85
DQ32
86
DQ33
87
DQ34
88
DQ35
89
+3.3VA
90
DQ36
91
DQ37
92
DQ38
93
DQ39
94
DQ40
95
SG
96
DQ41
97
DQ42
98
DQ43
99
DQ44
100
DQ45
101
+3.3VA
102
DQ46
103
DQ47
104
NC
105
NC
106
SG
107
NC
108
NC
109
+3.3VA
110
/CAS
111
DQMB4
112
DQMB5
113
/CS1
114
/RAS
115
SG
116
A1
117
A3
118
A5
119
A7
120
A9
121
A11
122
BA0
123
+3.3VA
124
NC(CLK1)
125
A12
126
SG
127
CKE
128
/CS3
129
DQMB6
130
DQMB7
131
NC(A13)
132
+3.3VA
133
NC
134
NC
135
NC
136
NC
137
SG
138
DQ48
139
DQ49
140
DQ50
141
DQ51
142
+3.3VA
143
DQ52
144
NC
145
NC
146
NC
147
SG
148
DQ53
149
DQ54
150
DQ55
151
SG
152
DQ56
153
DQ57
154
DQ58
155
DQ59
156
+3.3VA
157
DQ60
158
DQ61
159
DQ62
160
DQ63
161
SG
162
NC(CLK3)
163
NC
164
SA0
165
SA1
166
SA2
167
+3.3VA
168
PWA-F-SYS
Board to Board
J3
CN14
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
+5.1VB
1
+5.1VB
2
SG
3
SG
4
CCDRS
5
SG
6
CCDCP
7
SG
8
CCDSH
9
SG
10
CCDCK2B
11
SG
12
CCDCK2A
13
SG
14
CCDCK1A
15
SG
16
CCD-EVEN
17
SG
18
CCD-ODD
19
SG
20
AG
21
AG
22
AG
23
+12VB
24
+12VB
25
+12VB
26
CN600
TXOUT2
1
+5VA
2
+12VB
3
+3.3VB
4
MOD2DMA-1
5
SG
6
MEM2CS-0
7
+5.1VB
8
MEMRD2-0
9
CLKOE-1
10
TXEN2-1
11
+5.1VB
12
A[16]
13
A[14]
14
A[12]
15
A[10]
16
A[8]
17
A[6]
18
A[4]
19
A[2]
20
A[0]
21
+5.1VB
22
CEP1RST-0
23
+5.1VB
24
SG
25
CEPCLK
26
SG
27
D[0]
28
D[2]
29
D[4]
30
D[6]
31
D[8]
32
D[10]
33
D[12]
34
D[14]
35
SG
36
MOD2DET-0
37
SG
38
DREQC2-1
39
DACKC2-0
40
RXIN2
41
AG
42
-12VB
43
AG
44
MD2INT-1
45
MOD2CS-0
46
MOD2RST-0
47
SG
48
RXEN2-1
49
MEMWRH2-0
50
MEMWRL2-0
51
A[18]
52
A[17]
53
A[15]
54
A[13]
55
A[11]
56
A[9]
57
A[7]
58
A[5]
59
A[3]
60
A[1]
61
CPURST-0
62
CEP2INT-1
63
+5.1VB
64
+5.1VB
65
IORD2-0
66
IOWR2-0
67
D[1]
68
D[3]
69
D[5]
70
D[7]
71
D[9]
72
D[11]
73
D[13]
74
D[15]
75
+5.1VB
76
+5.1VB
77
CEP2CS-0
78
DREQD2-1
79
DACKD2-0
80
CN702
+24VB
3 1
PG
2 2
NC
1 3
3
JPD MODEL ONLY
J558
NC
NC
1 3
PG
PG
2 2
+24VB
+24VB
3 1
MDM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
CN401
FAX(OPTION)
PWA-F-CCD
B
J151
J152
TRST#
A1
+12VA
A2
TMS
A3
TD1
A4
+5.1VA
A5
INTA#
A6
INTC#
A7
+5.1VA
A8
RESERVED
A9
+3.3VA
A10
RESERVED
A11
A12
A13
+3.3VAUX
A14
RST#
A15
+3.3VA
A16
GNT#
A17
SG
A18
RME#
A19
AD[30]
A20
+3.3VA
A21
AD[28]
A22
AD[26]
A23
SG
A24
AD[24]
A25
IDSEL
A26
+3.3VA
A27
AD[22]
A28
AD[20]
A29
SG
A30
AD[18]
A31
AD[16]
A32
+3.3VA
A33
FRAME#
A34
SG
A35
TRDY#
A36
SG
A37
STOP#
A38
+3.3VA
A39
RESERVED
A40
RESERVED
A41
SG
A42
PAR
A43
AD[15]
A44
+3.3VA
A45
AD[13]
A46
AD[11]
A47
SG
A48
AD[09]
A49
SG
A50
SG
A51
C/BE(0)#
A52
+3.3VA
A53
AD[06]
A54
AD[04]
A55
SG
A56
AD[02]
A57
AD[00]
A58
+3.3VA
A59
REQ64#
A60
+5.1VA
A61
+5.1VA
A62
-12VA
B1
TCK
B2
SG
B3
TD0
B4
+5.1VA
B5
+5.1VA
B6
INTB#
B7
INTD#
B8
PRSNT1#
B9
RESERVED
B10
PRSNT2#
B11
B12
B13
RESERVED
B14
SG
B15
CLK
B16
SG
B17
REQ#
B18
+3.3VA
B19
AD[31]
B20
AD[29]
B21
SG
B22
AD[27]
B23
AD[25]
B24
+3.3VA
B25
C/BE(3)#
B26
AD[23]
B27
SG
B28
AD[21]
B29
AD[19]
B30
+3.3VA
B31
AD[17]
B32
C/BE(2)#
B33
SG
B34
IRDY#
B35
+3.3VA
B36
DEVSEL#
B37
SG
B38
LOCK#
B39
PERR#
B40
+3.3VA
B41
SERR#
B42
+3.3VA
B43
C/BE(1)#
B44
AD[14]
B45
SG
B46
AD[12]
B47
AD[10]
B48
M66EN
B49
SG
B50
SG
B51
AD[08]
B52
AD[07]
B53
+3.3VA
B54
AD[05]
B55
AD[03]
B56
SG
B57
AD[01]
B58
+3.3VA
B59
ACK64#
B60
+5.1VA
B61
+5.1VA
B62
Board to Board
CN9
PG
1
PG
2
LMPON-A
3
+24VD4
4
+24VD4
5
1
2
3
4
5
CN20
LP-EXPO
A4
SERIES
ONLY
FAX
INV-EXP
M
SCAN-MOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
APS1
APS2
APS3
APS-C
APS-R
J34
2
1
PWA-F-NIC
4
+5VAPS
APS2
SG
+5VAPS
APS1
SG
J30
3
2
1
J29
3
2
1
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
MAD[11]
MAD[13]
MAD[15]
MAD[17]
ROMDT
+5.1VB
LED
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
MAD[12]
MAD[14]
MAD[16]
MAD[18]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
PNLCS
PNLDT1
PNLDT3
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
MRD
PNLDT0
PNLDT2
+5VAPS
APS3
SG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
+5VAPS
APSC
SG
NC
+24VD4
FANSLG
+5VAPS
APSR
SG
J32
3
2
1
CN502
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NC
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NC
21
NC
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
NC
29
NC
30
(OPTION)
RADF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN22
B7
B8
B9
B4
B5
B6
B1
B2
B3
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
CN10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FG
CN1
CN701
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
NC
50
4
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CN6
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN4
CN602
D[0]
1
D[2]
2
D[4]
3
D[6]
4
RD-0
5
A[0]
6
A[2]
7
A[4]
8
A[6]
9
A[8]
10
A[10]
11
A[12]
12
A[14]
13
A[16]
14
A[18]
15
SG
16
SG
17
D[1]
18
D[3]
19
D[5]
20
D[7]
21
BOOTCS-0
22
A[1]
23
A[3]
24
A[5]
25
A[7]
26
A[9]
27
A[11]
28
A[13]
29
A[15]
30
A[17]
31
ROMDET0-0
32
+5.1VB
33
LEDDL-0
34
J31
3
2
1
J33
3
2
1
+5.1VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
CN501
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
EXTHOOK
+5.1VB
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG
RESERVED
NCU
(2)
NCU
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN503
1
2
+
-
Board to Board
SPEAKER
CN21
(OPTION)
LCD
BACK LIGHT
TOUCH
PANEL
LCD PANEL
PWA-F-KEY
PC I/F(IEEE1284)
RS-232C
(D-sub 9pin)
USB
DEVICE
USB HOST
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
AG
+12VB
PG
PG
+24VD4
+24VD4
DOWNLOAD JIG(FAX)
FG
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J38
CN102
SYSRST
1
SCTS
2
STXD
3
SRXD
4
SRTS
5
SCNT
6
SG
7
SVDEN
8
SDCLK
9
SHDEN
10
SG
11
SG
12
SCD7
13
SCD6
14
SCD5
15
SCD4
16
SCD3
17
SCD2
18
SCD1
19
SCD0
20
CN101
+5.1VB
1
DA1
2
+5.1VB
3
DD0
4
+5.1VB
5
DD3
6
+5.1VB
7
DD6
8
+5.1VB
9
DD9
10
SG
11
DD12
12
SG
13
SG
14
SG
15
SG
16
SG
17
SG
18
+3.3VB
19
INTRQ
20
+3.3VB
21
+5.1VA
22
-12VB
23
SG
24
+12VB
25
DA0
26
DA2
27
IDECS
28
DD1
29
DD2
30
DD4
31
DD5
32
DD7
33
DD8
34
DD10
35
DD11
36
DD13
37
DD14
38
DD15
39
/DIOR
40
/DIOW
41
/DMACK
42
/DLDCS0
43
/RESET
44
DMARQ
45
NC
46
FXWP
47
SG
48
SG
49
NC
50
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
J40
CN122
PWR-DN
26
PWR-EN
25
SG
24
-12VB
23
SG
22
+12VB
21
SG
20
+12VA
19
SG
18
-12VA
17
SG
16
SG
15
+3.3VA
14
+3.3VA
13
+3.3VA
12
+3.3VA
11
SG
10
SG
9
+3.3VB
8
+3.3VB
7
SG
6
SG
5
+5.1VA
4
SG
3
+5.1VA
2
+5.1VB
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN415
SG
24
SG
23
+5.1VB
22
+5.1VB
21
SG
20
SG
19
+3.3VB
18
+3.3VB
17
SG
16
+12VB
15
NC
14
NC
13
PG
12
PG
11
+24VD4
10
+24VD4
9
CN117
+5.1VB
A1
CBSY-0
A2
CMD-0
A3
SACK-0
A4
SERR-0
A5
SBSY-0
A6
STS-0
A7
CACK-0
A8
CERR-0
A9
SG
A10
SG
A11
SG
A12
IRCLK-1
A13
SG
A14
IHSYNC-0
A15
SG
A16
IVSYNC-0
A17
MCNT-1
B1
SYSRST-0
B2
IDATX[0]
B3
IDATX[1]
B4
IDATX[2]
B5
IDATX[3]
B6
IDATX[4]
B7
IDATX[5]
B8
IDATX[6]
B9
IDATX[7]
B10
SG
B11
IDCLK-1
B12
SG
B13
IHDEN-0
B14
SG
B15
IVDEN-0
B16
+3.3VB
B17
CN412
DOWNLOAD JIG(LGC)
CN418
+24VD1
1
PWRFN-0A
2
CN416
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
+24VD5
3
PG
4
CN414
+24VD1
1
+24VD1
2
PG
3
PG
4
+24VD2
5
+24VD2
6
PG
7
PG
8
+5.1VD
9
SG
10
CN413
+3.3VB
1
SG
2
+5.1VB
3
+5.1VB
4
SG
5
SG
6
+12VB
7
SG
8
PDWN-1A
9
PWRFN-0A
10
+5.1VB
11
SG
12
+24VB
13
PG
14
LAN(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
CN100
SG
SG
/WRX
RMSL
+3.3VA
/CS0
DWNLED
A02
A04
A06
A08
A10
A12
A14
A16
A18
A20
DATA15
DATA13
DATA11
DATA9
DATA7
DATA5
DATA3
DATA1
SG
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
CS7-B
CS7-A
RDX
A03
A05
A07
A09
A11
A13
A15
A17
A19
A21
DATA14
DATA12
DATA10
DATA8
DATA6
DATA4
DATA2
DATA0
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J2
(TD+)FA1
1
(TD-)FA2
2
(RD+)FA3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DOWNLOAD JIG(SYS)
A
J45
CN19
SCNM-BB
1
+24VD4
2
SCNM-B
3
SCNM-AB
4
+24VD4
5
SCNM-A
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
PLTNSNR
J36
SG
3
PLTN
2
+5.1VB
1
J35
SG
3
HOME
2
+5.1VB
1
HOMESNR
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
DOWNLOAD JIG(SLG)
CN7
J37
PWA-F-SYS
FA45
FA45
(RD-)FA6
FA78
FA78
NC(MTG)
NC(MTG)
SH
SH
SH
SH
PS-ACC
3
CN2
Board to Board
Board to Board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
SG
DFTXD
SG
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
DFCNT
2
PWA-F-SLG
5
+
-
PWA-F-LGC
PS-FAN-MOT
J528
+5.1VB
1 1
NC
NC
2 2
SG
3 3
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN307
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
CN321
CN312
D[0]
1
D[2]
2
D[4]
3
D[6]
4
RD-0
5
A[0]
6
A[2]
7
A[4]
8
A[6]
9
A[8]
10
A[10]
11
A[12]
12
A[14]
13
A[16]
14
A[18]
15
SG
16
SG
17
D[1]
18
D[3]
19
D[5]
20
D[7]
21
CS2-0
22
A[1]
23
A[3]
24
A[5]
25
A[7]
26
A[9]
27
A[11]
28
A[13]
29
A[15]
30
A[17]
31
ROMDT-0
32
+5.1VB
33
ROMLD-1
34
5
RLC2S-0
+5.1VB
RLHSW-0
RLTRS-0
JSPSW-0
RLCNT-0
OPCHK1
RLCSW-0
SG
JFSL2ON
GASOL-0A
+24VD2
PG
OFFSET2
OFFSET1
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+5VSW
+24VD2
1 11
FUSSW-1A
MTH+-1A
MTH--1A
ETH+-1A
ETH--1A
+5.1VB
EXTSW-1A
+5VSW
THM-2
THMSS-HTR
THM-1
THMSC-HTR
PS-IH
SG
MAMCK-1A
+5.1VB
SG
MAMON-0A
MAMCW-0A
MAMBK-0A
MAMPL-1
M
9 9
5 5
1 1
J582
CN301
PG
8
PG
7
PG
6
PG
5
+24VD2
4
+24VD2
3
+24VD2
2
+24VD2
1
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
DEVFN-0A
+24VD2
CN431
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
PWA-F3
FUS
4
CN495
+5.1VB
1
2
SG
3
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
JPD,ASD,AUD,CND
MODELS :STANDARD
MJD MODEL :OPTION
NAD,SAD,TWD
MODELS :STANDARD
J527
POLFN-0A
2
LSU-FAN-MOT
+24VD1
1
J505
+5.1VB
1
SG
2
MAMON-0A
3
MAMCK-0A
4
MAMCW-0A
5
MAMPL-0A
6 MAIN-MOT
NC
7
PG
8
PG
9
+24VD2
10
+24VD2
11
MAMBK-0A
12
J549
2
DEV1 FAN-MOT1
J554
2
DEV-CLT
1
A9
A8
DEVCL-0A
A11
+24VD2
A10
J504
2
RGT-CLT
1
J507
1
2 RGST-SNR
3
J533
1
TNR-MOT
2
PWA-FFIL
+5.1VB
4 3
PSTPC-1
5 2
SG
6 1
J506
1
2 FED-U-SNR
3
J550
+5.1VB
1 6
CUFED-1
2 5
SG
3 4
+5.1VB
CUFED-1
SG
+5.1VB
PSTPC-1
SG
NC
NC
RGTCL-0A
+24VD2
J509
1
2 FED-L-SNR
3
+5.1VB
3 3
CLFED-1
4 2
SG
5 1
J508
1 SIDE-COVSW
2
TNR-SW
+5.1VB
CLFED-1
SG
J542
SG
1 5
SDCSW-1
2 4
J553
BTLSW-1
1
2
SG
3
TNRMT-1A
A13
TNRMT-0A
A12
B3
B2
B1
A17
A16
A15
A14
B6
B5
B4
B9
B8
B7
SG
B11
SDCSW-1
B10
B12
BTLSW-1
J638
1
USD-TNR2
FLL-SNR1
3
J513
1
IHFAN-MOT
2
CN318
NC
B17
+5.1VB
B16
TBFL-1
B15
SG
B14
B13
M
M
6
M
M
M
M
M
M
(OPTION)
EXITMOT
JOB SEPARATOR/
OFFSET TRAY/
BRIDGE UNIT
J510
+24VD2
1
EXTMA-0A
2
EXTMB-0A
3
EXTMC-0A
4
EXTMD-0A
5
+24VD2
6
J640
1
FUSFAN-MOT
2
J621
1
EXIT-SNR
2
3
CN456
IH1ON
1
SG
2
NC
3
H1ERR1
4
H1ERR2
5
CN455
IH2ON
1
+5VSW
2
H1PWR1
3
H1PWR2
4
H1PWR3
5
H2PWR1
6
H2PWR2
7
H2PWR3
8
J565
2
DEV1 FAN-MOT2
J548
+5.1VB
1 3
TBLF-1
2 2
SG
3 1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J512
J552
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SG
4 8
+24VD2
3 9
FUSFN-0A
2 10
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
J511
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
J520
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN320
DV2FN-0A
2
+24VD2
1
e-STUDIO350 ONLY
CPSW2-0
B18
SG
B19
+24VD2
B16
IHFN-0A
B17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A13
CN302
FUSSW-1A
A1
MTH+-1A
A2
MTH--1A
A3
ETH+-1A
A4
ETH--1A
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
+5.1VB
A8
EXTSW-1
A9
SG
A10
+24VD2
A11
FUSFN-0A
A12
CN316
IH2ON-0A
A1
+5VSW
A2
H1PWR1-0
A3
H1PWR2-0
A4
H1PWR3-0
A5
NC
A6
NC
A7
NC
A8
NC
A9
NC
B1
H2PWR1-0
B2
H2PWR2-0
B3
H2PWR3-0
B4
IH1ON-0A
B5
SG
B6
NC
B7
H1ERR1-0
B8
H1ERR2-0
B9
6
ADUSET-SW
CN216
1
2
NC
3
4
5
CN311
CN217
SG
1
2
COVSW
2
1
ADU-MOT
CN215
1
2
3
4
5
J630
SG
3
SFBSW
2
+5.1VB
1
J628
CLSFB
2
+24VD1
1
J629
COLSFB
2
+24VD1
1
J632
+5.1VB
1
SFBFED
2
SG
3
FINISHER
+5.1VB
1 1
SG
2 2
+24VD5
3 3
PG
4 4
CN531
(OPTION)
BYPASS UNIT
J619
SFSZ3-0
1
SFSZ2-0
2
SFSZ1-0
PWA-F-SFB 3
SFSZ0-0
4
SG
5
SFB-SNR
SFBFEED-CLT
SFB-SOL
SFBFED-SNR
CN526
1
2
3
4
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
24
27
29
CN525
FG
FG
1 5
2 4
3 3
4 2
5 1
J507
J631
3 1
2 2
1 3
NC
J600
RXD
1
SG
2
TXD
3
SG
4
5
6
NC
7
8
F-CNT
9
CNT-GND
10
FG
CN211 CN562
ADCOV-1
1
ADTR1-1
2
ADCNT-1
3
SG
4
+5.1VB
PWA5
ADTR2-1
F-ADU
6
CRT-DOWNA
7
ADM2A-0A
8
ADM2C-0A
9
ADM2B-0A
10
ADM2D-0A
11
CN212 CN563
+24VD1
1
+24VD1
2
PG
3
PG
4
J599
RXD
1
SG
2
TXD
3
SG
4
FG
5
F-CNT
6
CNT-GND
7
+5.1VB
8
SG
9
NC
10
+24VD5
11
PG
12
AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT
M
+24VD1
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
CN214
1
2
3
CN328
SG
3
ADUFU
2
+5.1VB
1
ADUTRU-SNR
CN213
1
2
3
J564
ADUCL-0
2
+24VD1
1
J312
SG
3
ADUFL
ADU2
TRL-SNR
+5.1VB
1
ADU-CLT
PFP/LCF
(OPTION)
(OPTION)
COINCONTROLLER
COPY KEY CARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
13
14
15
16
17
18
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
CN545
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN501
NC
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
CN314
B16
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/FO00
I/O02
I/O04
I/O06
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VB
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O01
I/O03
I/O05
I/O07
SG
OE
IPRST-0A
+5.1VB
SG
FG
24
23
22
21
20
19
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CN313
SFSZ3
SFSZ2
SFSZ1
SFSZ0
SG
SG
NC
SFSSW
+5.1VB
SFBFED-1
SG
SOLSFB-0A
+24VD1
SFBCL-0A
+24VD1
SG
SWBSW-1
+5.1VB
CN304
NC
18
ADUCL-0
17
+24VD1
16
ADCOV-1
15
ADTR1-1
14
ADCNT-1
13
SG
12
+5.1VB
11
ADTR2-1
10
CRT-DOWNA
9
ADM2A-0A
8
ADM2C-0A
7
ADM2B-0A
6
ADM2D-0A
5
+24VD1
4
+24VD1
3
PG
2
PG
1
FG
LCCNT-0
CN303
CLKC-1A
A1
CLKB-1A
A2
SCSWC-0A
A3
DRV7-1A
A4
DRV6-1A
A5
DRV5-1A
A6
DRV4-1A
A7
DRV3-1A
A8
DRV2-1A
A9
DRV1-1A
A10
DRV0-1A
A11
PFRST-0
A12
+5.1VB
A13
SG
A14
+24VD1
A15
+24VD1
A16
PG
B1
PG
B2
SIZE0-0A
B3
SIZE1-0A
B4
SIZE2-0A
B5
SIZE3-0A
B6
RETS0-0A
B7
RETS1-0A
B8
RETS2-0A
B9
RETS3-0A
B10
RETS4-0A
B11
RETS5-0A
B12
RETS6-0A
B13
RETS7-0A
B14
SCSWB-0A
B15
BKCTR-0
MNCTR-0
FLCTR-0
SG
TSIZE3
TSIZE2
TSIZE1
TSIZE0
+5.1VB
CTRCNT2
+24VD2
CTRON-0A
CTRCNT-0
MCRUM-0
EXTCTR-0
PG
7
CURGC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
NC
+24VD1
PG
HVTM-0A
HVMVR-1A
HVTD-0A
HVDVR-1A
HVTT-0A
HVTVR-1A
HVTGB-0A
HVTSP-0A
HVSAV-1A
HVTSTS
+24VD2
ERSLP-0A
+24VD2
MIIDFN-0A
+24VD2
EXTFN-0A
+5.1VB
B11
HMS-1A
B12
SG
B13
TEMP-1
B14
NC
B15
+24VD2
B7
SPFN-0A
B8
NC
B9
NC
B10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
DRTH-0A
SG
FRDSW-0
SG
RSTSW-0A
+24VD2
SG
TBNFL-1
+5.1VB
CN317
ATSSW-0
A1
ATSVR-1A
A2
+24VD2
A3
ATS-1A
A4
SG
A5
SG
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
J557
J577
J576
J517
J516
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
PS-HVT
SG
CLFLS-0
+5.1VB
NC
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUFLS-0
+5.1VB
NC
CURGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
NC
SG
CUEMP-1
+5.1VB
CN206
SG
1
+5.1VD
2
+5.1VD
3
SG
4
WRLVL-1
5
SG
6
NC
7
SG
8
PIDT-1
9
PIDT-0
10
SG
11
WRAPC-0
12
NC
13
SHDWM-1
14
SG
15
+5.1VD
16
+5.1VD
17
SG
18
CN207
BDIN -1
3
SG
2
+5.1VB
1
1
2
3
4
5
PWAF-SNS
EMPU-SNR
EMPL-SNR
NEMPU-SNR
NEMPL-SNR
J515
1
TRY-MOT
2
J620
3
2
1
J521
2
CST-LFEED-CLT
1
J519
3
CST-L2
TRY-CLT
1
J518
3
2
1
J620
3
2
1
J521
2
CST-UFEED-CLT
1
J519
3
CST-U2
TRY-CLT
1
J518
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PWA-F-LDR
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CN201
1
2
3
CN202
J203
POMCK-0
5
POMPL-0
4
POMON-0
M/DC-POL
3
PG
2
+24VD1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B1
B2
B3
B10
B9
B8
4
3
2
1
6
5
8
7
5
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
B8
B9
B10
J556
B3
B2
B1
B4
B5
B6
B7
NC
A9
NC
A10
B7
B6
B5
B4
A7
A8
A2
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A4
A3
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
1 SEPARATION BIAS
2
1
4
3
2
1
J538
3
4
1
2
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS
OUT6 1
J535
1 TRANSFER BIAS
OUT5 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
1 DEVELOPER BIAS
OUT4 1
THMSDRM
8
J540
+5.1VB
1
HMS-1A
2
TEMP/
SG
3 HUMI-SNR
TEMP-1
4
J541
RSTSW-0A
2
MAIN-SW
+24VD2
(RESET)
1
J543
FRDSW-0
2
FRNTSG
COV-SW
1
J534
+24VD2
2
LP-ERS
ERSLP-0A
1
J544
+24VD2
1
SPSPFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J503
+24VD2
1
EXTEXTFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J539
+24VD2
1
MIDMIDFN-0A
FAN-MOT
2
J562
SG
1
USD-TNRTBNFL-1
2
FLL-SNR2
+5.1VB
3
J547
DRTH-0A
2
SG
1
J546
ATSVR-1A
1
+24VD2
2
ATTNR-SNR
ATS-1A
3
SG
4
M
M
M
CHARGER CASE BIAS
1 MAIN CHARGER GRID
OUT3 1
FG
1 MAIN CHARGER WIRE
OUT2 1
M
M
OUT1 1
J524
1
CST-L-SW
2
J514
1
CST-U-SW
2
J522
1
CST-TRH-CLT
2
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
J529
CFEDC-0A
+24VD1
CN551
NC
NC
NC
NC
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(OPTION)
KEY COPY COUNTER
J523
1
CST-TRL-CLT
2
SG
A11
CLSW-0
A12
NC
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
5
4
3
2
1
CN204
4
3
2
1
J532
8
CUTRC-0B
+24VD1
SG
A9
CUSW-0
A10
A7
A8
A5
A6
CN306
NC
A1
NC
A2
CLTRM-0A
A3
CLTRM-1A
A4
SG
B9
CLFLS-0
B10
+5.1VB
B11
B7
B8
B4
B5
B6
B1
B1
B3
SG
A9
CUFLS-1
A10
+5.1VB
A11
A7
A8
A4
A5
A6
CN305
SG
A1
CUEMP-1
A2
+5.1VB
A3
CN309
SG
1
+5.1VD
2
+5.1VD
3
SG
4
WRLVL-1
5
SG
6
BDIN-1
7
SG
8
PIDT-1
9
PIDT-0
10
SG
11
WRAPC-0
12
+5.1VB
13
SHDWM-1
14
SG
15
+5.1VD
16
+5.1VD
17
SG
18
CN308
POMPL-0
1
POMON-0A
2
POMCK-0A
3
PG
4
+24VD1
5
CN315
NC
1
SG
2
KCTRC-0
3
+24VD2
4
KCTRO-0
5
NC
6
PWA-F-LRL
CN121
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
NC(/CS2P)
D15
D14
D13
SG
D12
D11
D10
SG
D09
D08
/INTPR1
SG
A03
A02
A01
NC(SRXD)
A00
D07
D06
A15
D05
A14
D04
A13
D03
A12
D02
A11
D01
A10
D00
A09
A04
A08
/RESET
A07
/ACK
A06
/CSP1
A05
NC(OEP)
NC(STXD)
RW
SG
A16
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC(DACK)
+3.3VA
/INTPR2
SG
BRDIN
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1st.DRAWER
2nd.DRAWER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
05/11
IPC
1
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
10.2 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)
Board to Board
DIMM(0)
Board to Board
10.3 Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450)
CN301 PWA-F-LGC (CN301) <-> MAIN-MOT, PS-ACC(CN414)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
+24VD2
+24VD2
+24VD2
+24VD2
PG
PG
PG
PG
Name
Active
-
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Power ground
Power ground
CN302 PWA-F-LGC (CN302) <-> JOB SEPARATOR (OPTION)/OFFSET
TRAY (OPTION)/BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION), IH-FAN-MOT, EXITMOT, FUS-FAN-MOT, EXIT-SNR,THMS-S-HTR, THMS-C-HTR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
B1
B2
Symbol
FUSSW-1A
MTH+-1A
MTH--1A
ETH+-1A
ETH--1A
NC
NC
+5.1VB
EXTSW-1
SG
+24VD2
FUSFN-0A
+24VD2
+24VD2
EXTMA-0A
EXTMB-0A
EXTMC-0A
EXTMD-0A
+5VSW
RLC2S-0
+5.1VB
B3
RLHSW-0
B4
RLTRS-0
Name
Paper exit unit connection detection signal
Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal
Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal
Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal
Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Exit sensor detection signal
Signal ground
+24V
Fuser unit cooling fan motor drive signal
+24V
+24V
Exit motor drive signal-A
Exit motor drive signal-B
Exit motor drive signal-C
Exit motor drive signal-D
+5V
Not used
+5V
Job separator: lower stack sensor detection signal
Offset tray: stack sensor detection signal
Job separator: paper jam sensor detection signal
Offset tray: paper feed sensor detection signal
Job separator/offset tray connection detection signal
Not used
B5
B6
JSPSW-0
RLCNT-0
B7
OPCHK1
Job separator/offset tray judgment signal
B8
B9
RLCSW-0
SG
GASOL-0A
+24VD2
PG
OFFSET2
OFFSET1
+24VD2
IHFN-0A
Job separator/offset tray cover switch detection signal
Signal ground
Job separator: upper stack sensor detection signal
Offset tray: separation sensor detection signal
Solenoid driving signal
+24V
Power ground
OCT motor drive signal-2
OCT motor drive signal-1
+24V
IH board cooling fan motor drive signal
CPSW2-0
e-STUDIO350/450 judgment signal
B10
JFSL2ON
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
SG
Signal ground
Active
H
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
L
L: Offset tray
H: Job separator
L
L: e-STUDIO350
H: e-STUDIO450
-
CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
Symbol
CLKC-1A
CLKB-1A
SCSWC-0A
DRV7-1A
DRV6-1A
DRV5-1A
DRV4-1A
DRV3-1A
DRV2-1A
DRV1-1A
DRV0-1A
PFRST-0
+5.1VB
SG
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
SIZE0-0A
SIZE1-0A
SIZE2-0A
SIZE3-0A
RETS0-0A
RETS1-0A
RETS2-0A
RETS3-0A
RETS4-0A
RETS5-0A
RETS6-0A
RETS7-0A
SCSWB-0A
LCCNT-0
Name
PFP/LCF output select signal
PFP/LCF output select signal
PFP/LCF input select signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
PFP/LCF driver control signal
Reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Size data bus-0
Size data bus-1
Size data bus-2
Size data bus-3
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF sensor detection signal
PFP/LCF input select signal
LCF connection signal
Active
L
CN304 PWA-F-LGC (CN304) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWAF-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
Symbol
PG
PG
+24VD1
+24VD1
ADM2D-0A
ADM2B-0A
ADM2C-0A
ADM2A-0A
CRT-DOWN
ADTR2-1
+5.1VB
SG
ADCNT-1
ADTR1-1
ADCOV-1
+24VD1
ADUCL-0
NC
SG
SG
SFBZ0
SFBZ1
SFBZ2
SFBZ3
+5.1VB
SFBSW-1
SG
+24VD1
FFBCL-0A
+24VD1
SOLSFB-0A
SG
SFDFED-1
+5.1VB
SFBSW
NC
Name
Power ground
Power ground
+24V
+24V
ADU motor drive signal-D
ADU motor drive signal-B
ADU motor drive signal-C
ADU motor drive signal-A
ADU motor control signal
ADU exit sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
ADU connection detection signal
ADU entrance sensor detection signal
ADU opening/closing switch detection signal
+24V
ADU clutch drive signal
Not connected
Signal ground
Signal ground
SFB paper size detection signal-0
SFB paper size detection signal-1
SFB paper size detection signal-2
SFB paper size detection signal-3
+5V
SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal
Signal ground
+24V
Bypass feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal
Signal ground
Bypass feed sensor detection signal
+5V
SFB connection detection signal
Not connected
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN305 PWA-F-LGC (CN305) <-> EMP-U-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, CST-UFEED-CLT, NEMP-U-SNR, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, CST-LFEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
Symbol
SG
CUEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUTOP-1
+5.1VB
CURGC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUFLS-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLEMP-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLTOP-1
+5.1VB
CLRGC-0
+24VD1
SG
CLFLS-0
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal
+5V
Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal
+5V
Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal
+5V
Active
-
CN306 PWA-F-LGC (CN306) <-> PS-HVT (CN551), TRY-MOT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-H-CLT, CST-U-SW, CST-L-SW
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
Symbol
NC
NC
CLTRM-0A
CLTRM-1A
CUTRC-0B
+24VD1
CFEDC-0A
+24VD1
SG
CUSW-0
SG
CLSW-0
NC
NC
+24VD1
PG
HVTM-0A
HVMR-1A
HVTD-0A
HVDVR-1A
HVTT-0A
HVTVR-1A
HVTGB-0A
HVTSP-0A
HVSAV-1A
HVTSTS
Name
Not connected
Not connected
Tray-up motor drive signal +
Tray-up motor drive signal Transport clutch (low speed) drive signal
+24V
Transport clutch (high speed) drive signal
+24V
Signal ground
Upper drawer detection switch signal
Signal ground
Lower drawer detection switch signal
Not connected
Not connected
+24V
Power ground
Drum main charger grid voltage ON/OFF signal
Drum main charger grid output reference voltage
Developer bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal
Developer bias high-voltage output reference voltage
Transfer belt high-voltage ON/OFF signal
Transfer belt high-voltage output reference voltage
Transfer guide bias voltage ON/OFF signal
Separation bias voltage ON/OFF signal
Separation bias voltage output reference voltage
High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal
Active
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
-
CN307 PWA-F-LGC (CN307) <-> PS-ACC (CN413, 414), LSU-FAN-MOT
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
+3.3VB
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
PDWN-1A
PWREN-0A
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
+5.1VD
SG
+24VD1
POLFN-0A
Name
+3.3V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
AC main power down signal
Power supply enable signal
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Laser unit cooling fan motor drive signal
Active
L
-
CN308 PWA-F-LGC (CN308) <-> M/DC-POL
Pin No
1
Symbol
POMPL-0
Name
Polygonal motor PLL signal
2
POMON-0A
Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal
3
4
5
POMCK-0A
PG
+24VD1
Polygonal motor reference clock signal
Power ground
+24V
Active
L: Normal
L: ON
H: OFF
-
CN309 PWA-F-LGC (CN309) <-> PWA-F-LRL (CN204)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
WRLVL-1
SG
BDIN-1
SG
PIDT-1
PIDT-0
SG
WRAPC-0
+5.1VB
SHDWM-1
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Laser level control signal (reference voltage)
Signal ground
Laser beam position detection signal
Signal ground
Laser image data (differential signal +)
Laser image data (differential signal -)
Signal ground
APC write signal
+5V
Laser shut down signal
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Active
-
CN312 PWA-F-LGC (CN312) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (LGC)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Symbol
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
CS2-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
ROMLD-1
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
ROM data read signal
ROM address bus [0]
ROM address bus [2]
ROM address bus [4]
ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
ROM address bus [10]
ROM address bus [12]
ROM address bus [14]
ROM address bus [16]
ROM address bus [18]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
ROM address bus [1]
ROM address bus [3]
ROM address bus [5]
ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
ROM address bus [11]
ROM address bus [13]
ROM address bus [15]
ROM address bus [17]
Download board connection detection signal
+5V
External ROM loading status signal
Active
L
L
L
CN313 PWA-F-LGC (CN313) <-> IPC (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
SG
+5.1VB
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/O00
I/O02
I/O04
I/O06
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VB
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VB
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O01
I/O03
I/O05
I/O07
SG
OE
IPRST-0A
+5.1VB
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
System address bus [0]
System address bus [2]
System address bus [4]
System address bus [6]
System data bus [0]
System data bus [2]
System data bus [4]
System data bus [6]
Signal ground
Write signal
Chip select signal to IP2
+5V
IPC connection detection signal
Signal ground
+5V
System address bus [1]
System address bus [3]
System address bus [5]
System address bus [7]
System data bus [1]
System data bus [3]
System data bus [5]
System data bus [7]
Signal ground
Output enable signal
IPC reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
Active
L
-
CN314 PWA-F-LGC (CN314) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY
KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Symbol
+24VD2
CTRON-0
CTRCNT-0
MCRUN-0
EXTCTR-0
PG
BKCTR-0
MNCTR-0
FLCTR-0
SG
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
+5.1VB
CTRCNT2
Name
+24V
Total counter ON signal
Copy permitting signal
Copying operation signal
Exit sensor ON signal
Power ground
Black and white mode counter ON signal
Mono-color mode counter ON signal
Full color mode counter ON signal
Signal ground
Paper size signal-3
Paper size signal-2
Paper size signal-1
Paper size signal-0
+5V
Copy key card detection signal
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN315 PWA-F-LGC (CN315) <-> KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
NC
SG
KCTRC-0
+24VD2
KCTR0-0
NC
Name
Not connected
Signal ground
Key copy counter/Copy key card connection detection signal
+24V
Key copy counter ON signal
Not connected
Active
L
-
CN316 PWA-F-LGC (CN316) <-> PS-IH
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
Symbol
IH2ON-0A
+5V SW
H1PWR1-0
H1PWR2-0
H1PWR3-0
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
H2PWR1-0
H2PWR2-0
H2PWR3-0
IH1ON-0A
SG
IH DUTY
H1 ERR1-0
H1 ERR2-0
Name
IH2 ON/OFF signal
+5V
Heater H1 power data-1
Heater H1 power data-2
Heater H1 power data-3
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Heater H2 power data-1
Heater H2 power data-2
Heater H2 power data-3
IH1 ON/OFF signal
Signal ground
IH1/2 duty control signal
Heater H1 error signal-1
Heater H1 error signal-2
Active
H
H
-
CN317 PWA-F-LGC (CN317) <-> ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, USD-TNRFLL-SNR2, MID-FAN-MOT, EXIT-FAN-MOT, SP-FAN-MOT, LPERS, FRNT-COV-SW, MAIN-SW, TEMP/HUMI-SNR
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
Symbol
ATSSW-0
ATSVR-1A
+24VD2
ATS-1A
SG
SG
DRTH-0A
SG
FRDSW-0
SG
RSTSW-0A
+24VD2
SG
TBNFL-1
+5.1VB
+24VD2
ERSLP-0A
+24VD2
MIIDFN-0A
+24VD2
EXTFN-0A
+24VD2
SPFN0A
NC
NC
+5.1VB
HMS-1A
SG
TEMP-1
NC
Name
Auto toner sensor connection detection signal
Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage
+24V
Black auto-toner sensor detection signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Drum thermistor detection signal
Signal ground
Front cover opening/closing switch signal
Signal ground
Reset signal from the main switch
+24V
Signal ground
Toner bag full detection sensor-2 signal
+5V
+24V
Exposure lamp drive signal
+24V
Middle fan motor drive signal
+24V
Exhaust fan motor drive signal
+24V
Sub-separation fan motor drive signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Humidity sensor signal
Signal ground
Temperature sensor signal
Not connected
Active
L
Analog
Analog
Analog
L
Analog
Analog
-
CN318 PWA-F-LGC (CN318) <-> MAIN-MOT, DEV-FAN-MOT1, DEV-CLT,
TNR-MOT, RGT-CLT, RGST-SNR, FED-U-SNR, FED-L-SNR, SIDECOV-SW, TNR-SW, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR1
Pin No
A1
Symbol
MAMPL-1
Name
Main motor PLL signal
A2
MAMBK-0A
Main motor brake signal
A3
MAMCW-0A
Main motor rotational direction signal
A4
MAMON-0A
Main motor ON/OFF signal
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
SG
+5.1VB
MAMCK-1A
+24VD2
DEVFN-0A
+24VD2
DEVCL-OA
TNRMT-0A
TNRMT-1A
+24VD2
RGTCL-0A
NC
NC
SG
PSTPC-1
+5.1VB
SG
CUFED-1
+5.1VB
SG
CLFED-1
+5.1VB
SDCSW-1
SG
SG
BTLSW-1
SG
TBFL-1
+5.1VB
NC
Signal ground
+5V
Main motor reference clock signal
+24V
Developer unit cooling fan-1 motor drive signal
+24V
Developer drive clutch drive signal
Toner motor drive signal
Toner motor drive signal
+24V
Registration clutch drive signal
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Registration sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal
+5V
Side cover opening/closing switch signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Toner cartridge switch signal
Signal ground
Toner bag full detection sensor-1 signal
+5V
Not connected
Active
L: Normal
L: Braking
H: Normal
L: CW
H: CCW
L: ON
H: OFF
-
CN320 PWA-F-LGC (CN320) <-> DEV-FAN-MOT2
Pin No
1
2
Symbol
+24VD2
DV2FN-0A
Name
+24V
Developer unit cooling fan-2 motor drive signal
Active
-
CN100 PWA-F-SYS (CN100) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Symbol
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
RDX
CS7-A
CS7-B
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
DWNLED
/CS0
+3.3VB
RMSL
/WRX
SG
SG
Name
System data bus [0]
System data bus [2]
System data bus [4]
System data bus [6]
System data bus [8]
System data bus [10]
System data bus [12]
System data bus [14]
System address bus [19]
System address bus [17]
System address bus [15]
System address bus [13]
System address bus [11]
System address bus [9]
System address bus [7]
System address bus [5]
System address bus [3]
System address bus [1]
System read signal
Chip select signal (7-A)
Chip select signal (7-B)
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
System data bus [1]
System data bus [3]
System data bus [5]
System data bus [7]
System data bus [9]
System data bus [11]
System data bus [13]
System data bus [15]
System address bus [18]
System address bus [16]
System address bus [14]
System address bus [12]
System address bus [10]
System address bus [8]
System address bus [6]
System address bus [4]
System address bus [2]
System address bus [0]
System address bus [20]
System chip select signal-0
+3.3V
System control signal
System write signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Active
-
CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> FAX BOARD (CN701) (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Symbol
+5.1VB
DA1
+5.1VB
DD0
+5.1VB
DD3
+5.1VB
DD6
+5.1VB
DD9
SG
DD12
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
+3.3VB
INTRQ
+3.3VB
+5.1VA
-12VB
SG
+12VB
DA0
DA2
IDECS
DD1
DD2
DD4
DD5
DD7
DD8
DD10
DD11
DD13
DD14
DD15
/DIOR
/DIOW
/DMACK
/DLDCS0
/RESET
DMARQ
NC
FXWP
SG
SG
NC
Name
+5V
IDE Address [1]
+5V
FAX data bus [0]
+5V
FAX data bus [3]
+5V
FAX data bus [6]
+5V
FAX data bus [9]
Signal ground
FAX data bus [12]
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
IDE Interrupt request signal
+3.3V
+5V
-12V
Signal ground
+12V
IDE Address [0]
IDE Address [2]
IDE chip select signal
FAX data bus [1]
FAX data bus [2]
FAX data bus [4]
FAX data bus [5]
FAX data bus [7]
FAX data bus [8]
FAX data bus [10]
FAX data bus [11]
FAX data bus [13]
FAX data bus [14]
FAX data bus [15]
IDE I/O read signal
IDE I/O write signal
DMA acknowledge signal
Chip select signal
Reset signal
DMA request signal
Not connected
FAX wake-up signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Not connected
Active
L
-
CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Symbol
SYSRST
SCTS
STXD
SRXD
SRTS
SCNT
SG
SVDEN
SDCLK
SHDEN
SG
SG
SCD7
SCD6
SCD5
SCD4
SCD3
SCD2
SCD1
SCD0
Name
System reset signal
Transmission enabled
Transmitted SLG data
Received SLG data
Transmission request signal
SLG board connection detection signal
Signal ground
Vertical scanning synchronized signal
Clock signal for scanning data transmission
Horizontal scanning synchronized signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Scanning data [7]
Scanning data [6]
Scanning data [5]
Scanning data [4]
Scanning data [3]
Scanning data [2]
Scanning data [1]
Scanning data [0]
Active
-
CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> PC I/F (IEEE1284)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Symbol
STB
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
NACK
BUSY
PERROR
SELECT
NATFD
NC
SG
FG
LOGIC
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
NINIT
NFAULT
NC
NC
NC
NSEL IN
Name
nStrobe
Data bus [0]
Data bus [1]
Data bus [2]
Data bus [3]
Data bus [4]
Data bus [5]
Data bus [6]
Data bus [7]
nAck
Busy
PError
Select
nAutoFd
Not connected
Signal ground
Frame ground
Peripheral Logic High (Pull-up)
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
nInit
nFault
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
nSelect In
Active
H
-
CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> RS-232C (CN172)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
TXD
RXD
RTS
DSR
DTR
CTS
CNT
SG
Name
Transmitted serial data
Received serial data
Transmission request signal
Data set ready signal
Data terminal ready signal
Transmission enabled signal
Carrier detection signal
Signal ground
Active
-
CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Symbol
/RESET
SG
DD7
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
SG
NC(KEY)
MDARQ
SG
/DIOW
SG
/DIOR
SG
IORDY
SG
/DMACK
SG
INTRQ
NC(RESERV
ED)
DA1
/PDIAG
DA0
DA2
/CS0
/CS1
/DASP
SG
Name
Reset signal
Signal ground
Data bus [7]
Data bus [8]
Data bus [6]
Data bus [9]
Data bus [5]
Data bus [10]
Data bus [4]
Data bus [11]
Data bus [3]
Data bus [12]
Data bus [2]
Data bus [13]
Data bus [1]
Data bus [14]
Data bus [0]
Data bus [15]
Signal ground
Not connected
DMA request signal
Signal ground
I/O write signal
Signal ground
I/O read signal
Signal ground
I/O ready signal
Signal ground
DMA acknowledge signal
Signal ground
Interrupt request signal
Reserve signal
-
Device address [1]
Passed diagnostics
Device address [0]
Device address [2]
Chip select-0
Chip select-1
Device active or slave present signal
Signal ground
L
L
L
L
-
CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> HDD (CN171)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
+12VA
SG
SG
+5.1VA
Name
+12V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
Active
-
CN116 PWA-F-SYS (CN116) <-> DIMM (0)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
Symbol
SG
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
+3.3VA
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
SG
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
+3.3VA
DQ14
DQ15
NC
NC
SG
NC
NC
+3.3VA
/WE
DQMB0
DQMB1
/CS0
NC
SG
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
BA1
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
CLK0
SG
NC
/CS2
DQMB2
DQMB3
NC
+3.3VA
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
DQ16
DQ17
DQ18
DQ19
+3.3VA
DQ20
NC
NC
CKE1
SG
DQ21
DQ22
DQ23
SG
DQ24
DQ25
DQ26
DQ27
+3.3VA
DQ28
DQ29
DQ30
DQ31
SG
CLK2
NC
NC(WP)
SDA
SCL
+3.3VA
SG
DQ32
DQ33
DQ34
DQ35
+3.3VA
DQ36
DQ37
DQ38
DQ39
DQ40
SG
DQ41
DQ42
DQ43
DQ44
DQ45
+3.3VA
DQ46
DQ47
NC
NC
SG
NC
NC
+3.3VA
/CAS
DQMB4
DQMB5
/CS1
/RAS
SG
A1
A3
A5
A7
A9
A11
BA0
+3.3VA
NC(CLK1)
A12
SG
CKE
/CS3
DQMB6
DQMB7
NC(A13)
+3.3VA
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
DQ48
DQ49
DQ50
DQ51
+3.3VA
DQ52
NC
NC
NC
SG
DQ53
DQ54
DQ55
SG
DQ56
DQ57
DQ58
DQ59
+3.3VA
DQ60
DQ61
DQ62
DQ63
SG
NC(CLK3)
NC
SA0
SA1
SA2
+3.3VA
Name
Signal ground
Memory data bus [0]
Memory data bus [1]
Memory data bus [2]
Memory data bus [3]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [4]
Memory data bus [5]
Memory data bus [6]
Memory data bus [7]
Memory data bus [8]
Signal ground
Memory data bus [9]
Memory data bus [10]
Memory data bus [11]
Memory data bus [12]
Memory data bus [13]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [14]
Memory data bus [15]
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
+3.3V
Data write enable signal
Output disable/write mask-0
Output disable/write mask-1
Chip select signal-0
Not connected
Signal ground
Memory address bus [0]
Memory address bus [1]
Memory address bus [2]
Memory address bus [3]
Memory address bus [4]
Memory address bus [10]
Bank select-1
+3.3V
+3.3V
Clock-0 input
Signal ground
Not connected
Chip select signal-2
Output disable/write mask-2
Output disable/write mask-3
Not connected
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Memory data bus [16]
Memory data bus [17]
Memory data bus [18]
Memory data bus [19]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [20]
Not connected
Not connected
Clock enable signal
Signal ground
Memory data bus [21]
Memory data bus [22]
Memory data bus [23]
Signal ground
Memory data bus [24]
Memory data bus [25]
Memory data bus [26]
Memory data bus [27]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [28]
Memory data bus [29]
Memory data bus [30]
Memory data bus [31]
Signal ground
Clock-2 input
Not connected
Not connected
PD serial data
PD serial clock
+3.3V
Signal ground
Memory data bus [32]
Memory data bus [33]
Memory data bus [34]
Memory data bus [35]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [36]
Memory data bus [37]
Memory data bus [38]
Memory data bus [39]
Memory data bus [40]
Signal ground
Memory data bus [41]
Memory data bus [42]
Memory data bus [43]
Memory data bus [44]
Memory data bus [45]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [46]
Memory data bus [47]
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Not connected
Not connected
+3.3V
Column address strobe signal
Output disable/write mask-4
Output disable/write mask-5
Chip select signal-1
Row address strobe signal
Signal ground
Memory address bus [1]
Memory address bus [3]
Memory address bus [5]
Memory address bus [7]
Memory address bus [9]
Memory address bus [11]
Bank select-0
+3.3V
Not connected (Clock-1 input)
Memory address bus [12]
Signal ground
Clock enable signal
Chip select signal-3
Output disable/write mask-6
Output disable/write mask-7
Not connected (Memory address bus [13])
+3.3V
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Memory data bus [48]
Memory data bus [49]
Memory data bus [50]
Memory data bus [51]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [52]
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Signal ground
Memory data bus [53]
Memory data bus [54]
Memory data bus [55]
Signal ground
Memory data bus [56]
Memory data bus [57]
Memory data bus [58]
Memory data bus [59]
+3.3V
Memory data bus [60]
Memory data bus [61]
Memory data bus [62]
Memory data bus [63]
Signal ground
Not connected (Clock-3 input)
Not connected
PD address [0]
PD address [1]
PD address [2]
+3.3V
Active
-
CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN321)
Pin No
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
Symbol
+5.1VB
CBSY-0
CMD-0
SACK-0
SERR-0
SBSY-0
STS-0
CACK-0
CERR-0
SG
SG
SG
IRCLK-1
SG
HSYNC-0
SG
VSYNC-0
MCNT-1
SYSRST-0
IDATX[0]
IDATX[1]
IDATX[2]
IDATX[3]
IDATX[4]
IDATX[5]
IDATX[6]
IDATX[7]
SG
IDCLK-1
SG
IHDEN-0
SG
IVDEN-0
+3.3VB
Name
+5V
System command busy
Command data
System status acknowledge signal
System status error signal
System status busy signal
Status data
System command acknowledge signal
System command error signal
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
Clock signal input for image data transmission
Signal ground
Horizontal scanning synchronized signal
Signal ground
Vertical scanning synchronized signal
LGC board connection detection signal
System reset signal
IDA Transmitted data bus [0]
IDA Transmitted data bus [1]
IDA Transmitted data bus [2]
IDA Transmitted data bus [3]
IDA Transmitted data bus [4]
IDA Transmitted data bus [5]
IDA Transmitted data bus [6]
IDA Transmitted data bus [7]
Signal ground
Clock signal output for image data transmission
Signal ground
Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction
Signal ground
Data enable of the vertical scanning direction
+3.3V
Active
-
CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
XSCL-1A
LP-1A
WF-1A
YD-1A
INVGND
BZON-0A
CPPOW-1A
LDCLK-1A
LDDAT-1A
LDLTH-1A
LDON1-0A
LDON0-0A
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
CPRST-0A
SG
RTS0-0A
CTS0-0A
SOUT(0)
SIN(0)
SG
UD3-1A
UD2-1A
UD1-1A
UD0-1A
SG
LCDEN-1A
Name
LCD data transmission clock
LCD data latch pulse
LCD frame signal
LCD scanning line start signal
Signal ground
Buzzer-ON signal
Panel connection detection signal
LED serial clock
LED serial data
LED data latch signal
LED drive selection signal-1
LED drive selection signal-0
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Reset signal
Signal ground
Key controller SIO Transmission request signal
Key controller SIO Transmission enabled signal
Key controller SIO transmitted serial data
Key controller SIO received serial data
Signal ground
LCD display data-3
LCD display data-2
LCD display data-1
LCD display data-0
Signal ground
LCD enable signal
Active
H
H
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> USB DEVICE
Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
VBUS
DD+
SG
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
Active
-
Symbol
VBUS
DD+
SG
VBUS
DD+
SG
Name
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
+5V
USB serial data
USB serial data
Signal ground
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Symbol
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
NC (/CS2P)
D15
D14
D13
SG
D12
D11
D10
SG
D09
D08
/INTPR1
SG
A03
A02
A01
NC (SRXD)
A00
D07
D06
A15
D05
A14
D04
A13
D03
A12
D02
A11
D01
A10
D00
A09
A04
A08
/RESET
A07
/ACK
A06
/CSP1
A05
NC (OEO)
NC (STXD)
RW
SG
A16
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC (DACK)
+3.3VA
/INTPR2
SG
BRDNIN
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
Name
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Not connected
I/F data bus [15]
I/F data bus [14]
I/F data bus [13]
Signal ground
I/F data bus [12]
I/F data bus [11]
I/F data bus [10]
Signal ground
I/F data bus [9]
I/F data bus [8]
Interrupt PR1 signal
Signal ground
I/F address bus [3]
I/F address bus [2]
I/F address bus [1]
Not connected
I/F address bus [0]
I/F data bus [7]
I/F data bus [6]
I/F address bus [15]
I/F data bus [5]
I/F address bus [14]
I/F data bus [4]
I/F address bus [13]
I/F data bus [3]
I/F address bus [12]
I/F data bus [2]
I/F address bus [11]
I/F data bus [1]
I/F address bus [10]
I/F data bus [0]
I/F address bus [9]
I/F address bus [4]
I/F address bus [8]
System reset signal
I/F address bus [7]
NIC Acknowledge signal
I/F address bus [6]
Chip select signal
I/F address bus [5]
Not connected
Not connected
Read/write to NIC
Signal ground
I/F address bus [16]
Signal ground
+3.3V
Signal ground
Not connected
+3.3V
PR2 interrupt signal
Signal ground
NIC board in detection signal
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Active
L
-
CN124 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN150)/SCRAMBLER BOARD
(OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
Symbol
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
-12VA
-12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(2)
OPBINT(0)
SG
PCICLK(5)
SG
PCICLK(3)
SG
REQ(1)#
REQ(0)#
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE(3]#
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE(2)#
SG
IRDY#
+3.3VA
DEVSEL#
SG
LOCK#
PERR#
+3.3VA
SERR#
+3.3VA
C/BE(1)#
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
AD[8]
AD[7]
+3.3VA
AD[5]
AD[3]
SG
AD[1]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
+12VA
+12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(1)
+3.3VA
PCIRST#
+3.3VA
PCICLK(4)
+3.3VA
GNT(1)#
GNT(0)#
SG
PME#
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME#
SG
TRDY#
SG
STOP#
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[9]
SG
C/BE(0)#
+3.3VA
AD[6]
AD[4]
SG
AD[2]
AD[0]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
Name
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
-12V
-12V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
Interrupt request-2
Interrupt request-0
Signal ground
PCI clock-5 (Not used)
Signal ground
PCI clock-3
Signal ground
Data request signal-1
Data request signal-0
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [31]
PCI address/data bus [29]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [27]
PCI address/data bus [25]
+3.3V
Command and byte enable-3
PCI address/data bus [23]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [21]
PCI address/data bus [19]
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [17]
Command and byte enable-2
Signal ground
Initiator ready
+3.3V
Device select
Signal ground
Lock
Data parity Error
+3.3V
System Error
+3.3V
Command and byte enable-1
PCI address/data bus [14]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [12]
PCI address/data bus [10]
PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [8]
PCI address/data bus [7]
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [5]
PCI address/data bus [3]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [1]
+3.3V
+5V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
+12V
+12V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
Interrupt request-1
+3.3V
PCI reset signal
+3.3V
PCI clock-4
+3.3V
Grant-1
Grant-0
Signal ground
Power Management Event
PCI address/data bus [30]
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [28]
PCI address/data bus [26]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [24]
+3.3V
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [22]
PCI address/data bus [20]
Ground
PCI address/data bus [18]
PCI address/data bus [16]
+3.3V
Cycle frame
Signal ground
Target ready
Signal ground
Stop
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Parity
PCI address/data bus [15]
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [13]
PCI address/data bus [11]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [9]
Signal ground
Command and byte enable-0
+3.3V
PCI address/data bus [6]
PCI address/data bus [4]
Signal ground
PCI address/data bus [2]
PCI address/data bus [0]
+3.3V
+5V
+5V
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
-
CN126 PWA-F-SYS (CN126) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY
KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Symbol
L/S
FULL-C
MONO-C
B/W
+5.1VA
SG
NC
Name
Paper size signal
Full-color mode signal
Mono-color mode signal
Black and white mode signal
+5V
Signal ground
Not connected
Active
-
CN412 PS-ACC (CN412) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN122)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Symbol
PWREN
PWRDN
-12VB
SG
+12VB
SG
+12VA
SG
-12VA
SG
SG
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
SG
SG
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VB
+5.1VA
Name
Power supply enable signal
AC main power down signal
-12V
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
-12V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
+5V
Active
L
L
-
CN413 PS-ACC (CN413) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN307), FAX BOARD (CN702),
PWA-F-FIL (CN495)/PWA-F-FUS (CN431)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Symbol
+3.3VB
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
PDWN-1A
PWRFN-0A
+5.1VB
SG
+24VB
PG
Name
+3.3V
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+12V
Signal ground
AC main power down signal
Power supply cooling fan drive signal
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Power ground
Active
L
-
CN414 PS-ACC (CN414) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN301, CN307)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Symbol
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
+24VD2
+24VD2
PG
PG
+5.1VD
SG
Name
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
Signal ground
Active
-
Active
-
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN7
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN9
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
PWA-F-SLG (CN1) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN14)
Symbol
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
CCDRS
SG
CCDCP
SG
CCDSH
SG
CCDCK2B
SG
CCDCK2A
SG
CCDCK1A
SG
CCD-EVEN
SG
CCD-ODD
SG
AG
AG
AG
+12VB
+12VB
+12VB
Name
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
CCD RS signal
Signal ground
CCD CP signal
Signal ground
CCD TG signal
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-2B
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-2A
Signal ground
CCD shift clock-1A
Signal ground
CCD even data
Signal ground
CCD odd data
Signal ground
Analog ground
Analog ground
Analog ground
+12V
+12V
+12V
CN501 FAX (CN501) <-> NCU (1) (OPTION)
Active
-
PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR
Symbol
SG
PLTN-1A
+5V
SG
HOME-1A
+5V
Name
Signal ground
Platen sensor detection signal
+5V
Signal ground
Carriage home position sensor detection signal
+5V
Active
-
PWA-F-SLG (CN7) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION)
Symbol
DFAK
DFSCST
DFRXD
SG
DFTXD
SG
DFRAK
DFRRQ
DFRQ
DFCNT
Name
RADF acknowledge signal
VARID signal from RADF
Received serial data
Signal ground
RADF transmitted serial data
Signal ground
Acknowledge signal from RADF
Request signal from RADF
RADF request signal
RADF connection detection signal
Active
-
PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)
Symbol
PG
PG
LMPON-A
+24VD4
+24VD4
Name
Power ground
Power ground
Exposure lamp ON signal
+24V
+24V
Active
H
-
CN10 PWA-F-SLG (CN10) <-> APS1 (A4 SERIES ONLY), APS2, APS3,
APS4, APS5
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
NC
+24VD4
FANSLG
+5VAPS
APSR-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APSC-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS3-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS2-0A
SG
+5VAPS
APS1-0A
SG
Name
Not connected
+24V(Reserved)
Not connected
+5V
Automatic original detection sensor signal
Signal ground
+5V
Automatic original detection sensor signal
Signal ground
+5V
Automatic original detection sensor signal
Signal ground
+5V
Automatic original detection sensor signal
Signal ground
+5V
Automatic original detection sensor signal
Signal ground
Active
-
CN19 PWA-F-SLG (CN19) <-> SCAN-MOT
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
SCNM-BB
+24VD4
SCNM-B
SCNM-AB
+24VD4
SCNM-A
Name
Scan motor drive signal-B
+24V
Scan motor drive signal-B
Scan motor drive signal-A
+24V
Scan motor drive signal-A
Active
-
CN22 PWA-F-SLG (CN22) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
J422
Pin No
1
2
3
4
J423
Pin No
1
2
3
J424
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J425
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J426
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Symbol
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
MRD
(PNCNT)DLA
D[0]
(SSW)DLAD
[2]
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
MAD[12]
MAD[14]
MAD[16]
MAD[18]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
CS02-0
(PNCNT)DLA
D[1]
(MER)DLAD
[3]
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
MAD[11]
MAD[13]
MAD[15]
MAD[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VB
LED
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bus [6]
ROM data read signal
Active
-
D/L address bus [0]
-
D/L address bus [2]
-
ROM address bus [4]
ROM address bus [6]
ROM address bus [8]
ROM address bus [10]
ROM address bus [12]
ROM address bus [14]
ROM address bus [16]
ROM address bus [18]
Signal ground
Signal ground
ROM data bus [1]
ROM data bus [3]
ROM data bus [5]
ROM data bus [7]
Chip select signal
-
D/L address bus [1]
-
D/L address bus [3]
-
ROM address bus [5]
ROM address bus [7]
ROM address bus [9]
ROM address bus [11]
ROM address bus [13]
ROM address bus [15]
ROM address bus [17]
ROM select signal
+5V
LED drive signal
-
INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO
Symbol
NC
NC
-
Name
Exposure lamp high-voltage output
Not connected
Not connected
Exposure lamp high-voltage output
Active
-
PWA-F-DSP (J422) <-> LCD PANEL
Symbol
YD
KL
XR
YU
Name
Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D)
X-axis touch position detection terminal (L)
X-axis touch position detection terminal (R)
Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U)
Active
-
PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT
Symbol
CCFL+
NC
CCFL-
Name
High-voltage terminal (High)
Not connected
high-voltage terminal (Low)
Active
-
Symbol
FRAME
LAOD
CP
SG
+5.1VA
SG
VEE
/D.OFF
D0
D1
D2
D3
Name
LCD scanning line start signal
LCD data latch pulse
LCD data transmission clock
Ground
+5V
Signal ground
Ground
LCD enable signal
LCD display data-0
LCD display data-1
LCD display data-2
LCD display data-3
Active
-
PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428)
Symbol
LDFC-1
LDFC-2
LDFC-4
LDFC-5
LDFC-6
LDFC-7
LDFC-8
LDFC-9
LDFC-10
LDFC-11
LDFC-12
LDFC-13
LDFC-15
LDON0
LDON1
SG
Name
LED driver output (1)
LED driver output (2)
LED driver output (4)
LED driver output (5)
LED driver output (6)
LED driver output (7)
LED driver output (8)
LED driver output (9)
LED driver output (10)
LED driver output (11)
LED driver output (12)
LED driver output (13)
LED driver output (15)
LED common driver signal (0)
LED common driver signal (1)
Signal ground
Active
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
-
PWA-F-DSP (J426) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J429)
Symbol
SCN15
SCN14
SCN13
SCN12
SCN11
RET0
RET1
RET2
RET3
RET8
RET9
Name
Button scanning signal (5)
Button scanning signal (4)
Button scanning signal (3)
Button scanning signal (2)
Button scanning signal (1)
Button scanning return signal (0)
Button scanning return signal (1)
Button scanning return signal (2)
Button scanning return signal (3)
Button scanning return signal (8)
Button scanning return signal (9)
Active
-
PWA-F-NIC (J2) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Symbol
(TD+)FA1
(TD-)FA2
(RD+)FA3
FA45
FA45
(RD-)FA6
FA78
FA78
NC(MTG)
NC(MTG)
SH
SH
SH
SH
Name
Transmitted data +
Transmitted data Received data +
Not used
Not used
Received data Not used
Not used
Not connected
Not connected
Shield
Shield
Shield
Shield
Active
-
CN206 PWA-F-LRL (CN206) <-> PER-F-LDR (C201)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Symbol
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
WRLVL-1
SG
NC
SG
PIDT-1
PIDT-0
SG
WRAPC-0
NC
SHDWM-1
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
Name
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Laser level control signal (reference voltage)
Signal ground
Not used
Signal ground
Laser image data (differential signal +)
Laser image data (differential signal -)
Signal ground
APC write signal
Not used
Laser shut down signal
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Active
-
CN207 PWA-F-LRL (CN207) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN202)
Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
+5.1VB
SG
BDIN-1
Name
+5V
Signal ground
Laser beam position detection signal
Active
-
CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR
Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
SG
ADUFL
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
ADU exit sensor detection signal
+5V
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Symbol
+24VD3
+24VD3
PG
PG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
+24VD4
+24VD4
PG
PG
NC
NC
+12VB
SG
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
SG
SG
+5.1VB
+5.1VB
SG
SG
Name
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+24V
+24V
Power ground
Power ground
Not connected
Not connected
+12V
Signal ground
+3.3V
+3.3V
Signal ground
Signal ground
+5V
+5V
Signal ground
Signal ground
Active
-
Active
-
CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR
Pin No
1
2
3
Symbol
SG
ADUFU
+5.1VB
Name
Signal ground
ADU entrance sensor detection signal
+5V
Active
-
CN416 PS-ACC (CN416) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
Symbol
+5.1VB
SG
+24VD5
PG
Name
+5V
Signal ground
+24V
Power ground
Active
-
CN418 PS-ACC (CN418) <-> PS-FAN-MOT
Pin No
1
2
Pin No
1
Symbol
+24VD1
PWRFN-0A
Symbol
-
Name
+24V
Power supply cooling fan drive signal
Name
High-voltage to main charger wire
Active
-
Active
-
OUT2 PS-HVT (OUT2) <-> MAIN CHARGER GRID
Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to main charger grid
Active
-
OUT3 PS-HVT (OUT3) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS
Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to developer charger bias
Active
-
OUT4 PS-HVT (OUT4) <-> TRANSFER BIAS
Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to transfer charger bias
Active
-
OUT5 PS-HVT (OUT5) <-> TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS
Pin No
1
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to transfer guide bias
Active
-
OUT6 PS-HVT (OUT6) <-> SEPARATION BIAS
Pin No
1
05/11
Symbol
-
Name
High-voltage to separation charger bias
Active
-
CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Symbol
+24VD2
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
+24VD2
Name
+24V
ADU motor drive signal-A
ADU motor drive signal-B
ADU motor drive signal-C
ADU motor drive signal-D
+24V
Active
-
CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW
Pin No
1
2
Symbol
SG
COVSW
Name
Signal ground
ADU opening/closing detection signal
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
EXTHO OK
+5.1VB
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG
Name
Transmitted FAX data
Received FAX data
CML relay drive signal
Dial pulse drive signal
RG relay drive signal
-3db ATT exchange signal
MODEM select signal
MODEM select signal
Not used
Analog ground
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
+24V
Not used
Analog ground
Ring signal detection
Facsimile data answer detection
Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal
Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal
Internal telephone hook signal
External telephone hook signal
+5V
Anlog ground
+5V
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
+24V
Power ground
Active
L
L
-
CN502 FAX (CN502) <-> NCU (2) (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Symbol
TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
NC
NC
+5VA
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
NC
Name
Transmitted FAX data
Received FAX data
CML relay drive signal
Dial pulse drive signal
Not used
-3 db ATT exchange signal
Modem select signal
Modem select signal
Not used
Signal ground
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
Not connected
Not used
Analog ground
Ring signal detect
Facsimile data answer detection
Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal
Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal
Not connected
Not connected
+5V
Analog ground
+5V
-12V
Analog ground
+12V
Not connected
Not connected
Active
L
L
-
CN503 FAX (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
Symbol
SP+
SP-
Name
Speaker output (+)
Speaker output (-)
-
CN600 FAX (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Symbol
TXOUT2
+5VA
+12VB
+3.3VB
MOD2DMA-1
SG
MEM2CS-0
+5.1VB
MEMRD2-0
CLKOE-1
TXEN2-1
+5.1VB
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[0]
+5.1VB
CEP1RST-0
5.1VB
SG
CEPCLK
SG
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
SG
MOD2DET-0
SG
DREQC2-1
DACKC2-0
RXIN2
AG
-12VB
AG
MOD2INT-1
MOD2CS-0
MOD2RST-0
SG
RXEN2-1
MEMWRH2-0
MEMWRL2-0
A[18]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[11]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
CPURST-0
CEP2INT-1
5.1VB
5.1VB
IORD2-0
IOWR2-0
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
D[11]
D[13]
D[15]
5.1VB
5.1VB
CEP2CS-0
DREQD2-1
DACKD2-0
Name
Transmitted data
+5V
+12V
+3.3V
Modem 2 DMA signal
Signal ground
SRAM chip select signal
+5V
SRAM data read signal
Clock out enable signal
TX enable signal
+5V
MDM address bus [16]
MDM address bus [14]
MDM address bus [12]
MDM address bus [10]
MDM address bus [8]
MDM address bus [6]
MDM address bus [4]
MDM address bus [2]
MDM address bus [0]
+5V
CEP1 reset signal
+5V
Signal ground
System clock signal
Signal ground
MDM data bus [0]
MDM data bus [2]
MDM data bus [4]
MDM data bus [6]
MDM data bus [8]
MDM data bus [10]
MDM data bus [12]
MDM data bus [14]
Signal ground
Modem 2 detection signal
Signal ground
Data request signal
Data acknowledge signal
Received data
Analog ground
-12V
Analog ground
Modem 2 interrupt signal
Modem 2 chip select signal
Modem 2 reset signal
Signal ground
RX enable signal
SRAM high byte write signal
SRAM low byte write signal
MDM address bus [18]
MDM address bus [17]
MDM address bus [15]
MDM address bus [13]
MDM address bus [11]
MDM address bus [9]
MDM address bus [7]
MDM address bus [5]
MDM address bus [3]
MDM address bus [1]
CPU reset signal
CEP2 interrupt signal
+5V
+5V
MDM data read signal
MDM data write signal
MDM data bus [1]
MDM data bus [3]
MDM data bus [5]
MDM data bus [7]
MDM data bus [9]
MDM data bus [11]
MDM data bus [13]
MDM data bus [15]
+5V
+5V
CEP2 chip select signal
Data request signal
Data acknowledge signal
Active
-
CN602 FAX (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)
PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL
CN415 PS-ACC (CN415) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN6), RADF (CN1) (OPTION)
OUT1 PS-HVT (OUT1) <-> MAIN CHARGER WIRE
CN120 PWA-F-SYS (CN120) <-> USB HOST
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN1
CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN121) <-> PWA-F-NIC (J3)
Active
H
L
H
Active
-
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
J600
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Symbol
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDET0-0
5.1VB
LEDDL-0
Name
ROM data bus [0]
ROM data bus [2]
ROM data bus [4]
ROM data bu">